JP6544589B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a rotating game machine (slot machine) and a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine).

  Some conventional gaming machines perform effects by display, sound, light, movement of a movable body, and the like in order to improve the interest of the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement of the movable body.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by a movable body.

According to the invention
It is a game console provided with an operable movable body,
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body having drive means,
The first light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in the first state,
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable portion in the second state,
The second light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in the first state, and
The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the first movable portion in the second state,
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable portion in a third state,
The substrate on which the first light emitting means is mounted is a substrate on which the second light emitting means is also mounted,
The posture of the substrate changes during operation of the first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body that may operate when the operation means is operated,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the third state through at least the first state by driving of the one driving means.
The first movable portion is a movable portion having a light emitting substrate,
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in the second state.
A game stand characterized by the above is provided.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body.

It is an appearance perspective view which looked at Pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure, (b) shows an example of the decorative symbol, (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure It is. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400, (c) is a first sub routine 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the control unit 400. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for yes / no determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for yes / no determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure 1 determination. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 determination. (A) is a figure which shows a special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table, (b) is a figure which shows a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table. The figure which shows the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of having won by the 1st special figure starting port 230 and the special figure 2 special figure fixed starting port 233 alternately by left hitting in a non-electric support state (normal state) It is. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. (A) and (b) are vertical sectional views of the passage structure 1, (c) is a sectional view taken along the line II of FIG. 15 (a), (d) is a sectional view taken along the line II-II of FIG. (E) is the III-III sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 15 (a). It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which made the attacker adjoin to the channel | path structure 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is a view showing another arrangement example of the passage structure 1; It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the channel | path structure 1, (b) is a front view of the attachment board 14. FIG. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing of a passage part and the passage aspect of a game ball. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view of the example of arrangement of a ball detection sensor. (A) is a front view of the modification of a channel | path part, (b) is the perspective view. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the other example of a movable body. (A)-(d) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of the other example of a movable body. They are the front view which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1, a side view on either side, a top view, and a bottom view. (A) is a rear view which shows the other example of the channel | path structure 1, (b) is a perspective view of the back side. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing of the component of the channel | path structure 1. FIG. (A)-(d) is a V-V sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 31, a VI-VI sectional view taken on the line, a VII-VII sectional view taken on the line, and a sectional view taken along the VIII-VIII in FIG. (A) And (b) is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. (A) And (b) is explanatory drawing of a channel | path part. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line IX-IX in FIG. 33 (b), (b) is an explanatory view of an entering mode of the gaming ball into the opening OP2, (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX in FIG. It is. (A)-(d) is explanatory drawing of the channel | path part which has a guide structure of a game ball. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the Pachinko machine of an embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine of FIG. 39 from the back side. It is the front view which looked at the game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) is a figure which showed an example of a decorative symbol, (c) is a figure which showed an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the first sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of strobe interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit, (c) is a timer variable update interrupt of the first sub-control unit A flowchart of processing, (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the first secondary control unit. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, (c) is a timer interrupt of the second sub-control unit It is a flowchart of a process. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a partial disassembled back view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movement mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movement mechanism. It is a partial detail view of a movement mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body and a moving mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing of a movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the example of the operation timing of a movable part. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration symbol, (c) These show an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows the 1st The flow of secondary control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic front view which shows the state (the 1) which the presentation movable body 224 moved to the front of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic front view which shows the state (the 2) which the presentation movable body 224 moved to the front of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable-object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable-object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a disassembled perspective view of the movable-object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the movable-object unit of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a front view of the presentation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the production | generation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a rear view of the presentation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the production | generation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a rear view and a fragmentary sectional view of the presentation movable body of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the presentation movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the presentation movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the presentation movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows typically the cross section of the area | region containing the presentation movable body 224 by one embodiment of this invention, and the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect (the 1) in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by the embodiment of this invention (the 2). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by the embodiment of this invention (the 3). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by the embodiment of this invention (the 4). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by the embodiment of this invention (the 5). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by the embodiment of this invention (the 6). FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game console according to a modification of the embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on Embodiment D of this invention from the front. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the drop deployment combination unit 700. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the drop deployment combination unit 700. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the drop deployment combination unit 700. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 1st structure 712b. (B) It is the disassembled perspective view which extracted and showed the peripheral member of the 4th structure 712a. FIG. 18 is a schematic front view showing a light emitting substrate 714 of a first structure 712 b and a light emitting substrate 714 of a fourth structure 712 a. It is the figure which extracted only the drop deployment combination unit 700, and showed up-and-down operation of the drop deployment combination 712. It is a figure showing up-and-down operation of fall deployment combination thing 712 in fall deployment combination thing unit 700 of a state where it was installed in game board 200. It is the figure which extracted only the drop deployment combination unit 700, and showed the rotational operation of the drop deployment combination 712. FIG. FIG. 27 is a view showing a rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. FIG. 27 is a view showing a rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712 in the drop deployment combination unit 700 in a state of being installed on the game board 200. (A) It is the circuit block diagram which showed the main control circuit of the 1st sub control part 400 periphery. (B) It is the block diagram which showed typically the connection relation of the various board | substrate with which the pachinko machine 100 is equipped. (A) It is the figure which looked at the game board 200 from the back, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning place of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b. (B) It is the figure which extracted a part of game board 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for explaining the arrangement place of board peripheral board 672. (A) It is the figure which permeate | transmitted a part of game board 200 and was seen from the front, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning place of the character peripheral substrate 674. FIG. (B) It is the front view which extracted and showed a part of drop deployment character item unit 700, and is a figure for demonstrating the arrangement | positioning place of the character top illumination board 676. FIG. FIG. 7 is a view showing a connection relationship between a motor drive board 245 b and another board, and an example of an electrical component mounted on the motor drive board 245 b. FIG. 7 is a view showing a connection relationship between a board peripheral substrate 672 and another board and an example of an electrical component mounted on the board peripheral substrate 672. (A) It is the figure which showed the connection relation of the character peripheral substrate 674 and the character upper illumination board 676, and another board | substrate. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the electrical component mounted in the symbol top illumination board 676. FIG. FIG. 17 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a feature upper illumination substrate 676. FIG. 17 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modification 1 of the circuit configuration of the accessory upper illumination substrate 676. FIG. 21 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modification 2 of the circuit configuration of the feature upper illumination substrate 676. FIG. 21 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modification 3 of the circuit configuration of the feature upper illumination substrate 676. FIG. 21 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modification 4 of the circuit configuration of the feature upper illumination substrate 676. FIG. 17 is a circuit configuration diagram showing another modification of the circuit configuration of the accessory upper illumination substrate 676. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of arrangement | positioning of LED in the character top illumination board 676. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic exploded perspective view showing a part of members constituting the movable body 1 in an extracted manner. (A) It is the front view which showed the surface of the 1st board | substrate 14e. (B) It is the rear view which showed the back surface of the 1st board | substrate 14e. It is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the first substrate 14e. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the movement of the movable parts 11 and 12 as viewed from the rear of the movable body 11; It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 1 of a non-mounting area. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification 2 of a non-mounting area. FIG. 6 is a circuit configuration diagram of a substrate of a display device 34 that configures the movable body 3; (A) It is a front view of the board | substrate of the display apparatus 34 which comprises the movable body 3. FIG. (B) It is a rear view of the substrate of display 34 which constitutes movable object 3. It is the figure which extracted and showed a part of a certain board | substrate. It is the figure which showed a part of board | substrate with which the via of the modification was formed. It is the figure which showed the motion of a certain character in time series. It is a figure which shows an operation example. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. 5 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) shows the decorative symbol An example is shown and (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure pre-reading process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for 1st drawing and 2nd drawing. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for yes-no decision. It is a figure explaining the content of the table for special figure determination. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of the 1st sub control part main processing, (b) is the 1st sub control part command reception interruption It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) is a flowchart of 1st sub control part image control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flow chart of 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of 2nd sub control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of Pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 154 step by step. Fig. 155 (q) is a diagram showing an example of another effect in a stepwise manner following Fig. 155 (q). (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorized by RAM408, (c) is a notice icon It is a figure explaining an example of digestion timing, and (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon before change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of a notice icon after change. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of Pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 in stages. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 160 step by step. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 161 in stages. FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 162 in stages. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of advance notice icon digestion production in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect centering on decoration symbol display device 208 of Pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing the continuation of an example of an effect shown in Drawing 171 step by step. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 172 step by step. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 173 in stages. FIG. 174 is a diagram showing the example of the effect shown in FIG. 174 step by step. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing the other example of presentation of increase presentation of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which a notice icon changes gradually. It is a figure showing the example of a display at the time of power failure and power recovery while displaying a notice icon in steps. It is a figure showing gradually an example of an effect which can be performed in decoration symbol display device 208 of Pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining a lottery table related to a notice item.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described using the drawings. The present invention is applicable to various game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. Also, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere to circulate in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be made by credit.

  The following embodiments are roughly divided into five embodiments of the embodiments A to E, but the embodiments, the examples included in the embodiments, the modifications and the like can be appropriately combined with each other. . In addition, the code | symbol which shows each structure is uniformly used only in the embodiment A, B, C, D or E unless it mentions in particular. Therefore, for example, in Embodiment B, the same code as in Embodiment A may be used as a code indicating another configuration.

Embodiment A
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game table (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 (including an enclosed type) and a game machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a locking function, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106 as well. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. Hereinafter, when the front side of the game board 200 is referred to, the game area 124 may be referred to. In the present embodiment, the one in which the light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board Ball launch handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of the game, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 2) by the operation of the player, and the chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for causing the chance button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and the balance of the player with respect to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower tray full-tan detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). I aim it and shoot it.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front side (front side), and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 1, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (refer to FIG. 4) which performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 The second sub substrate case 166 for housing the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls 4) and a release board case 172 for storing a release board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 constituting a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power management section 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric gaming machines. A power supply substrate case 184 housing a power supply substrate 182 having a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. And, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called game board of a right-handed machine. The game board 200 includes a game board 201 which is a main body of the game board 200 (or a support of components of the game board 200). The game board 201 is a plate-like member, the front on the player's side may be called the front, and the opposite back (the back) may be called the back. The game board 201 may be a member that is entirely transparent, a portion that is transparent, or a member that is entirely non-transparent. The gaming board 201 is provided with the following components.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 201, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. In a game board of a generally known right-handed machine, by changing the strength to launch the game ball by the operation of the player, the gate and the second special figure starting port according to the common figure fluctuation, and the first special It can be divided into the figure starting port. Specifically, in a generally known right-handed machine, a first area (game area) which is a route for entering a first special view starting opening by arranging game nails 238 or the like with respect to the game area 124 The game ball rolling on the left side area in the 2nd field where the ball to the 2nd special figure starting mouth is difficult or impossible to enter, or vice versa, the 2nd special figure starting mouth was equipped (game area) The game ball rolling on the right side region in is configured to be difficult or impossible to enter the first special view starting opening.

  In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, a so-called electric tulip (electric chew) type second special figure variable start opening 232 provided with a first special view starting opening 230 and a pair of blade members 2321 and a pair of blades The game ball rolling on the first area (the left area in the game area) provided with the second special figure fixed start port 233 not provided with the member 2321 is mainly to the first special figure start port 230. The game ball rolling on the second area (right area in the game area) is mainly expected to pass through the gate 228 and the second special view variable start opening 232 and the second special view fixed start opening. We can expect a prize for 233. The present invention is not limited to the right-handed game machine 200 shown in FIG. 3 and is provided with the above-mentioned generally known right-handed machine and, more generally, a general game board It can also be applied to pachinko machines.

  A rendering device 206 is disposed from the upper right to the central portion of the game area 124 and further below the central portion. In this rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed from the upper right to the central portion of the rendering device 206, around which a general drawing display device 210, a first special view display device 212, and a second special view display device 214, a general drawing holding lamp 216, a first special drawing holding lamp 218, a second special drawing holding lamp 220, and a high certainty lamp 222.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured of a liquid crystal display device in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and is configured by a seven-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by a seven-segment LED in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. The common view display device 210 and the first special view display device 212 correspond to an example of a first symbol variation display means, and the second special view display device 214 corresponds to an example of a second symbol variation display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect.

  Display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) of the common drawing display 210, the first special drawing display 212, and the second special drawing display 214 (notification means) and the decorative symbol display 208 (design display means) And the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the common drawing display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 can not display a moving image, but a decorative symbol The display device 208 can display a moving image.

  The common drawing reservation lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation It is possible to hold games up to a predetermined number (for example, two). The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the pachinko machine 100 of the form, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special drawing and the second special drawing) for the special figure variation game. The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (e.g., success or failure determination process) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a gate 228, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the rendering device 206.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are disposed on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entering the general winning openings 226 (general) 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, ten balls) of balls are discharged as the winning balls onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 200 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be referred to as "prize balls" and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental balls". The ball is generically called "ball (game ball)".

  The gate 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment One is located on the right side. The gate 228 is a starting opening where entry is expected by hitting right. Unlike the ball entering the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed the gate 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the gate 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing change game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and is a winning opening that is expected to enter the ball by hitting the right. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. That is, variable winning opening 234 has a predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and a second open / close state (here, open state) in which game balls are easier to win than the first open / closed state. Is a variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one to the other, and the door is displayed when the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops displaying a big hit symbol, winning a special view variable game The member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Note that the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily have to be completely closed, and it may be a state in which entry of the gaming ball is impossible or difficult even if it is slightly open. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable winning hole 234 is a door-type attacker, but may be a shutter-type attacker.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 200 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, only one second special variable start aperture 232 is disposed on the right side. The second special view variable start opening 232 is a start opening where ball entry is expected by hitting the right. The second special view variable start port 232 includes a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by solenoids to the left and right, and corresponds to variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the opening of the second special view variable start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the opening of the second special view variable start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening / closing mode difficult to win.

  On the other hand, when it is elected to the common swing variation game, when the common view display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number, It is possible to enter a ball into the opening of (1), and the opened state in which the pair of wing members 2321 is opened is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the second special view variable start opening 232 has a small size (corresponding to a first size) and a large size (corresponding to a second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). This is a variable starting area in which the accessibility of the game ball is variable, which changes from any one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230.

  When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure variable start opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the second special view variable start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. It should be noted that the ball entering the second special view variable start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 200 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the following description, the second special view variable start opening 232 and the second special view fixed start opening 233 may be collectively referred to as a second special view start opening.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage structure 1 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208. The passage structure 1 is a passage forming structure that forms a passage of the gaming ball. The details of the passage structure 1 will be described later, but in summary, in the case of the present embodiment, a passage unit including the passage portion 10, the distributing portion 11, and the passage portions 12 and 13 is configured. Each of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 may have a cross-sectional shape or a cross-sectional size through which one game ball can pass. An entrance 10a is provided at the upper end of the passage 10, and a game ball flowing down the game area 124 can enter. The game ball having entered the entrance 10 a passes through the passage 10 and is distributed to the passage 12 or the passage 13 in the distribution unit 11.

  The first special view start opening 230 is inside the passage 12, and the start winning area R1 is set at the lower end of the passage 12 (located on the back side of the game board 201 in the case of this embodiment). The game ball passes through the start-up winning area R1 to win a prize in the first special view start opening 230. More specifically, the ball detection sensor in which the detection position of the game ball is set is arranged in the start winning area R1, and when the ball detection sensor detects the game ball, the first special view starting opening 230 is won Is detected.

  When winning in the first special view starting port 230, it drives the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 and discharges a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as the winning balls to the upper tray 126, and also displays the first special view The special feature variation game by the device 212 is started. The balls winning the first special view start opening 230 are guided to the back side of the gaming board 200 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning area R1 is set in the middle of the passage 12, the game ball passing through the passage 12 is detected, and the winning of the first special view starting opening 230 is detected. However, even if the start winning area R1 is set to the outside of the passage 12, the game balls discharged through the passage 12 are detected, and it is detected that the first special view starting opening 230 is won Good.

  In the case of the present embodiment, an opening OP1 which will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 and the like is formed in the side portion of the passage 12 adjacent to the first special drawing start port 230. Therefore, in the case of winning the first special view start opening 230, it enters the first special view start opening 230 through the opening OP1 and passes through the start winning area R1 as well as the passage from the entrance 10a There is also a case where it enters the structure 1, is distributed to the passage portion 12, enters the first special view start opening 230, and passes through the start winning area R1. Since there are a plurality of winning modes (winning routes), the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, although it entered into passage structure 1 from entrance part 10a and was distributed to passage part 12, it may be discharged to the exterior of passage structure 1 from opening OP1. In this case, the first special figure starting opening 230 Do not win.

  The second special figure fixed start opening 233 is inside the passage 13, and the start winning area R2 is at the lower end of the passage 13 (in the case of this embodiment, located on the back side of the game board 201). It is set, and when the game ball passes this starting winning area R2, it wins the second special figure fixed start opening 233. More specifically, the ball detection sensor in which the detection position of the gaming ball is set is arranged in the start winning area R2, and the second special view fixed start opening 233 is won when the ball is detected by the ball detection sensor. Is detected.

  When winning the second special figure fixed start port 233, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball to the upper tray 126, and the second special figure The special feature variation game by the display device 214 is started. The ball that has won the second special figure fixed start port 233 is guided to the back side of the gaming board 200 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, the start winning area R2 is set in the middle of the passage 13, the gaming balls passing through the passage 13 are detected, and the winning of the second special view fixed start opening 233 is detected. However, the start winning area R2 is set outside the passage 13, and the game balls discharged through the passage 13 are detected, and it is detected that the second special view fixed starting opening 233 is won. May be

  In the case of the present embodiment, an opening OP2 to be described later with reference to FIG. 15 and the like is formed in the side portion of the passage 13 adjacent to the second special view fixed start port 233. Therefore, when winning through the second special figure fixed start port 233, in addition to the case where it passes through the opening winning area R2 through the opening OP2, it enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance 10a and distributes to the passage 13 And may pass through the start winning area R2. Since there are a plurality of winning modes (winning routes), the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, although it entered into passage structure 1 from entrance part 10a and was distributed to passage part 13, it may be discharged to the exterior of passage structure 1 from opening OP2, in this case, the 2nd special figure fixed starting opening I do not win 233.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is more likely to enter the entrance area 10a opening upward than the opening OP1 and the opening OP2 opened in the left and right direction. .

  That is, when a game ball is won in any of the opening OP1, the opening OP2 and the entrance 10a, it passes through the start winning area R1 or R2 almost (reliably or with high probability), but the relative number As a result, the number of winning game balls from the entrance 10a is increased.

  The passage structure 1 may be permeable in whole or in part. By having transparency, the player may be able to view the inside of the passage structure 1 in some cases, and it may be possible to view or estimate the distribution of the game balls.

  Note that only one variable winning opening 234 may be provided below the central portion of the game board 200. According to this aspect, it is recommended to the player to hit the left during the big hit game, and to hit the right when shifting to the power support state after the big hit game is over.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the gaming board 200, an out opening 240 for discharging to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 flows down the game area 124 while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) Whether you win a start opening (1st special view start opening 230, 2nd special view variable start opening 232, 2nd special view fixed start opening 233), or any winning opening or start opening, or a gate Only after passing 228, the exit 240 is reached.

  Decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to rendering means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of decorative symbol display means .

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be formed by one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be one. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as predetermined control means (for example, main control means, first sub-control means, second sub-control means) Alternatively, one of a combination of the three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or a combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500. It can also be regarded as a predetermined control means (sub control means).

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit 318 (this circuit is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the open sensor and the bottom plate full sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Symbol display devices, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, For example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common drawing display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high probability Drive circuit 330 for controlling display of middle lamp 222 etc.) and drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing second special view variable start port 232 and variable winning port 234 etc. There is.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the first special drawing start port 230 has won, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318, It is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the first special view start port 230.

  Also, even when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has been won at the second special drawing starting opening, the value at that timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the second special drawing starting opening similarly. Are latched, and the latched value is stored in a random number storage register corresponding to the second special drawing start port, which is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318. Furthermore, even when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the sphere has passed through the gate 228, it similarly latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the gate 228, and latches the value And stored in a random number storage register corresponding to the gate 228, which is built in the random number generation circuit 318.

  Moreover, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, the general winning opening 226, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special view variable starting opening 232, the second special view fixed starting opening 233, variable A sensor that detects a ball that has won a predetermined winning opening such as the winning opening 234, and a sensor that detects a ball that passes through the gate 228 can be cited.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Game information (for example, information indicating a control state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment). The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the game control means.

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. Further, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is bi-directional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the payout control unit 600. Is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 detects the depression of the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), the drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. The chance button detection sensor 426 is connected. Connected to the basic circuit 402 is a sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402.

  Further, to the first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 is connected.

  The secondary control means which combined the 1st secondary control part 400 and the 2nd secondary control part 500 receives the command signal from the main control part 300 which is the game control means, and based on the received command signal, the decorative symbol display device It controls the rendering means such as 208.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and an award based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. While detecting whether or not the payout of the ball or the ball for the game has been completed, the communication with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 which drives the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 shown in FIG. 1 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity, and the ball feed for supplying the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110 The control of the device 634 is performed.

  The power management unit 660 converts an AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the emission control unit 630 receive supply of a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. Further, the power management unit 660 is a storage circuit (e.g., for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). The power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the discharge control unit 630. Alternatively, each control unit or each device may be supplied with a predetermined voltage through another power supply path.

  In the island facility provided in the game machine installation sales office, the AC power supply of 100V is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24 V AC current is converted by the power management unit 660 of the main control unit 300 into a DC voltage of 12 V. The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit (not shown in FIG. 4), and the DC voltage of 12 V is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (5 V in this case) by the voltage conversion circuit. Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power management unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302 when the voltage value of the 12 V supply current falls below a predetermined value (9 V in this example). Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power supply line connecting the power supply management unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which the 12 V DC current flows. This power supply line is an example of a predetermined power supply line. It corresponds to Note that the low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. Further, the power management unit 660 outputs the inputted 24 V AC current as it is or converts it into a 36 V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, a current of an operating voltage (here, 5 V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  Further, the start signal output circuit 340 outputs a start signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power management unit 660 reaches the voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate when the power is turned on. Furthermore, when the WDT 314 times out, the CPU 304 outputs a reset signal from the WDT 314. When the WDT 3141 times out, there may be a runaway state due to a program error, or a case where the CPU 304 can not perform the originally designed operation due to a voltage drop due to a lightning strike, a wrongdoing, or the like. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The start signal from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The start signal output from the start signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined start signal.

  In the case of an instantaneous power failure and immediate recovery, ie, automatic recovery without turning on the power switch 178, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, first, it is determined whether the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations performed by the basic circuit 302, a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is performed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in registers are initialized. Subsequently, security check processing is performed. The security check process recalculates whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct or not. If the authentication code is correct, extension processing is performed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time or a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, the main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, also when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the internal registers are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained at the state before reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of symbol>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the normal symbol display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop display. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a special figure. A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the first sphere detection sensor which is a sphere detection sensor detects that the sphere enters the first special figure start opening 230, while the second special figure fixed start The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the second sphere detection sensor which is the sphere detection sensor detects that the sphere enters the mouth 233, the sphere enters the second special view variable starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started also on condition that the 3rd sphere detection sensor which is the sphere detection sensor detects. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment “the variation indication of the special figure 1” (special figure Perform symbol fluctuation display 1). Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment “variation display of special figure 2” ( Perform special symbol 2 symbol fluctuation display). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of this "variation display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the fluctuation indication of the special figure. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  In FIG. 5A, ten types of special views of "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, six types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and “special figure C” is a 2R special jackpot symbol, which is called sudden change. When these symbols (special drawings A and C) are stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state. "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit design, and "special figure D" is a 2R big hit design, and is suddenly called "time-short." When the special view B or the special view D is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special view low probability normal view high probability state. "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability variation, and "special figure F" is a 2R big hit design called suddenly. When the special view E is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special view high probability general view low probability state. Thereafter, when the special view F is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special view low probability general view low probability state.

  The term "round" as used herein refers to the number of chances of acquiring a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls). In the present embodiment, the number of times of operation of the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 3 is represented, and 15 rounds means one or more opening and closing operations of the variable winning opening 234 one time (one operation), This means that this operation lasts 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is among the entry of game balls of a predetermined round end condition (for example, a predetermined number of balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls), and lapse of predetermined time from the start of the round End when one or more of In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit or a time big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit or time big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  In this embodiment, during the big hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability state, and when special figure A, special figure C and special figure E are won, the special figure until the next big hit after the big hit game is over The high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special view B, the special view D, and the special view F are won, the special view low probability state remains even after the big hit game is over. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of the first probability control state. In addition, special figure high probability state after the big hit game end may be called special figure definite change, the state where the probability of winning the big hit after the big hit game end is high (special figure high probability state) is the player The control state in which the degree of advantage of V.sub.2. This special figure high probability state may be called a definite change state. In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the probability control state transition means.

  In addition, when it wins the special figure A-D, it shifts to the state with the electric Chuo support (the electric support) presence (hereinafter referred to as the electric support state) after the big hit game ends. The power support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. Say

  This power-supply state is one of the control states prepared for this pachinko machine 100, and may also be referred to as a time saving state. That is, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The time saving flag is also prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/101 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), but increases to 99/101 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 1.2 seconds in the power support state.

  Further, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special view variable start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the power Chu open period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the pair of blade members 2321 is more likely to open (increase in the number of times of power-on opening) than in the non-power-on state. For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that opens only once in the non-charging state per one passage of the ball to the gate 228 opens 3 times in the charging state (for example, 3 times of opening for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening and closing is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special view variable start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open.

  In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. It is a power support state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, a large number of game balls in the second special view variable start opening 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if the probability of entering the second special view variable start opening 232 is increased, and either of the extension of electric power open period or the increase in the frequency of electric power open is performed, it is also set as the electric support state (time saving state). Good. In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second special view variable start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, in the second special view variable start opening 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other. The second special view variable start port 232 has a large size in the power-supply state for a longer period of time than the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when the special view A and the special view C are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (general drawing high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started. When the special view B and the special view D are stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special view fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st time is the non-power support state. It shifts to (Pubu low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot is won with no power support (special figure E, special figure F), it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the big hit game. In the non-electric support state, the second special view variable start port 232 is maintained at a small size at the entrance. On the other hand, as described above, in the power-on state, the second special figure variable start opening 232 has a large-sized entrance, and the entry rate of the game ball is increased. That is, in the non-power support state, the gaming ball enters the second special view variable start opening 232 which is the variable start area at the first entry rate, whereas in the power support state, the gaming ball is the second special view The variable start port 232 is approached at a second approach rate higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-power support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the power support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even if the player strikes the right into the non-power support to aim for winning of the game ball in the second special view variable start opening 232, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game (10 seconds), the general drawing low probability state (1/101), it is difficult to win because of the configuration of the opening time (0.3 seconds) in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special drawing variable start port 232 It is a state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbols. Special figure G shown in Drawing 5 (a) is the 1st small hitting design, special figure H is the 2nd small hitting design. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for up to only 1.5 seconds per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a part whose control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over.

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 performs one or more opening and closing operations, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  Further, in this embodiment, two types of lost symbols are prepared. The special drawing I shown in FIG. 5A is the first loss symbol, and the special drawing J is the second loss symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open and close, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a lost design (for example, a third lost design etc.) other than the "special figure I" and the "special figure J" may be additionally prepared, and in this embodiment, the lost design includes a plurality of types of designs. It is

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second advantage hit control state (big hit control state and small hit control state) in which the player has a high degree of advantage and the second advantage from the second advantage The loss control state of the first advantage degree with low degree of advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is either one of the hit control state (second control state) and the loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of control state transition means. That is, after the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the symbol mode of the big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 gives the player a big hit gaming state advantageous to the special gaming state It also corresponds to an example of the giving means. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable winning hole 234 performs the opening and closing operation, since entering the variable winning hole 234 can hardly be expected, the small hit control state is the first advantageous. It can also be regarded as a degree of control state (first control state).

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “special figure A” is prepared as the big hit symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the big hit symbol 2 and the like.

  The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are notification means for notifying the success / failure determination result (lottery result), and symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after starting symbol fluctuation It corresponds to an example of the symbol display means which performs symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the special views A to J and the special view J).

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the first special view starting port 230 or the second special view starting port, that is, the first ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view starting port 230, the second The second ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special view fixed start port 233, or the third ball detection sensor has detected that the ball has entered the second special view variable start port 232 On the condition that the symbol display areas of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... perform a "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → switch the display in the ... order "variable display of decorative pattern."

  That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) which is a combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying "special figure B" which is 15R big hit or "special figure A" which is 15R special big hit, combination 1 of the decorative symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example Stop display of "decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2".

  When notifying "special figure A" which is 15R special big hit, the combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3") of the decorative pattern in which the same odd decorative symbol is arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. And "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" etc.).

  The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are provided for notifying the "special figure E" which is the hiding probability, the "special figure F" which is the usual, and the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" which are small hits. If you want to stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as "decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative 3" and report "special figure C" which is sudden positive change or "special figure D" which is suddenly short. In the display areas 208a to 208c, a combination of decorative symbols such as "decorative 1-decorative 3-decorative 5" is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying "special figure I" and "special figure J", which are lost, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols serving as a big hit or a small hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, Stop displaying the eyes). Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the decorative symbol.

  In addition, the stop symbol aspect (refer to FIG. 5 (a)) of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and the stop of one decorative symbol displayed in each symbol display area 208a-c of the left middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the design of the symbol (see (b) in the same figure), the decorative symbol (see (b) in the same figure) is larger.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a lost design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the gate 228, the spread-diagram display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform “Vocabulary fluctuation display” (Vocabulary fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, either one of the "common figure A" which is a hit symbol and the "general figure B" which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the common drawing. The common view display device 210 corresponds to an example of the auxiliary symbol notification means.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a big hit special figure 1 random number counter, a small hit special figure 1 random number counter, a missing special figure 1 random number counter, and counters for special figure 2 of these counters. It is provided. The RAM 308 is also provided with a random number counter for generating each of the special figure fluctuation time first determination random value and the special figure fluctuation time second determination random value. Further, the RAM 308 holds the number of reservations of the special figure 1, special figure 1 winning random number value, special figure 1 random number value for big hit, special figure 1 random number value for small hitting, special figure 1 random number for losing, special figure 1 success or failure The determination result, the special figure 1 determination result, the special figure 1 variation time, and the number of reserved items, the random number value, and the result for the special figure 2 are stored respectively. In addition, the special storage 1 and the special drawing 2 are separately prepared in the RAM 308 for the maximum number (four in this example) of storage areas divided into areas that can hold the start of the acceptance determination (lottery determination). There is. In the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1, as described later, the special figure 1 winning random number, the special figure 1 random number, the small figure special figure 1 random number, the lost special figure 1 random number, and the special figure One set of five random number values of 1 variation time determination random number values is stored, and one set of five random number values are stored for each area in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. 2 is first turned on (indicating that there has been an operation) If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. At step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command representing that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step SA15, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, 4 for generating the initial values of the common drawing win random number counter, the big hit special figure random number value counter, the small hit special figure random number value counter, and the lost special figure random number value counter The three random number counters for generating one initial value generation random number counter, the common drawing timer random number value, the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random number value, and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value are respectively generated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  At step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step SB03, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not detected) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  At step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) To the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special drawing variable starting opening 232, the second special drawing fixed starting opening 233. It is determined that the ball has entered or the gate 228 has passed. That is, it is determined that there are winnings on the winning opening 234, the starting openings 230, 232, and 233, and the passage of the gate 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 General drawing timer random number, big hit special figure 1 random number value, small hit special figure 1 random number value, lost special figure 1 random number value, special figure 1 variation time determination random number value, big hit special figure 2 random number value, small hit The random number counter for generating each of the special figure 2 random number value, the special figure 2 random number value for losing, and the special figure 2 random time value for fluctuation time determination is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, although the counter for acquiring the random number value regarding Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value regarding Special Figure 2 are separately provided, the same counter may be used.

  At step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  At step SB13, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the first special view display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning opening 234 and the starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning and the gate 228 passes, the number of winning balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening or gate in the RAM 308 The value of the storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the result is set to the original winning sphere number storage area.

Further, in step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, if there is a prize in the first special figure starting port 230 and the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation games held is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment), the predetermined Get startup information. That is, if the number of reservations is less than a predetermined number, special figure 1 winning random number value, big hit special figure 1 random number value, small hit special figure 1 random number value, lost special figure 1 random number value, and special figure 1 fluctuation time Get the random number for decision. The special figure 1 winning random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing the hardware random number (value of hardware random number + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the big hit special figure 1 random number value, the small hit special figure 1 random number value, the lost special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random number value are derived from the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308 It is a value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The combination of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the software random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 which performs random number processing generates and derives start information, and the start information deriving means This corresponds to an example of (first start information deriving means, second start information deriving means). The various random number values (starting information) acquired here are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the holding storage unit of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308. Ru. The reserve storage unit of this special view 1 has the start information acquired when the gaming ball enters the first special view start opening 230 (first start area) up to a predetermined first upper limit number (here four). It corresponds to the first start information storage means that can be stored. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the suspension storage unit of the special figure 1. The first start information storage means may be used, or the suspension storage unit and the temporary area of the special figure 1 may be used as the first start information storage means. Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations of the special view 1 stored in the RAM 308, and the number of reservations of the special view 1 is increased by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding unit. In addition, as for special figure 2 as well as special figure 1 each random number value which is starting information is acquired, in the retention storage section of special figure 2 which provides the random number value which is acquired in RAM308 same as one set starting information , And further adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations of the special view 2 stored in the RAM 308. The reserve storage unit of the special view 2 can store the start information acquired when the game ball enters the second special view start opening (the second start area) up to a predetermined second upper limit number (here four) Corresponds to the second start information storage means. At this time, various random number values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the values stored in the temporary area may be stored in the reserve storage unit of the special figure 2. The start information storage unit 2 may be used, or the suspension storage unit and the temporary area of the special view 2 may be used as the second start information storage unit.

  The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order changer. That is, the special figure variation game (special figure of the special game start hole 230 and the second special figure start opening (the 2nd special figure variable start opening 232 or the 2nd special figure fixed start opening 233) winning opening in the starting opening Symbol variation display is performed. In the winning reception process, the start information is stored so that the order of winning can be understood between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In addition, if it is detected that the ball has passed through the gate 228 and the number of popular drawing fluctuation games being held is less than a predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment), the common drawing win random number value at that timing The value of the random number counter for generation is acquired as the common drawing winning random number value which is the start information, and is stored in a random number value storage area different from that for the special drawing provided in the RAM 308. Further, in this winning reception process, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special view variable starting opening 232, the second special view fixed starting opening 233, the gate 228 or the variable winning opening 234 by a predetermined ball detection sensor The first special view starting port 230, the second special view starting port, the gate 228, and the variable winning port 234 are included in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 when winning (entering) or passing is detected. Set the winning reception information indicating the presence or absence of winning (entering) or passing.

  It should be noted that whether the start information of the special view or the start information of the general drawing is, if the number of reservations is equal to or more than the respective predetermined numbers, the process proceeds to step SB19 without acquiring the start information.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the common drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing variable start port 232 while the predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) While outputting the signal held in the state, information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Thus, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening control of the pair of blade members 2321 corresponds to an example of the variable start area control unit that performs the variable start area control. On the other hand, if it is in the non-electric support state, the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to the non-operational state and the solenoid (332) for opening / closing drive of the blade member 2321 of the second special view variable start port 232 Do not output a signal. By this, the blade member 2321 remains closed. Note that a signal for maintaining the blade member 2321 in a closed state may be output without fail.

  Also, in the case of the power support state, in the processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, And outputs a signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 2321 and closes the storage region of the timer for managing blade closing time provided in the RAM 308 Set information that indicates the period.

  Also, if it is in the power support state, the update of the RAM 308 in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area, set the non-operational view. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB23 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, at step SB23, a common drawing related lottery process is executed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing change game and the second special drawing variable start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the common drawing change game held. Whether the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is won or not by the random number lottery based on the common drawing winning random value stored in the above-mentioned random number storage area when the number of is one or more The hit determination to be made is performed, and in the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step SB24) is performed. In the special drawing prefetching process, when the number of special drawing reservations stored in the special drawing reservation number storage area increases, the start information related to the increased holding is prefetched, and the stop symbol etc. of the special drawing fluctuation game is special drawing related lottery It is determined in advance prior to the success or failure judgment in the process.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special drawing prefetch result storage unit for storing a special drawing prefetch result (also referred to as a prior determination result) as a result of executing the special drawing prefetch process is provided. In the present example, the prefetching result storage unit for the special view 1 can store up to four prefetching results of the special view 1. Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is provided for storing the number of pre-reading results of the special figure 1 stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading result storage unit as the special figure 1 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 writes information of the new special-figure 1 prefetch result in the next order of the information of the special-figure 1 prefetch result of the lowest rank (last) every time the number of special-figure 1 look-ahead increases.

  The main control unit 300 deletes the information of the special view 1 prefetch result of the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit at the same time as the special view 1 startup information of the special view 1 start information storage area is erased. At the same time, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. In addition, when the information of the first special drawing 1 pre-reading result is erased, the remaining special drawing 1 pre-reading result information is processed so as to be advanced one by one.

  In the present example, the prefetching result storage unit for the special view 2 can store up to four prefetching results of the special view 2. Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area is provided for storing the number of pre-reading results of the special figure 2 stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit as the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 writes information of the new special view 2 prefetch result in the next order of the information of the special view 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank (last) every time the number of special view 2 prefetch is increased.

  The main control unit 300 erases the information of the first special figure 2 prefetch result of the special view 2 pre-reading result storage section at the same time when the special figure 2 start information of the special figure 2 start information storage area is erased. At the same time, the special figure 2 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. In addition, when the information of the first special figure 2 pre-reading result is deleted, it processes so that the order of the information of the remaining special figure 2 pre-reading result is advanced one by one.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is performed for the increase of the hold, but the special view pre-reading process may be performed for all the hold each time. In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) described later, the command including the information of the pre-reading result is transmitted, but the information of the pre-reading result may be transmitted only for the increase, or the information of the pre-reading result for all suspension is transmitted You may do it.

  Next, special figure state update processing is performed (step SB25). As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine. Hereinafter, the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 may not be distinguished, and the special drawing display 1 and the special drawing 1 and the special drawing display 2 may not be distinguished. 230 and the second special view start opening may be simply referred to as the special view start opening without distinction.

  In the special view state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special view. For example, in the special figure state update process in the middle of the special figure fluctuation display (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and extinguishing drive control which repeats lighting and extinguishing of 7 segment LED which constitutes the special figure display device I do. By performing this control, fluctuation display (special symbol symbol fluctuation display) of the special drawing by the special drawing display device is performed.

  Also, after the predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step SB33), the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, flags of 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first missing flag, second lost flag, positive change flag, and short time flag Is prepared. In the special figure state update process starting at the timing when the special figure fluctuation display time has elapsed (the time when the value of the special figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure in the special figure related lottery process (step SB29) described later (step SB29) Based on the figure determination result (stop symbol form of the special figure), the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure display device is controlled lighting on and off, setting which shows that special figure stop indication is being indicated in the setting territory of RAM308 I do. By performing this control, the special view display device is 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), 2R special big hit symbol (special figure C), suddenly short time symbol (special figure D) , Hidden probability variation symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), the first small hitting symbol (special symbol G), the second small hitting symbol (special figure H), the first lost symbol (special symbol I) , And the final display of any one of the second lost symbols (special image J). Further, thereafter, in order to maintain the display of a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view fluctuation game is notified to the player. In addition, when the value is set in the number-of-charges storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of shorts, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation, the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, during the big hit game and small hit game, also, the time saving flag is turned off. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shifts to the non-power support state (first approach rate control state) when in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (second control state).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that general command rotation stop setting transmission processing is to be executed in command setting transmission processing (step SB33) described later is additionally stored in the above transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping variable display is The processing is ended after the special drawing identification information indicating whether it is special drawing 2 or special drawing 1 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data to be described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the setting area of the RAM 308 in the special figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The special drawing operation period is set to, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period for displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to make a big hit is waited for the RAM 308 Information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set in the storage area of the special view standby time management timer provided in. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command prize effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step SB33).

  Further, in the special view state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special view standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 29 seconds, or Hold the door member 2341 open in the solenoid (332) for opening / closing drive of the door member 2341 of the variable winning hole 234 until the variable winning hole 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33).

  Also, in the special view state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) is variable. A signal for holding the door member 2341 in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the indicated information. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) The effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. Set the indicated information.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 starts the hit control state advantageous to the player after the special view display device stops displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the hit determination result of the hit. It corresponds to an example of the game control means. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for controlling the change of the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. In addition, the open / close pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of success or failure of the special view fluctuation game from the ROM 306. Get the opening and closing pattern.

  In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability change flag and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON simultaneously with the end of the big hit game based on the stop symbol aspect represented by the special drawing determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability change flag and the time saving flag on when the special drawing determination result is “special drawing A” or “special drawing C” in the special drawing lottery process described later. . Further, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing E", only the definite change flag is set to ON among the definite change flag and the time saving flag. Furthermore, when the special drawing determination result is "special drawing B" or "special drawing D", only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is set to ON and the number of times of electricity support stored in RAM 308 is stored. Set the number of charge support times 100 times. When the probability change flag is set to ON, it is in the special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation), and the probability of winning the big hit after the big hit game is high (special figure high probability state). On the other hand, when the probability change flag is not set to on (is set to off), it is a special figure low probability state. Therefore, the setting state of the probability change flag affects the result of the pass / fail determination (special drawing lottery). In addition, when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state, and the power chew is easy to open (for example, easy to hit), the open time based on one hit is long, the open frequency based on one hit is large Etc. The variable start area control is performed to be advantageous to the player. On the contrary, when the time saving flag is set to OFF, it is in the non-power-on state, and the variable start area control is performed to be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the setting state of the time saving flag also affects the variable start area control. Therefore, the information indicating the setting state of the probability change flag and / or the time saving flag corresponds to an example of the game control information, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the game control information determining means.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33).

  In addition, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area is inactive in the setting area of the RAM 308 Set Furthermore, if the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a loss, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, the special chart state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the special view stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is In the setting area, set the special figure non-operational. In the special figure state update process when the special figure is not in operation, the process is shifted to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special figure state update process in step SB25 is completed, a special figure related lottery process (step SB29) is performed this time. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the pass / fail determination unit. As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is a winning order variation machine, the special drawing related lottery process is also performed in the winning order to the special drawing starting opening.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step SB33).

  In the special drawing-related lottery process, execution of a pass / fail determination (lottery drawing) for the special drawing, determination of the special drawing to be stopped and display, and determination of the fluctuation time are performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the success / failure determination unit. In the special drawing related lottery process, first, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the determination here, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined yes / no determination prohibition condition is not established. That is, it is determined whether the special view display device is in the special view fluctuation display or in the stop display, and when any display is in progress, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing, If it is not displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special drawing operation or not during special drawing operation, and if it is set during special drawing operation, it returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing If the special figure non-operation is set, it means that the yes or no decision prohibit condition is not established, and then it is decided whether or not a predetermined yes or no decision condition is met. The judgment about the propriety judgment condition refers to the holding storage unit of the special drawing provided in the RAM 308, and judges whether the number of holdings of the special drawing fluctuation game is larger than 0 or not. If the number of reservations is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. On the contrary, if the number of reservations is 1 or more, it means that the predetermined yes / no judgment condition is satisfied, and one set of start information stored most in the past from the special view reservation storage unit provided in RAM 308 Random number values (special pattern winning random number value, special pattern random number value for big hit, special pattern random number value for small hit, special figure random value for loss, and random value for special pattern fluctuation time determination) are extracted and stored in the storage unit Transfer the still stored start information (set of random number values) from the area currently stored to the next area. In other words, if the special information 1 and the special image 2 are combined and the start information stored most in the past is retrieved from the special view reserve storage unit, and further the start information is stored in the special view reserve storage unit, the Nth oldest start information Is set as the (N-1) -th oldest start information in the special view storage unit. Further, the number of reservations stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. One set of random numbers from the special view storage section of the RAM 308 (special view winning random number, special view random number for big hit, special view random number for small hit, special view random number for losing, and special view fluctuation time determination The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting a random number value) corresponds to an example of the start information acquisition unit.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a high probability table for pass / fail determination, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a low probability table for pass / fail determination. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 takes out the start information from the hold storage unit of the RAM 308, it refers to the probability change flag, and if the probability change flag is on, it is in the special figure high probability state. Based on whether the numerical range is 0 to 65535) belongs to which random number range in the high probability table for hit determination shown in FIG. Deriving a loss. On the other hand, since the special figure low probability state is obtained if the probability change flag is off, the special figure selection random number value is based on which random number range in the high probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. As a special figure 2 success or failure judgment result, "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" is derived. Deriving "big hit", "small hit" or "losing" corresponds to the judgment of success.

  Next, the symbol of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 is determined based on the special drawing suitability determination result.

  FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a special view 1 determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure 1 determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol aspect (see FIG. 5 (a)) of the special figure 1 is defined for each success / failure determination result.

  If the special processing 1 success or failure judgment result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the jackpot special figure 1 random number value among the random numbers for one set acquired from the hold storage unit of the RAM 308 earlier. The numerical range to be obtained is 0 to 99), it is determined to which random number range among the big hit the judgment result of success or failure in the table for determining special figure 1 shown in FIG. “Special figure A” to “special figure F” are determined as In addition, if the special figure 1 success or failure judgment result is a small hit, the small figure special figure 1 random number value (possible numerical range is one of the random numbers for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308) 0 to 99) determines which random number range of the small hits in the table of FIG. 1C for determination of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. Determine figure G "or" special figure H ". Furthermore, if the special figure 1 judgment result is a loss, the special figure 1 random number for losing (of the possible numerical values among the random numbers for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308) 99) determines which random number range of the success / failure determination results in the loss table in the special figure 1 determination table shown in (c) in the figure, and “special figure I” as the special figure 1 determination result Or decide "Special figure J". The special figure 1 determination result determined here is information representing the symbol aspect of the special figure 1 to be stopped and displayed by the first special figure display device 212.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a special view 2 determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In the special figure 2 determination table, a random number range corresponding to the stop symbol aspect (see FIG. 5A) of the special figure 2 is defined for each of the pass / fail determination results. In the present embodiment, no small hit is prepared for the special figure 2 and no 2R big hit is also prepared. That is, among the stop symbol modes of the special figure shown in FIG. 5 (a), the 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), the 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), the first lost symbol (special figure I), and the second Only the missing symbol (special image J) is prepared. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to have a good chance of winning a ball (a number of rounds is large) if the special hit is hit with the special view 2 than when the special figure 1 is hit. Thus, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a big hit is made, a difference is made in added value between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In addition, in special figure 1 and special figure 2 when it hits a big hit, although the number of winning balls is almost the same, effects and game characteristics in big hit game (for example, a premium effect which does not appear unless big hit in special figure 2) etc. May have a difference.

  However, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined with the probability change jackpot by the table for determining the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 9C is 66% (special figure A: 50% + special figure C: 8% + special figure E: 8%) and the probability of being determined to be a big hit with a probability change in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 10 is also 66% (special figure A: 66%). It is identical in FIG. In addition, this embodiment is a winning order change, and the special figure 1 change game and the special figure 2 change game are performed alternately (except irregular winning) by the left-handed operation at the time of non-power support. In the support state, it is a game feature in which the special figure 2 fluctuation game is mainly executed by the right-hand operation. Therefore, the game nature that it is easy to acquire an advantageous big hit during electric support is not different from general special figure 2 priority change machine at all.

  If the special figure 2 success or failure judgment result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the big hit special figure 2 random number value among the random numbers for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308 The numerical value range to be obtained is 0 to 99), it is determined to which random number range of the big hit or not in the table for determination of special figure 2 shown in FIG. 10, the special figure 2 determination result Determine "Figure A" or "Special Figure B". Also, if the special figure 2 pass / fail judgment result is a loss, the special figure 2 for lost figure among the random numbers for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (possible numerical range is 0 99) determines which random number range of the success / failure determination results in the loss table in the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 10, and as the special figure 2 determination result, “special figure I” or “special Determine "Figure J". The special figure 2 determination result determined here is information representing a symbol aspect of the special figure 2 to be stopped and displayed by the second special figure display device 214.

  Then, based on the special figure determination result, the symbol variation time (special figure variation time) in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is determined. For determination of the fluctuation time here, a random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 65535) for special figure fluctuation time determination is used among the random numbers for one set previously acquired from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308 .

  FIG. 11 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table is composed of tables 1 to 4. Table 1 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a big hit symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. Table 2 is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is 2R big hit symbol (special figure C-special figure F) or small hit symbol (special figure G, H), and table 3 or 4 is It is a table used when the special figure 1 determination result is a lost design (special figure I, J).

  In each of the tables 1 to 4, the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the random number selection range of the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random value is defined. Further, in each table shown in FIG. 11A, names of fluctuation patterns representing an effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to each fluctuation time are also shown for reference. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated with one to one. The main control unit 300 may determine up to the presentation mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special drawing, but in the present embodiment, the information representing the fluctuation time determined here is It transmits to the control part 400, and the 1st sub control part 400 determines the production | presentation aspect in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 corresponding to fluctuation time. In the present embodiment, ten types of fluctuation patterns are prepared. These fluctuation patterns include a fluctuation pattern with reach effect and a fluctuation pattern without reach effect. In the present embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are prepared as reach effects. With normal reach, in general, two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) stop and display the same decorative symbol, and one remaining symbol display area (for example, middle symbol display area 208b) If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, ie, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is in a state of reach display (a reach state) is stopped and displayed, a specific big hit symbol This is a state in which the combination ("the combination 1 of decorative symbols" and "the combination 2 of decorative symbols" shown in FIG. 5B) is to be stopped and displayed.

  The super reach A and the super reach B are a kind of reach in which special effects are further added to the normal reach to improve the rendering effect, and a specific character may be made to appear.

  As the super reach, long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach and the like are known, and special reach such as special multi line reach, full turn reach and special full turn reach are also known. The term "reach" as used herein means a variation of the decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach and special reach. In this reach, the player is notified that the result of the success / failure determination (lottery drawing) of the special drawing will be the determination result of the hit, after making the success / failure determination and notifying the player of the result of the success / failure determination. Whether or not to reach is determined after making a pass / fail determination. In no reach, the variation time of the special map is relatively short, the super reach is relatively long the variation time of the special map, and in the normal reach, the variation time of the special map is the time between no reach and super reach.

  When the special figure 1 decision result is special figure A or special figure B (see table 1), it is a big hit symbol of 15R with electric support, and as shown in table 1, the longest fluctuation time of 65 seconds Is the most likely to be selected, and the variation time of 15 seconds is the most difficult to choose. In this case, in the decorative symbol display device 208, reach effect is performed.

  When the special figure 1 decision result is 2R big hit design (special figure C-special figure F) and small hit design (special figure G and H) (refer to table 2), fluctuation time of 12 seconds uniformly To be elected. In this case, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed after the change of no reach (combination 3 of decorative symbols, combination 4 of decorative symbols) is once turned off To be done.

  When the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J), the table used according to the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and whether it is in the power support state differs. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines a table to be used with reference to the time saving flag and the number of reservations of the special view 1 stored in the RAM 308.

  When the special figure 1 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J) and the non-power support state and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 are 3, the table 3 is used. In this case, there is a high probability that a short variation time of 3 seconds is selected in order to accelerate the digestion of the special figure 1, and if a variation time of 3 seconds is selected, reach effect is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 It will not be changed, and a shortening change will be made.

  When the special figure 1 decision result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J), and the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 0 ~ 2 in the non-power support state or when it is the power support state (the number of reservations is irrelevant) Use Table 4 for As shown in Table 4, a variation time of 8 seconds (reach without reach) is selected with high probability, but with a low probability, a variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds may be selected . When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs reach effect.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time is determined using the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table described above.

  FIG.11 (b) is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 fluctuation time determination. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table is composed of tables 5 to 8, and table 5 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is the jackpot symbol (special figures A and B) of 15R. And the same contents as the contents of the table 1 shown in FIG. Table 6 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J), and the number of holdings of a special support state and special figure 2 is 1-3. In Table 6, in the power support state, the shortest variation time of 1.5 seconds is uniformly selected in order to accelerate the digestion of the special figure 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect is not performed and the super shortening variation is It will be done. The table 7 is a table used when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J) and the power-on state and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 are zero. In the table 7, in order to store the reserve of the special figure 2, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds which is somewhat long is uniformly selected, and the reach effect is not performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. The table 8 is a table used regardless of the number of reservations of the special figure 2 when the special figure 2 determination result is a lost symbol (special figure I, J) and is in the non-power support state. If there is a winning on the second special figure starting port 232 in the non-power-up state, it will be a rare case that it is elected to the popular figure fluctuation game under the common figure low probability state. In Table 8, without shortening or super shortening of the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, the fluctuation time of 8 seconds (loss without reach) is selected with high probability, although it is a low probability, 10 seconds, 40 seconds, Alternatively, a variation time of 60 seconds may be selected. When the variation time of 10 seconds, 40 seconds, or 60 seconds is selected, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs reach effect.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time is determined using the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table described above.

  Returning to FIG. 7, in step SB33 performed following the special drawing related lottery process of step SB29, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the present embodiment, the output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, and bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 11 To 14 are command types (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds specified command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, special figure Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type) such as a hold increase command, a general drawing hold increase command, and a pre-read notice command capable of specifying the type of command).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information representing a special figure stop symbol, information representing a control state (information representing a setting state of a time saving flag and a probability variation flag), and a special figure variation time in command data In the case of a symbol change stop command, it includes information representing information representing the information etc., and in the case of a symbol change stop command, information representing a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, information representing the current number of reservations etc. In the case of the prize effect start command and the end effect start command, information including the control state is included, and in the case of the hit round number designation command, the information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned general command rotation start setting transmission process, information representing a special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result) stored in the command data in the RAM 308, information representing a control state, information representing a special figure fluctuation time The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set.

  In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information representing a special figure stop symbol stored in the RAM 308 (special figure determination result), information representing a control state, etc. is set as command data.

  In the general command winning effect start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the control state The information which shows the number of the information which represents, the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are kept is set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the incoming effect start command transmits a winning effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the incoming effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the prize effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started, for a predetermined opening effect period (for example, 3 seconds), Big hit game starts.

  In the general command end effect start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the control state The information which shows the number of the information which represents, the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are kept is set. The first sub control unit 400 having received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the termination effect control command causes the decorative symbol display device 208 to display an image notifying the player of termination of the big hit for a predetermined termination effect period (for example, 3 seconds), and the big hit game is finish.

  In the above-described general command large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of rounds per round stored in the RAM 308, the number of current rounds, information indicating the control state, and the like is set in command data. In the above-mentioned general command big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information representing the control state, and the pending first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation in the command data Set information that indicates the number of games, etc.

  Further, in step SB33, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, the special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 as command data of the special view reserve increase command, control state , And information of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance.

  Further, in step SB33, general command hold drawing increase processing is also performed. In this general command draw increasing process, information representing a control state or the like is set in the command data of the draw increasing command. In addition, a common drawing fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing has been started (is performed) is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as the common drawing related command. It should be noted that from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, a common drawing fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing is stopped, and the pair of blade members 2321 has started opening (done) It is also possible to transmit an electric chew open start command indicating that, or an electric chew close command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 is closed.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until the end of all the rounds based on the number of rounds included in the command and the number of current rounds.

  Further, in this command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be outputted to the payout control unit 600 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, the power on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), Bits 4 to 5 of this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 after encryption processing It indicates the number of requested payouts.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7, an external output signal setting process (step SB35) is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in the above-described step 205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the bottom plate fullness error. When a lower fill error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the presence of a lower fill error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Also, the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 4 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting port 232 and the variable winning port 234, or through the drive circuits 324, 326, and 330. 1) Display data to be output to the special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not in order to determine whether or not the interruption of the power supply is detected. Then, if the low voltage signal is off (if the power off is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41, and if the low voltage signal is on (if the power off is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43.

  At step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step SB01 are set in the original registers, and interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. To return.

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state upon power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output port And then return to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SC01 of FIG. When the power is turned on, the initial setting of step SC01 is performed. In this initialization, initialization of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 4 and initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408 are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  In step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  At step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. In this command processing, power recovery sub-side flag setting processing and the like are performed.

  At step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in SC07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. Also, in this effect control process, the start side winning pre-predure sub-prediction notice execution process and the variation disclosure sub-side notice process are also performed.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data according to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step SC15, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC17, when there is an instruction to the drive circuit 420 of the various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step SC21, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in SC09, the setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 8 (b). FIG. 8B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is completed.

  Next, a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SE01 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC21, update processing of effect random number values, etc. are performed, and this timer interrupt processing is performed. Ends.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
The second sub-control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads out pattern information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub control unit 500 based on a signal from the CPU of the second sub control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display a display image An image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first instructs transfer of image data. Here, first, the designations of the display areas A and B of the VRAM are swapped. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM), etc. in the attribute register of the GPU based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. When the transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU uses information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM, image size, VRAM coordinates Instructs the GPU (such as placement coordinates). The GPU performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU is not input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Then, drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

  When the drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the GPU is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When the generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts the number of images of the scene, is incremented (+1) and the process is ended. Do.

<Example of flow of game>
Next, the special figure winning in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, it is assumed that there is no special figure prize unless otherwise stated.

  FIG. 12 shows the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the first special figure starting port 230 and the special figure 2 special figure fixed starting port 233 are alternately winning by left hitting in the non-electric support state (normal state) FIG.

  On the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12 (a), there are shown two special figure 1 reserve displays 201h representing that two reserves of special figure 1 are stored, and the right side thereof , Two special figure 2 retention displays 202h showing that two special figures 2 retentions are stored. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 12A, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss ("decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3") is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 12 (b), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the special view 1 suspension display 201h disappears, and in FIG. 12 (c) the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the loss ("decoration 8-decoration" 0-decoration 6 ") is displayed stopped.

  In FIG. 12D, the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started this time, and the special view 2 hold display 202h disappears. During the symbol variation display of this special view 2, one game ball enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance 10a from the entrance 10a and is distributed to the passage 12 by the distribution unit 11, and the gaming ball is the first special view starting opening 230 It is detected by the first ball detection sensor that the first prize is won. As a result, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6E, the special view 1 suspension display 201h is increased by one, and the number of the special view 1 suspension display 201h is two in total. Eventually, it will develop into reach production (here, reach A) (see Figure (f)). Also at this timing, one game ball enters the passage structure 1 from the entrance 10a and is distributed to the passage 13 by the distribution unit 11 this time, and the game ball wins the second special view fixed start opening 233 Is detected by the second ball detection sensor 82, and the special symbol 2 suspension display 202h is increased by one in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  The number of special view 2 suspension displays 202h at this stage is two in total. In the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6G, the decorative symbol of "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, reach A The appearing character appears. Then, just before the end of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in the same figure (d), the game ball enters another ball from the entrance 10a into the passage structure 1 and is distributed to the passage 12 by the distributing unit 11. The fact that the gaming ball has won the first special view start opening 230 is detected by the first ball detection sensor. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6H, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R special jackpot (“decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3”) is stopped and displayed. Further, three special display 1 suspension displays 201h are shown on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and two special display 2 suspension displays 202h are shown on the right side.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is in the winning order variation, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 win almost alternately in the non-power support state, and are digested in the winning order. In some cases, it is possible to play a game while being shocked every time it is a big hit in special figure 2 which is advantageous or a big hit in special figure 1 which is disadvantageous.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 13A, the end effect screen of the big hit game that was a big hit in the stage of FIG. 12H is shown.

  In FIG. 13 (b), the big hit game is over, and the control state shifts to a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, it shifts to a positive change state and a power supply state. The player changes from left to right to aim at the variable winning opening 234 disposed on the right during the jackpot game. In addition, since the big hit game is over, and it moves to the electric support state, the player continues to hit the right aiming at the second special view variable start opening 232 (so-called electric chow) disposed on the right. In FIG. 13 (b), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, and the special view 1 suspension display 201h disappears, and in FIG. 13 (c) the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the loss ("decoration 7-decor" 4-decoration 3 "is displayed stopped.

  In FIG. 13D, the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started this time, and the special view 2 hold display 202h disappears. In the same figure (e), the combination ("decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3") of the decoration pattern corresponding to the loss is stopped and displayed.

  In (f) of FIG. 13, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started again, and the special view 1 suspension display 201 h disappears. During the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the gaming ball is awarded one in the second special figure variable start opening 232 (so-called electric chew). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6G, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss ("decorative 7-decorative 4-decorative 3") is stopped and displayed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 2 suspension display 202h is increased by one, and the number of the special view 2 suspension display 202h is two in total.

  In (h) of FIG. 13, the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the special view 2 suspension display 202 h disappears.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  During the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 started in FIG. 13 (h), the game ball wins two consecutive balls in the second special figure variable start opening 232. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the special view 2 suspension display 202h is increased by two, and the number of the special view 2 suspension display 202h is three in total. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6B, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss ("decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 3") is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 14C, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, the special view 1 suspension display 201 h disappears, and the number of suspension of the special view 1 becomes zero. During the symbol variation display of this special figure 1, the gaming ball wins continuously in the second special figure variable start opening 232, but the special figure at the stage when the gaming ball wins one ball in the second special figure variable start opening 232 The number of pending 2 will be full, and no subsequent winnings will be pending. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6D, the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the loss ("decoration 7-decoration 4-decoration 3") is stopped and displayed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 2 suspension display 202h is increased by one, and the number of the special view 2 suspension display 202h is four in total (full).

  In FIG. 14 (e), the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started, and the special view 2 suspension display 202h disappears. Succeeded in reach effect (here normal reach) (see (f) in the same figure), and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (g), a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the 15R big hit (“decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6 ") is displayed stopped. When the big hit game by the big hit here ends, the control state shifts to the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, it shifts to the non-probability state and the power support state. For this reason, the player continues aiming at the second special view variable start opening 232 (so-called electric chow) disposed on the right side and continues to right, and the second special view variable start until the power support state is ended. The symbol variation display of the special figure 2 based on the winning of the mouth 232 is repeated.

  In the above description, the advance notice of the advance notice is lost, and the advance notice by the hold change display is never executed, but if the advance notice of the advance notice using the hold indication is won, the hold indication is displayed. The display mode is changed to the display mode (for example, a triangular figure or a square figure) of the prefetching notice.

<Passage structure>
The details of the passage structure 1 will be described. FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) are explanatory views of the structure and the distribution operation of the passage structure 1, and are sectional views along a vertical plane parallel to the plane direction of the game board 201. FIG. FIG.15 (c)-FIG.15 (e) are the II sectional view taken on the line of Fig.15 (a), II-II sectional view, and III-III sectional view, respectively.

  The passage structure 1 of the present embodiment constitutes a hollow passage unit and is provided on the game board 201. The passage structure 1 has a plurality of attachment portions 1a formed in an ear shape, and is fixed to the game board 201 by inserting a screw or the like into a hole formed in the attachment portion 1a. The passage structure 1 may be made of a transparent or translucent resin, in which case the movement of the gaming ball may be visible.

  Each of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 forms a rectangular (here, rectangular) cross section formed by surrounding the inner space with four plate-like walls. In the case of the present embodiment, all of the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 are configured to surround the internal space with four plate-shaped walls, but are configured by three wall portions of the front wall portion and the left and right side wall portions The back wall may be configured to use the game board 201. The passages 10, 12 and 13 may have a cylindrical shape or an elliptical cylindrical shape.

  The passage portion 10 extends in the vertical direction, and an inlet portion 10a is provided at the upper end portion thereof. A distribution unit 11 is provided between the passage 10 and the passage 12 and the passage 13 for distributing the game balls entering the passage 10 to the passage 12 or the passage 13. In the case of the present embodiment, the distribution unit 11 includes the movable body 20. The movable body 20 is a distribution member that performs the distribution operation of the game balls.

  The movable body 20 includes a plate-like rotary plate 21 and guide plates 22 and 23 provided at the end of the rotary plate 21 in the left-right direction. The rotary plate 21 is supported by a wall surrounding the periphery of the distribution unit 11 so as to be rotatable about an axis 24 extending in the left-right direction. The rotary plate 21 has a size that divides the internal space of the distribution unit 11 into upper and lower parts, and the game balls falling from the passage unit 10 always interfere with each other. The rotary plate 21 has its one side and the opposite side each constituting a mounting portion for the game ball.

  The guide plates 22 and 23 are semicircular members projecting from the rotary plate 21 in opposite directions. The guide plate 22 projects from one end in the left-right direction of the rotary plate 21 in one direction normal to the rotary plate 21, and the guide plate 23 extends from the other end in the left-right direction of the rotary plate 21. It projects in the other direction of the line direction. In the state of FIG. 15 (a), the guide plate 22 is in the state of closing the entrance of the passage portion 12, and in the state of FIG. 15 (b), the guide plate 23 is in the state of closing the entrance of the passage portion 13.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (a) to FIG. 15 (b), when the gaming ball falls onto the rotary plate 21 and the rotary plate 21 rotates, the gaming ball falls below the rotary plate 21 and the rotary plate 21 reverses. Do. In the state of FIG. 15 (b), the gaming ball is guided to the passage 12. If the gaming ball enters the passage 10 in the state of FIG. 15 (b) and the gaming ball falls to the rotary plate 21 and the rotary plate 21 rotates, the gaming ball falls below the rotary plate 21 and rotates. The board 21 is inverted to return to the state of FIG. 15 (a), and the gaming balls are guided to the passage 13. Thus, the gaming balls are basically distributed alternately to the passage 12 and the passage 13.

  The passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 are configured to allow passage of the gaming ball through which the passage portion 10 passes through the distribution unit 11. In the present embodiment, the passage portions of the distribution destination are two passage portions 12 and 13, but the passage portions of the distribution destination may be three or more. When distributing game balls to three or more passage parts, for example, the rotary plate 21 of the movable body 20 is formed in a water wheel shape provided with three mounting parts, and the first mounting part of them is down, the second The placement unit may be configured to distribute the game balls to the left and the third placement unit to the right. In this case, the first placement portion has a pair of wall portions that restrict movement of the gaming ball to the left and right, and the second placement portion restricts movement of the gaming ball to the right and downward. The third mounting portion may have an L-shaped two-wall portion that restricts the movement of the game ball to the left and the lower. In addition, as another example of distributing game balls to three or more passage parts, two movable bodies 20 are provided, the game balls are distributed to the left and another movable body 20 by one movable body 20, and the other movable bodies are separated. The game balls may be distributed to the middle and right in the body 20.

  Next, the passage portion 12 includes passage portions 12a and 12b located on the front side (player side) of the surface of the game board 201, and a passage portion 12c which penetrates the game board 201 and extends to the back side. including. Similarly, the passage portion 13 includes passage portions 13a and 13b located on the front side (player side) of the surface of the game board 201, and a passage portion 13c which penetrates the game board 201 and extends to the back side. Including.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the passage portion 12a constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 12a may be called a vertical portion 12a. The vertical portion 12a of the present embodiment extends linearly in the vertical direction. The passage portion 12 b is a portion connecting the vertical portion 12 a and the distributing portion 11, and in the present embodiment, extends obliquely. The passage portion 12c extends from the lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a to the back side of the game board 201, and includes a portion on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. The passage portion 12c may be a vertical portion.

  An annular first ball detection sensor SR1 is disposed in the middle of the passage portion 12c as shown by a solid line in FIG. 15C, and the area inside the first ball detection sensor SR1 is made the start winning area R1. ing. The first ball detection sensor SR1 may be disposed at a position distant from the passage portion 12c as shown by a broken line in FIG. 15C, in which case the start winning area R1 is at a position distant from the passage portion 12c. It will be set. When the first ball detection sensor SR1 is disposed as shown by a solid line in FIG. 15C, the game ball passing through the passage 12 can be detected, and as shown by a broken line in FIG. When the sensor SR1 is disposed, the gaming ball having passed through the passage 12 can be detected.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the passage portion 13a constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13a may be called a vertical portion 13a. The vertical portion 13a of the present embodiment extends linearly in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13 b is a portion connecting the vertical portion 13 a and the distribution unit 11 and is curved in an inverted C shape in the present embodiment. The passage portion 13 c extends from the lower end portion of the vertical portion 13 a to the back side of the gaming board 201 and includes a portion on the back side of the surface of the gaming board 201. The passage portion 13c may be a vertical portion.

  An annular second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed in the middle of the passage portion 13c as shown by a solid line in FIG. 15D, and the area inside the second ball detection sensor SR2 is set as the start winning area R2. ing. The second ball detection sensor SR2 may be disposed at a position away from the passage portion 13c as shown by a broken line in FIG. 15D, in which case the start winning area R2 is at a position away from the passage portion 13c. It will be set. When the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed as shown by the solid line in FIG. 15 (d), the game ball passing through the passage portion 13 can be detected, and as shown by the broken line in FIG. When the sensor SR2 is disposed, the gaming ball having passed through the passage 13 can be detected.

  The time for the game balls to reach the first ball detection sensor SR1 or the second ball detection sensor SR2 from the entrance 10 may be the same or different. In other words, the passage lengths from the inlet 10 to the first ball detection sensor SR1 or the second ball detection sensor SR2 (for example, the line lengths passing through the center of the cross section of the passage) may be the same or different.

  The vertical portions 12a and 13a are each a square tube having a rectangular cross-section, and have four sides in total: left, right, near and far. The vertical portion 12a has side portions S21 and S22 and the vertical portion 13a has side portions S31 and S32 as left and right side portions of the four side portions. In the case of the present embodiment, the side portions S21, S22, S31 and S32 are flat vertical surfaces, and form the side surfaces of the vertical portions 12a and 13a. The side portions S21 and S31 are outer side surfaces, and the side portions S22 and S32 are inner side surfaces. In the present embodiment, an opening OP1 penetrating each side is formed in the side portions S21 and S22, and the internal space of the vertical portion 12a immediately below the opening OP1 is used as a first special view starting opening 230. ing. Similarly, in the side portions S31 and S32, an opening OP2 penetrating each side is formed, and the internal space of the vertical portion 13a immediately below the opening OP2 is made the second special view fixed start port 233 There is.

  The distance from the game ball to the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view fixed start opening 233 from the entrance 10 may be the same or different. In other words, the passage lengths from the inlet 10 to the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view fixed start opening 233 (for example, line lengths passing through the center of the cross section of the passage) may be the same or different. Good.

  Next, the arrangement of the vertical portions 12a and 13a will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, two vertical portions 12a and 13a having the same cross-sectional shape and cross-sectional size are arranged in parallel spaced apart and parallel in the left-right direction, and one of them is disposed close to the other. The details will be described below.

  In FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (e), a virtual vertical line CL is shown as a reference of position. The virtual vertical line CL is parallel to the gaming board 201 (parallel to the surface direction. When the gaming board 201 has an undulation, it is based on the flat surface portion having the largest area), the center of the distributing portion 11 Is a virtual vertical line passing through The center of the distribution unit 11 may be the center in the width direction (horizontal direction) of the distribution unit 11, but in the illustrated example, the horizontal direction and the depth direction of the distribution unit 11 (normal to the game board 201) Direction: When the gaming board 201 has an undulation, the flat surface portion with the largest area is taken as the reference.

  In the case of the present embodiment, among the four side portions of the vertical portion 12a, the side portion furthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S21. Further, among the four sides of the vertical portion 13a, the side farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side S31. When the positions of the side portion S21 and the side portion S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL are compared, the side portion S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21. This position is biased to the virtual vertical line CL.

  In FIG. 15 (b) and (e), regions R11 and R12 are illustrated as reference of position. The region R11 is a region in the passage structure 1 and is a region in which the distribution unit 11 is located. In the case of this embodiment, it is a space including the movable body 20. The region R12 extends the region R11 downward, and further, the depth direction of the gaming board 201 (as described above, the normal direction of the gaming board 201. When the gaming board 201 has irregularities, the flat surface portion having the largest area) The space is expanded to

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The entire vertical portion 13a may overlap with the region R12, but in the present embodiment, a portion thereof overlaps. The vertical portion 12a may also overlap the region R12, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is located at a position not overlapping. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is at a position biased to the virtual vertical line CL rather than the vertical portion 12a.

  In the present embodiment, by moving the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portions 12a and 13a closer to the vertical portion 12a, the passage structure 1 may be made compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of other configurations is improved. It may be possible, and it may be easier to replace or maintain. FIG. 20 shows an example in which the degree of freedom of arrangement is improved. The game board 200A in the same figure is provided with two variable winning openings 234 and 234A, and the variable winning opening 234A is disposed below the game area 124 and in the lateral direction than the center. . Since the vertical portion 13a is biased to the left side to form a space on the right side, the variable winning opening 234A is disposed at a more central position in the left-right direction. Here, although the variable winning opening (attacker) 234A is disposed adjacent to the vertical portion 13a, it is also possible to dispose various devices such as a ball effect device or the like at the time of V-at- tacker or death.

  Returning to FIG. 15, in the present embodiment, the passage portion 13 includes a portion that does not overlap the region R12. Specifically, the passage portion 13b does not substantially entirely overlap the region R12. Thus, providing the overlapping portion with the region R12 and the non-overlapping portion means that the passage portion 13 is a partially curved or bent passage, which makes it difficult to cheat such as a thread ball There are times when you can.

<Another Configuration Example of Passage Structure>
Another configuration example of the passage structure 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The example of FIG. 16A illustrates a configuration in which the passage portion 12b of the passage portion 12 is curved in a C shape, and the vertical portion 12a is closer to the vertical portion 13a than the example of FIG. In the example of the figure, a part of the vertical portion 12a overlaps the region R12. In this manner, both of the vertical portions 12a and 13a may be arranged close to each other, and in this case, it may be possible to create an arrangement space of another configuration on both the left and right sides of the passage structure 1. The magnitude (for example, curvature) of curvature of the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 13b may be different or the same, and they are different in the example of FIG. 16 (a), and the curvature of the passage portion 13b is the same. It is getting bigger.

  The example of FIG. 16 (b) illustrates a configuration in which the passage portion 13 has a plurality of vertical portions. In the example of the figure, in addition to the vertical portion 13a, a midway portion 13d of the passage portion 13b constitutes a vertical portion extending in the vertical direction. The passage portion 13b is not formed in an arc shape, and is formed by bending a straight portion, and a portion thereof constitutes a vertical portion 13d. By making the straight portion into an outer shape that is not arc-shaped, it may be easy to arrange other adjacent configurations. When one passage portion has a plurality of vertical portions as in the example of FIG. 16 (b), one of the vertical portions 13a and 13d in the side portion of any one vertical portion (FIG. 16 (b)) Regarding the side portion), the side farthest from the virtual vertical line CL may be closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21 of the vertical portion 12a. Further, the lengths of the vertical portions 12a, 13a and 13d may be different or the same, and are different in the example of FIG. 16 (b), and the magnitude relationship of the lengths of the vertical portions is vertical portion 12a> vertical It is the part 13d> perpendicular part 13a.

  The example of FIG. 16C exemplifies a configuration in which the lengths in the vertical direction of the vertical portion 12a and the vertical portion 13a are made different. The different lengths in the vertical direction mean the lengths to the upper end and the lower end of each side of one of the two vertical parts and the upper and lower ends of each side of the other vertical part. It may mean that the lengths do not have the same length, and all the lengths are different.

  The example of FIG. 16C also illustrates a configuration in which the range of the passage portion 13b in the passage portion 13 is wider (for example, the passage length is longer) than the range of the vertical portion 13a. In some cases, the passage structure 1 can be made conspicuous by the fact that the passage portion 13 b is large.

  The example of FIG. 16D illustrates a configuration in which the vertical portion 13a is disposed closer to the vertical portion 12a than the virtual vertical line CL. By increasing the bias of the vertical portion 13a to the vertical portion 12a side, the arrangement space of another configuration adjacent to the vertical portion 13a may be able to be large. In addition, the passage structure 1 may have a unique outer shape as a whole, and the passage structure 1 may be made noticeable.

  In the examples of FIGS. 15 and 16, the opening OP1 and the opening OP2 are located at the same height when viewed in the vertical direction, but may be shifted in the vertical direction. Also, the two openings OP1 may be offset from each other in the vertical direction, and similarly, the two openings OP2 may be offset from each other in the vertical direction.

  Another configuration example of the passage structure 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. In the examples of FIGS. 15 and 16, the configuration example for guiding the gaming ball to the start winning area R <b> 1 and R <b> 2 is exemplified, but the configuration may be such that it is guided to another area.

  In the example of FIG. 17A, the passage 12 guides the game ball to the general winning area 2a, the passage 13 has the lower end of the vertical portion 13a opened downward, and the game ball is on the back side of the game board 201 Instead, it is illustrated that the game area 124 is allowed to flow down. In the vertical portion 12 a of the passage portion 12, a general winning opening 2 is formed instead of the first special drawing start opening 230, but the structure is the same.

  In the example of FIG. 17B, the passage 12 guides the gaming ball to the general winning area 2a, the passage 13 has the lower end of the vertical portion 13a opened downward, and the gaming ball is the back side of the game board 201 Instead, it is illustrated that the game area 124 is allowed to flow down. A variable winning opening (here, door-type electric chow) 3 is disposed in the game area below the vertical portion 13a, and an annular ball detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) is provided in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. ) SR3 is arranged. When the ball detecting sensor SR3 detects that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable winning opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball having the game ball entering the vertical portion 13a is the variable winning hole 3 There is a case to win a prize. The variable winning hole 3 may be, in addition to the door type electric chew, a Vero electric chew, a tulip, a feather electric charge tee, a shutter type electric chew, or the like.

  In the example of FIG. 17C, the lower end portions of the vertical portions 12a and 13a of the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13 are opened downward, and the game ball is not on the back side of the game board 201 but in the game area 124 It illustrates the configuration for flowing down. An annular ball detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR4 is disposed in the middle of the vertical portion 12a, and an annular sphere detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is disposed in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. There is. When a game ball is detected by the ball detection sensor SR3 or SR4, it is possible to determine the hit of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  As described above, the passage structure 1 may guide the gaming ball to any part. Depending on the guide destination, for example, it is also possible to arrange the passage structure 1 in the position illustrated in FIG. The game board 200B in the same figure has the passage structure 1 disposed at the right end of the game area 124, and the vertical part 13a is biased to the left side to form a space on the right side. The passage structure 1 is arranged. In the configuration example of the figure, the passage structure 1 is disposed so that the entrance portion 10 a is located below the gate 228, and the entering game ball is discharged to the front side of the game board 201. The distribution destination can be selected from various patterns such as an attacker, electric chew, and a general winning opening. Further, the ball detection sensors SR1 to SR4 may also be utilized for any winning, such as a start winning, a general winning, etc., depending on the part to be installed.

  Next, the passage structure 1 may be formed of a combination of a passage unit and a game nail as well as the above-mentioned example using only a cylindrical passage unit. The example of FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 shows an example in which the passage part is partially formed by a plurality of gaming nails 238.

  The example of FIG. 18A includes a passage portion 13 e in which the passage portion 13 is formed by a plurality of gaming nails 238. The lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 opens downward, and a passage portion 13e is formed so as to follow it. The passage portion 13 e is configured to guide the gaming ball to the general winning opening 2. The interval between the adjacent game nails 238 may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, but in the example shown in the figure, the interval between the adjacent game nails 238 is also wider than the diameter of the game ball. May flow out of the passage in the middle of the The lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 opens downward, and the variable winning hole (attacker) 4 is disposed below the lower end portion.

  Also in the example of FIG. 18 (b), the passage portion 13 includes the passage portion 13 e formed by the plurality of gaming nails 238. The lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 opens downward, and a passage portion 13e is formed so as to follow it. The passage portion 13 e is configured to guide the game ball to the variable winning hole (here, door type electric chow) 3. The interval between the adjacent game nails 238 may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, but in the example shown in the figure, the interval between the adjacent game nails 238 is also wider than the diameter of the game ball. May flow out of the passage in the middle of the An annular ball detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is disposed in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. When the ball detecting sensor SR3 detects that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable winning opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball having the game ball entering the vertical portion 13a is the variable winning hole 3 There is a case to win a prize.

  Further, in the example of the same drawing, the passage portion 12 also includes the passage portion 12 d formed by the plurality of game nails 238. The lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 opens downward, and a passage portion 12d is formed so as to follow it. The passage portion 12 d is configured to guide the gaming ball to the general winning opening 2. The distance between adjacent game nails 238 may be smaller than the diameter of the game balls, but the distance between adjacent game nails 238 may be wider than the diameter of the game balls. Also, the distance between the lower end of the vertical portion 12a and the adjacent game nail 238 may be narrower than the diameter of the game ball, but in the example of the figure, the distance between the adjacent game nails 238 is wider than the diameter of the game ball There is a part, and when a game ball enters passage part 12d from perpendicular part 12a, it may flow out of the passage.

  The example of FIG. 18C includes the passage portion 12 d in which the passage portion 12 is formed by a plurality of gaming nails 238. The lower end portion of the vertical portion 12a of the passage portion 12 opens downward, and a passage portion 12d is formed so as to follow it. The passage portion 12d is not configured to guide the game ball to a specific winning opening, and the game ball having passed the passage portion 12d will further flow down the game area 124. The lower end portion of the vertical portion 13a of the passage portion 13 opens downward, and the variable winning hole (in this case, a door type electric chow) 3 is disposed below the lower end portion. An annular ball detection sensor (here, a gate sensor) SR3 is disposed in the middle of the vertical portion 13a. When the ball detecting sensor SR3 detects that the game ball has entered the vertical portion 13a, the variable winning opening 3 is opened for a predetermined time, so that the game ball having the game ball entering the vertical portion 13a is the variable winning hole 3 There is a case to win a prize.

  FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b) show an example in which the passage portion 13 is entirely composed of a plurality of game nails 238. FIG. The example of FIGS. 19A and 19B is configured such that the passage portion 13 guides the game ball to the general winning opening 2 in both cases, but the example of FIG. The vertical length of the vertical portion 13a is longer than in the example of b), and the lower end is closer to the general winning opening 2. Therefore, the gaming ball entering the passage 13 may be more likely to win the general winning opening 2 in the example of FIG. 19 (a).

<Configuration Example 1 of Passing the Game Board Several Times>
A configuration example of the passage structure 1 in which the game ball passes the game board 201 a plurality of times will be described using FIGS. The same components as those in the above-described passage structure 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the passage structure 1 in the present example. The passage structure 1 of this example is attached to the game board 201 via the plate-like attachment portion 14. FIG. 23 is a perspective view showing the passage structure 1 of FIG. FIG. 24 (a) is a perspective view of the passage structure 1, and FIG. 24 (b) is a front view of the mounting portion 14.

  The game board 201 is formed with openings (not shown) into which the respective passage parts and the like of the passage structure 1 are inserted, and a part of the structure of the passage structure 1 protrudes to the back of the game board 201 The unit 14 is fixed to the surface of the game board 201 with a screw or the like.

  The passage portion 10 and the inlet portion 10 a are located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and therefore located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. The mounting portion 14 is formed with an opening 14 a for positioning the passage portion 10 on the front side.

  The distributing unit 11 is located on the back side with respect to the mounting unit 14, and thus is located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201, and flows down the game area 124 to enter the entrance 10a. Is guided to the back side of the game board 201 once. Since the distribution unit 11 is positioned further to the back than the gaming board 201, it may be difficult for the player to visually distribute the gaming balls, which may improve the sense of expectation in the distribution direction. In some cases, it may be difficult to act.

  A fixed distributing member 30 is disposed in the distributing unit 11. In the case of this example, the distributing member 30 is a triangular prism-shaped member, and the top thereof faces the passage portion 10, and slopes are formed from the top to the left and right. The game balls having passed through the passage portion 10 collide near the top of the distributing member 30, and are distributed to the left and right. The distribution unit 11 may include the movable body 20 as described above, or may be a fixed member as in this example.

  In the passage portion 12, the vertical portion 12 a is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus is located on the near side of the surface of the game board 201. The mounting portion 14 is formed with an opening 14 b for positioning the passage portion 10 on the front side. The passage portions 12 b and 12 c of the passage portion 12 are mainly located on the back side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and are therefore located on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. The first ball detection sensor SR1 is disposed at the lower end portion of the passage portion 12c, and the area inside the first ball detection sensor SR1 is set as the start winning area R1.

  In the passage portion 13, the vertical portion 13 a is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and thus is located on the near side of the surface of the game board 201. The mounting portion 14 is formed with an opening 14 c for positioning the passage portion 10 on the front side. The passage portions 13 b and 13 c of the passage portion 12 are mainly located on the back side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and are therefore located behind the surface of the game board 201. A second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the lower end portion of the passage portion 13c, and an area inside the second ball detection sensor SR2 is a start winning area R2.

  The configuration of the passage portion and the passage manner of the game balls will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.25 (a) is a front view of the channel | path structure 1, FIG.25 (b) is the IV-IV sectional view taken on the line of Fig.25 (a). 25 (c) and 25 (d) are a left side view and a right side view of the passage structure 1, respectively.

  In the case of the present example, the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 form a cylinder whose cross section is a square (here, square), but may be circular or elliptical.

  The passage portion 12 is provided with a partition wall 12g which divides the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 12c up and down, and a rib 12h for guiding the passage of the game ball is formed. An opening OP1 is formed in each of the side portions S21 and S22 of the vertical portion 12a, and an internal space immediately below the opening OP1 is used as a first start winning opening 230.

  The passage 13 is similarly provided with a partition wall 13g which vertically divides the passage portion 13b and the passage portion 13c, and a rib 13h for guiding the passage of the game ball is formed. In addition, a rib 13f for guiding the passage of the game ball is also formed in the vertical portion 13a. Although not shown, a rib similar to the rib 13f is also formed in the vertical portion 12a. An opening OP2 is formed in each of the side portions S31 and S32 of the vertical portion 13a, and an internal space immediately below the opening OP2 is used as a second fixed start winning opening 233.

  In FIGS. 25A and 25B, the virtual vertical line CL and the regions R11 and R12 are illustrated. Of the side portions of the vertical portion 12a, the side farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S21, and of the side portions of the vertical portion 13a, the side farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S31. When the positions of the side portion S21 and the side portion S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL are compared, the side portion S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21. This position is biased to the virtual vertical line CL. The region R11 is a space including the distribution member 30, and the region R12 is a space which extends the region R11 downward as described above and further extends in the depth direction of the gaming board 201.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The entire vertical portion 13a may overlap with the region R12, but in the present example, a portion thereof overlaps. The vertical portion 12a may also overlap with the region R12, but in the case of this example, it is located at a position not overlapping. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is at a position biased to the virtual vertical line CL rather than the vertical portion 12a. By moving the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portions 12a and 13a closer to the vertical portion 12a, the passage structure 1 may be compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of other configurations may be improved. Also, replacement and maintenance may be facilitated.

  The passage aspect of the gaming ball in the passage 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (b) and 25 (d). The game balls having entered the passage section 10 from the entrance section 10a are guided to the back side of the attachment section 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201), and are distributed to the left or right in the distribution section 11. When it is distributed to the right, it enters the passage portion 13 b of the passage portion 13. The gaming ball having entered the passage portion 13 b is guided to the vertical portion 13 a toward the front side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201). The passage portion 13b includes a portion not overlapping the region R12, and the gaming ball passes while moving to a position not overlapping the region R12.

  The gaming ball having entered the vertical portion 13a is guided to the passage portion 13c toward the back side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201) again. The gaming ball having entered the passage portion 13c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the second ball detection sensor SR2 along the way.

  The passage aspect of the game ball in passage part 12 is explained with reference to Drawing 25 (c). The passage manner of the game balls in the passage portion 12 is basically the same as the passage manner in the passage portion 13.

  The game balls having entered the passage section 10 from the entrance section 10a are guided to the back side of the attachment section 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201), and are distributed to the left or right in the distribution section 11. When it is distributed to the left, it enters the passage portion 12 b of the passage portion 12. The game ball entering the passage portion 12 b is guided to the vertical portion 12 a toward the front side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201).

  The game ball having entered the vertical portion 12a is guided to the passage portion 12c toward the back side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201) again. The gaming ball having entered the passage portion 12c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the first ball detection sensor SR1 on the way.

  As described above, in this example, since the game ball passes through the passage 13 while meandering in the depth direction, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the passage mode of the game ball, and the sense of expectation in the passing direction may be improved. In addition, since the game ball passes the back side of the game board 201, there are cases where it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraudulent acts.

  In this example, in both of the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13, the game ball passes through the passage portion while meandering in the depth direction, but one of them does not meander in the depth direction (for example, It may be the example of FIGS.

  The configuration of each of the examples illustrated in FIGS. 15 to 19 is also applicable as a modification of this example.

  For example, the first ball detection sensor SR1 and the second ball detection sensor SR2 may detect the game ball after passing, not the game ball on the way of passing through the passage structure 1. 26 (a) to 26 (c) show an example thereof. Although the figure shows an arrangement example of the second ball detection sensor SR2, it is also applicable to the first ball detection sensor SR1. In the example of FIG. 15A, the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed outside the passage portion 13c, and the gaming ball discharged from the passage portion 13c is detected. After detection, the gaming ball is treated as a dead ball. In the example of FIG. 15 (b), the passage portion 13c is omitted, the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the exit of the vertical portion 13a, and the gaming ball passes the second ball detection sensor SR2 in the depth direction. The direction is set as you do. After detection, the gaming ball is treated as a dead ball. Also in the example of FIG. 15C, the passage portion 13c is omitted, and the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the outlet of the vertical portion 13a, but the outlet of the vertical portion 13a , And the second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed under the outlet of the vertical portion 13a. The game ball can be treated as an effective ball flowing down the game area 124 even after detection. In the case of this configuration example, the present invention is also applicable to an example in which a general winning opening, a variable winning opening, or a power chute are provided below the second ball detection sensor SR2.

  Also, for example, the vertical portion 13a shown in FIG. 16 (d) may be largely biased to the vertical portion 12a side. FIG. 27 is a view showing an example thereof, and FIG. 27 (a) is a front view and FIG. 27 (b) is a perspective view. In the example of the figure, the passage portion 13b has a portion that extends diagonally longer, and this vertically biases the vertical portion 13a toward the vertical portion 12a. As shown in FIG. 16D, although the vertical portion 13a is not positioned closer to the vertical portion 12a than the virtual vertical line CL, the side S31 side overlaps the region R12, and the side S32 side overlaps the region R12. It is in a position where Moreover, in the example of the figure, unlike the example of FIGS. 22-25, the vertical part 12a and the vertical part 13a are arranged in parallel at the same height in the up-down direction at the same height.

  Further, for example, instead of the fixed distributing member 30, it is also possible to adopt a movable distributing member. FIG. 28 shows an example thereof. The example of FIG. 28 (a) illustrates the movable body 31 which is a movable distribution member. The movable body 31 is T-shaped in horizontal cross section, and is rotatable around a rotation center shaft 31 a in the vertical direction. The game balls are distributed to the left and right depending on the direction of the plate-like portion 31b protruding to the front side. The example of FIG. 28 (b) illustrates the movable body 32, which is a movable distribution member. The movable body 32 is configured such that a semicircular plate portion is provided on the back of a T-shaped vertical section, and is rotatable around a rotation center shaft 32 a in the depth direction. The game balls are distributed to the left and right depending on the direction of the plate-like portion 32b protruding upward.

  Such a movable body may be active, which is rotated by a drive source such as a motor, or may be passive, which is rotated using the bias of the game balls to be distributed. In the case of rotating by a driving source such as a motor, it may be always rotated at a constant cycle from the time of turning on the power of the pincer machine 100.

  In the case of a passive type that pivots using the bias of the game ball, a blocking mechanism may be provided to block the movable body from stopping at the non-distributed position. FIG. 29 is an explanatory view showing an example thereof, and is a view of the vicinity of the distribution unit 11 as viewed from above.

  The movable body 33 shown in FIG. 29 (a) has a structure similar to the example shown in FIG. 28 (a), and is a distributing member that pivots around a pivoting center shaft 33a in the up and down direction. Recesses 33b are juxtaposed on the left and right. When the gaming ball abuts on the recess 33b, a pivoting biasing force is applied to the movable body 33. FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the gaming ball entering the distribution unit 11 from the passage unit 10 is in contact with the left recess 33b. The movable body 33 is pivoted to the left as shown in FIG. 29C by being urged by the contact of the game balls, and the game balls are guided to the passage portion 12. Since the game ball entering the distribution unit 11 from the passage unit 10 next abuts on the recess 33b on the right side, the movable body 33 pivots to the right and the game ball is guided to the passage unit 13, as shown in FIG. Return to state a). Thus, the game balls are distributed to the left and right in order.

  A magnet 33 c is disposed on the back side of the movable body 33. Below the magnet 33c, a magnet 34 having a polarity that repels the magnet 33c is disposed. The combination of the magnet 33c and the magnet 34 prevents the movable body 33 from being at rest in the position shown in FIG. 29 (b) or 29 (d). That is, since the magnet 33c and the magnet 34 overlap in the vertical direction and repel each other, the movable body 33 does not stand still at the position of FIG. 29 (b) or FIG. 29 (a) or 29 (c)).

  In the positions shown in FIGS. 29B and 29D, the boundary between the left and right recesses 33b faces the passage 10, and the gaming ball through which the passage 10 passes does not sufficiently contact any of the recesses 33b. It is. When the movable body 33 is in the position shown in FIG. 29 (b) or 29 (d), it becomes difficult for the gaming ball to move laterally as it is sandwiched between the surrounding wall and the movable body 33, Distribution may not be performed smoothly. In particular, when the movable body 33 is accidentally positioned at the position of FIG. 29 (b) or FIG. 29 (d) when installing the pachinko machine 100 in a store, etc. In the case of the present embodiment, the magnets 33c and 34 may prevent the movable body 33 from being positioned at the position shown in FIG. 29 (b) or 29 (d).

  In addition, in order to more reliably catch the movable body and the game ball at the time of sorting, the movable body may be provided with a friction improving portion for improving the friction with the game ball. FIG. 30 shows an example thereof. The movable body 33 of the same figure is a modification of the movable body of FIG. 29, and the friction improvement part 33d is provided in the outer side edge part of the recessed part 33b. In the example shown in the figure, the friction improving portion 33d is a projecting portion that protrudes inward, and when the gaming ball abuts on the recess 33b, the biasing force of the gaming ball is movable due to the contact between the gaming ball and the friction improving portion 33d. It may be reliably transmitted by the body 33 and the rotation of the movable body 33 may be promoted.

<Configuration Example 2 of Passing the Game Board Several Times>
A configuration example of the passage structure 1 in which the game ball passes the game board 201 a plurality of times will be described using FIGS. The same components as those in the above-described passage structure 1 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 31 is a front view, left and right side views, a plan view and a bottom view of the passage structure 1 in this example. FIG. 32 (a) is a back view of the passage structure 1 in this example, and FIG. 32 (b) is a perspective view of the back side.

  The passage structure 1 of this example is roughly divided into three components, and has a cover member 5 on the front side, a passage forming portion 7 on the back side, and a passage forming portion 6 between them. ing. The cover member 5, the passage forming portion 7 and the passage forming portion 6 can be made of a translucent material. 33 (a) is a rear view of the cover member 5, FIG. 33 (b) is a front view of the passage component 6, and FIG. 33 (c) is a front view of the passage component 7. 34 (a) to 34 (d) are a sectional view taken along the line V-V, a sectional view taken along the line VI-VI, a sectional view taken along the line VII-VII, and a sectional view taken along the line VIII-VIII in FIG.

  The cover member 5 is a member that covers the front of the passage configuration portion 6, and can be used, for example, as a decoration member. The game ball passing through the rear passage portion through the cover member 5 may be visible.

  On the back of the cover member 5, there are provided a plurality of mounting portions 5a having screw holes. The passage forming portion 6 is a unit integrally including a plate-like attaching portion 14 and a portion constituting the passage portion, and the attaching portion 14 has a shaft 14 e at a position corresponding to the attaching portion 5 a. The cover member 5 is fixed to the passage configuration portion 6 by the fitting of the attachment portion 5 a and the shaft 14 e. The mounting portion 14 is fixed to the surface of the game board 201 with a screw or the like. The passage forming unit 7 is a unit integrally having a passage portion and a portion forming the distributing unit, and is fixed to the back surface of the game board 201 with a screw or the like. In the game board 201, an opening is formed at a portion where the passage is communicated between the passage forming portion 6 and the passage forming portion 7.

  In the case of this example, the passage configuration portion 6 has the passage portion 10, the vertical portion 12a and the vertical portion 13a. The passage construction 7 comprises a distributor 11, passage sections 12b and 12c and passage sections 13b and 13c.

  The passage portion 10 and the inlet portion 10 a are located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14, and therefore located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201.

  The distribution unit 11 is provided in the passage configuration unit 7 and is located on the back side with respect to the attachment unit 14, that is, on the back side of the surface of the game board 201. The game ball having flowed down the game area 124 and entering the entrance 10 a is temporarily guided to the distribution unit 11 on the back side of the game board 201. Since the distribution unit 11 is positioned further to the back than the gaming board 201, it may be difficult for the player to visually distribute the gaming balls, which may improve the sense of expectation in the distribution direction. In some cases, it may be difficult to act.

  In the distribution unit 11, a movable body 40 which is a movable distribution member is arranged. The game ball having passed through the passage portion 10 abuts on the movable body 40 and is distributed to the left and right. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are explanatory views of the movable body 40. FIG. The movable body 40 has a structure similar to that of the movable body 33 described with reference to FIG. 29, and is a passive one that pivots by utilizing the bias of the game ball. Of course, instead of the movable body 33, an active movable body or a fixed distribution member may be adopted.

  The movable body 40 is an distributing member which pivots around a pivoting center shaft 40a in the vertical direction, and on the front side thereof, concave portions 40b are provided in parallel on the left and right. When the gaming ball abuts on the recess 40b, a pivoting biasing force is applied to the movable body 33. When the movable body 40 is in the position of FIG. 35 (a), the gaming balls are distributed to the right, and when the movable body 40 is in the position of FIG. 35 (b), the gaming balls are distributed to the left. The game balls are distributed to the left and right in order. The movable body 40 is also provided with a blocking mechanism for blocking the stationary state at the non-distributed position, and the magnet 40c is disposed on the back side, and as shown in FIG. 32 etc., it repels with the magnet 40c. A magnet 41 is disposed below it.

  Returning to FIGS. 31 to 34, in the passage portion 12, the vertical portion 12a is located on the front side with respect to the mounting portion 14 in the passage configuration portion 6, and therefore located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. ing. The passage portions 12 b and 12 c of the passage portion 12 are mainly provided in the passage forming portion 7, and thus are located behind the surface of the game board 201. The first ball detection sensor SR1 is disposed at the lower end portion of the passage portion 12c, and the area inside the first ball detection sensor SR1 is set as the start winning area R1.

  In the passage portion 13, the vertical portion 13 a is located on the front side with respect to the attachment portion 14 in the passage configuration portion 6, and is therefore located on the front side of the surface of the game board 201. The passage portions 13 b and 13 c of the passage portion 13 are mainly provided in the passage forming portion 7, and thus are located behind the surface of the game board 201. A second ball detection sensor SR2 is disposed at the lower end portion of the passage portion 13c, and an area inside the second ball detection sensor SR2 is a start winning area R2.

  In the case of the present example, the passage portions 10, 12 and 13 constitute a cylinder whose cross section is square (here, square). In the passage portion 10, a rib 10f for guiding the game ball to the distribution portion 11 is formed.

  The passage portion 12 is provided with a partition wall 12g which divides the passage portion 12b and the passage portion 12c up and down, and a rib 12h for guiding the passage of the game ball is formed. The rib 12f may guide the game ball to pass through the center of the passage. In addition, a rib 12f for guiding the passage of the game ball is also formed in the vertical portion 12a. An opening OP1 is formed in each of the side portions S21 and S22 of the vertical portion 12a, and an internal space immediately below the opening OP1 is used as a first start winning opening 230. An opening is formed in the mounting portion 14 around the opening OP1 so as to be continuous with the opening OP1.

  The passage 13 is provided with a partition wall 13g which divides the passage portion 13b and the passage portion 13c similarly to the above and below, and a rib 13h for guiding the passage of the game ball is formed. The rib 13f may guide the game ball to pass through the center of the passage. In addition, a rib 13f for guiding the passage of the game ball is also formed in the vertical portion 13a. An opening OP2 is formed in each of the side portions S31 and S32 of the vertical portion 13a, and an internal space immediately below the opening OP2 is used as a second fixed start winning opening 233. Around the opening OP2, the attachment 14 is also formed with an opening so as to be continuous with the opening OP2.

  Reference is made to FIGS. 36 (a) and (b). FIG. 36 (a) is a front view of the passage configuration portion 6, and illustrates the virtual vertical line CL and the regions R11 and R12. FIG. 36 (b) shows the distributing portion 11 and the portions of the passage portions 12 and 13 in the passage forming portion 7.

  Of the side portions of the vertical portion 12a, the side farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S21, and of the side portions of the vertical portion 13a, the side farthest from the virtual vertical line CL is the side portion S31. When the positions of the side portion S21 and the side portion S31 with respect to the virtual vertical line CL are compared, the side portion S31 is closer to the virtual vertical line CL than the side portion S21. This position is biased to the virtual vertical line CL. The region R11 is a space including the movable body 40, and the region R12 is a space extending the region R11 downward as described above and further extending in the depth direction of the gaming board 201.

  The vertical portion 13a overlaps the region R12. The entire vertical portion 13a may overlap with the region R12, but in the present example, a portion thereof overlaps. The vertical portion 12a may also overlap with the region R12, but in the case of this example, it is located at a position not overlapping. Therefore, the vertical portion 13a is at a position biased to the virtual vertical line CL rather than the vertical portion 12a. By moving the vertical portion 13a of the vertical portions 12a and 13a closer to the vertical portion 12a, the passage structure 1 may be compact in the left-right direction, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of other configurations may be improved. Also, replacement and maintenance may be facilitated.

  The passage portion 12b includes a bulging portion 12b 'that bulges downward. The game ball may not be easily clogged by providing the bulging portion 12b 'to widen the passage width. The passage portion 12c has a curved shape that is biased inward at the outlet portion 12c ', and may improve the freedom of arrangement of peripheral components.

  Although the passage aspect of the game ball in passage part 12 and passage part 13 is explained, this becomes the same passage aspect as the example illustrated in Drawing 25 (c) and (d).

  That is, the game ball entering the passage portion 10 from the entrance portion 10a is guided to the back side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201), and is distributed to the left or right in the distribution portion 11.

  When it is distributed to the left, it enters the passage portion 12 b of the passage portion 12. The game ball entering the passage portion 12 b is guided to the vertical portion 12 a toward the front side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201). The game ball having entered the vertical portion 12a is guided to the passage portion 12c toward the back side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201) again. The gaming ball having entered the passage portion 12c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the first ball detection sensor SR1 on the way.

  When it is distributed to the right, it enters the passage portion 13 b of the passage portion 13. The gaming ball having entered the passage portion 13 b is guided to the vertical portion 13 a toward the front side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the front side of the game board 201). The passage portion 13b includes a portion not overlapping the region R12, and the gaming ball passes while moving to a position not overlapping the region R12. The gaming ball having entered the vertical portion 13a is guided to the passage portion 13c toward the back side of the attachment portion 14 (that is, the back side of the game board 201) again. The gaming ball having entered the passage portion 13c is discharged to the outside of the passage so as to fall downward, and the passage is detected by the second ball detection sensor SR2 along the way.

  As described above, in this example, since the game ball passes through the passage 13 while meandering in the depth direction, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the passage mode of the game ball, and the sense of expectation in the passing direction may be improved. In addition, since the game ball passes the back side of the game board 201, there are cases where it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraudulent acts.

  In this example, in both of the passage portion 12 and the passage portion 13, the game ball passes through the passage portion while meandering in the depth direction, but one of them does not meander in the depth direction (for example, It may be the example of FIGS. Moreover, it is also possible to apply each example shown in FIGS. 15-30 to this example.

  Next, the rib 14f and the opening OP2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (b), 37 and 38. FIG. 37 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line IX-IX of FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 37 (b) is an explanatory view of an entering mode of the gaming ball to the opening OP2, FIG. 37 (c) is an illustration of FIG. It is XX sectional drawing.

In the case of this example, as a route of the game ball which wins in the second fixed start winning opening 233, (1) when the game ball enters the entrance 10a and is distributed to the passage 13, (2) side S32 side When the game ball enters the opening OP2 of
(3) When the game ball enters the opening OP2 on the side S31 side,
There are three patterns of In the case of (2), since there is a difference in height between the opening OP1 and the opening OP2, the game ball in the passage 12 may pop out from the opening OP1 and enter the opening OP2. In the case of (1), there are also cases where the gaming ball pops out from the opening OP2 and does not win the second fixed start winning opening 233.

  In the case where the winning patterns of (2) and (3) are set as irregular winning, it is possible to structurally reduce the probability that the gaming ball enters the second fixed start winning opening 233.

  In the case of this example, it is difficult for the game ball to reach the opening OP2 on the side S32 side due to the presence of the vertical portion 12a or the like. On the other hand, when hitting the right, the game ball may reach the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. Therefore, the rib 14f is provided obliquely above the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the provision of the rib 14f makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter the opening OP2 on the side S31 side. In addition, the game ball enters the opening OP2 from the side (right side) of the opening OP2 by making the distance L between the lower end of the rib 14f and the lower end of the opening OP2 shorter than the diameter of the gaming ball. Is also difficult. Since the rib 14f is not provided on the side S32 side, the game ball is easier to enter than the opening OP2 on the side S31 side, but as described above, the game ball is on the opening OP2 on the side S32 side Since it is difficult to reach, the probability that the gaming ball enters the first opening OP2 on the side S32 side is also low.

  Next, FIG. 37 (c) will be referred to. As already described, the rib 13f is provided in the vertical portion 13a. In FIG. 37 (c), the diameter of the gaming ball is p, the distance from the surface of the mounting portion 14 to the opening end on the front side of the side S31 or S32 of the opening OP2 c, from the surface of the mounting portion 14 The distance to the rib 13f is b, the distance from the lateral end of the opening of the opening OP2 provided in the mounting portion 14 to the side S31 or S32 is a, the horizontal direction of the opening provided in the mounting 14 The distance from the end to the rib 13f is d, and the distance from the end on the back side of the opening OP2 formed in the side portion S31 or S32 to the rib 13f is e. The dimensional relationship is ccd> p> e> b.

  Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to horizontally enter the opening OP2 horizontally due to the interference with the rib 13f, and the game ball is made to the game board 201 so as to pass through the gap of the distance d. It can be approached by entering obliquely (bouncing up). That is, the rib 13f functions as an entry blocking portion of the game ball. By the combination of the rib 13f and the rib 14f, the probability that the gaming ball enters the opening OP2 on the side S31 side is extremely low.

<Guide structure of game ball>
The passage portion of at least a part of the passage structure 1 may be provided with a guide for guiding or guiding the game ball. FIG. 38A is a perspective view schematically showing a passage portion PSG showing an example thereof. FIG. 38 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Y-Y of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 38 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z-Z of FIG. 38 (b).

  The passage portion PSG constitutes a cylinder whose section is a square (here, a square), and the ball detection sensor SR is disposed at the lower end portion which is the outlet side thereof. Ribs RB are formed on the opposing inner walls of the inner walls of the passage portion PSG. The rib RB in this example protrudes toward the opposite inner wall and extends in the lateral direction. Furthermore, the ribs RB are disposed at different positions in the vertical direction. The inner wall forming the rib RB may be an inner wall facing in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 100, or may be an inner wall facing in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 38D illustrates the flow-down mode of the gaming ball in the passage portion PSG. Since the gaming ball interferes with the rib RB in the process of flowing down, the gaming ball flows down in the passage portion PSG while being guided back and forth or to the left and right according to the arrangement of the rib RB.

<Summary of the embodiment>
A1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game area (for example 124) in which game balls can flow down;
A gaming board (for example, 201) provided with the gaming area;
Passage means (for example, 1) provided on the gaming board;
A game console equipped with
The passage means is a means provided with a first passage portion (for example, 10) to which game balls flowing down the game area can enter.
The passage means is a means provided with a distribution unit (for example 11) capable of distributing the gaming ball having entered the first passage part to any one of a plurality of passage parts (for example 12 and 13) Yes,
The plurality of passage portions are passage portions through which gaming balls having passed through the first passage portion can pass,
One of the plurality of passage portions is a second passage portion (for example, 12),
One of the plurality of passage parts is a third passage part (for example, 13),
The second passage portion is a passage portion including at least a second vertical portion (e.g. 12a),
The third passage portion is a passage portion including at least a third vertical portion (for example, 13a),
The distribution unit is a distribution unit located in a first region (for example, R11) in the passage means,
The second vertical portion is a vertical portion having a plurality of side portions (for example, S21, S22) including one side portion (hereinafter, referred to as "second side portion") (for example, S21),
The third vertical portion is a vertical portion having a plurality of side portions (e.g., S31, S32) including one side (hereinafter, referred to as "third side") (e.g., S31),
The second side is a side farthest from an imaginary vertical line (for example, CL) among the plurality of sides of the second vertical portion,
The third side is a side farthest from the virtual vertical line among the plurality of sides of the third vertical portion,
The virtual vertical line is a virtual vertical line passing through the center of the distribution section in the width direction,
The third side is a side closer to the virtual vertical line than the second side,
The third vertical portion is a vertical portion at least partially overlapping with a second region (for example, R12),
The second area is an area which extends the first area downward and further extends in the normal direction of the gaming board.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the passage means. Further, one of the passage portions may be biased to one side, the degree of freedom of arrangement of surrounding parts may be improved, the passage means may be compact, and replacement and maintenance may be facilitated.

A2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second passage portion is a portion on the back side of the surface of the game board (for example, 12b and 12c in FIGS. 25 and 34) and a portion on the front side of the surface of the game board (for example, FIG. 25, A passage including 12a) of FIG.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, a goto act may be difficult.

A3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third passage portion is a portion on the back side of the surface of the game board (for example, 13b and 13c in FIGS. 25 and 34) and a portion on the front side of the surface of the game board (for example, FIG. 25, A passage including 13b and 13c) of FIG.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, a goto act may be difficult.

A4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least one side (for example, S21, S22) of the plurality of sides of the second passage portion is a side provided with an opening (for example, OP1) through which gaming balls can pass.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the interest of the game may be improved by causing the irregular winning. The opening may function as an entrance to the gaming ball or may function as an exit.

A5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least one side (e.g., S31, S32) of the plurality of sides of the third passage portion is a side provided with an opening (e.g., OP2) through which gaming balls can pass.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the interest of the game may be improved by causing the irregular winning. The opening may function as an entrance to the gaming ball or may function as an exit.

A6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third passage portion is a passage portion including a portion (for example, 13b) which does not overlap with the second region,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, by bending the passage of the gaming ball, it may be difficult to make a stringed ball goto.

A7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A second detection means (for example, SR1) capable of detecting a game ball passing through or passing through the second passage portion;
The second detection means is provided with a second symbol variation means capable of executing a second symbol variation display (for example, the variation display of the special view 1) when a game ball is detected in the second detection means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, by providing the detection means and associating the symbol variation display with the detection result, it may be possible to give the player an interest in the movement of the gaming ball.

A8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It has a third detection means (for example, SR2) capable of detecting a game ball passing through or passing through the third passage portion,
The third detection means is provided with third symbol variation means capable of executing a third symbol variation display (for example, variation display of special figure 2) when a game ball is detected in the third detection means,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, by providing the detection means and associating the symbol variation display with the detection result, it may be possible to give the player an interest in the movement of the gaming ball.

A9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The distributing unit is a distributing unit (for example, 11 in FIGS. 25 and 34) positioned behind the surface of the gaming board.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the sorting unit may be difficult to see, and a goto act on the sorting unit may be difficult.

  When the above A2 and the above A3 are combined, there are cases where space saving of the passage part in the game area can be compatible with difficulty of the goto action.

  When the above A2 to A5 are combined, the passage portion may have a complicated shape, and the goto action may be difficult. Even if the passage portion has a complicated shape, it may be difficult to cause ball clogging due to the presence of the opening.

A10.
A game area (for example 124) in which game balls can flow down;
A gaming board (for example, 201) provided with the gaming area;
Passage means (for example, 1) provided on the gaming board;
A game console equipped with
The passage means is a means provided with a first passage portion (for example, 10) to which game balls flowing down the game area can enter.
The passage means is a means provided with a distribution unit (for example 11) capable of distributing the gaming ball having entered the first passage part to any one of a plurality of passage parts (for example 12 and 13) Yes,
The plurality of passage portions are passage portions through which gaming balls having passed through the first passage portion can pass,
One of the plurality of passage portions is a second passage portion (for example, 12),
One of the plurality of passage parts is a third passage part (for example, 13),
The second passage portion is a passage portion including at least a second outlet (for example, an end of 12c),
The third passage portion is a passage portion including at least a third outlet (for example, an end of 13c),
The distribution unit is a distribution unit located in a first region (for example, R11) in the passage means,
The third outlet is an outlet closer to an imaginary vertical line (for example, CL) than the second outlet,
The virtual vertical line is a virtual vertical line passing through the center of the distribution section in the width direction,
The third outlet portion is an outlet portion at least partially overlapping with a second region (for example, R12),
The second area is an area which extends the first area downward and further extends in the normal direction of the gaming board.
It is characterized by

  Also, the following configuration can be adopted.

  The first region may be a space that is between the first passage portion and the second and third passage portions and includes the distribution portion. The area through which the game ball passes while the game ball touches the distribution member may be the first area. The range in which the distributing member operates may be the first area.

  The distribution unit may include a distribution member. The distributing member may distribute game balls according to the bias (for example, speed or weight) of the game balls. The distributing member may operate vertically to the gaming board. The distributing member may be prevented from being stopped at a specific position by a magnet. The distributing member may be a fixed member or a movable member. The distributing member may distribute game balls according to a shape. The distributing member may be one that constantly performs a constant movement after power on or may be an electric type. The distributing member may be a rotating body (for example, a crown) in which a hole corresponding to the passage is formed.

  The passage section may be a space through which gaming balls can pass and a wall constituting the space. The second and third side portions may be wall portions constituting the vertical portion.

  The total length (e.g., the length in the vertical direction) of the third vertical portion may be shorter than that of the second vertical portion. The total length of the second vertical portion may be shorter than that of the third vertical portion. The second passage portion may have a plurality of vertical portions, and the third passage portion may have a plurality of vertical portions.

  Each of the second passage portion and the third passage portion may have a portion overlapping the second region. The second passage portion and the third passage portion may be symmetrical in shape.

  An illumination substrate may be attached to the back (rear side) of the second passage portion and the third passage portion. A lens cut may be performed on the back side (back side) of the passage means, and the lens cut may be illuminated by the effect light emitting element to diffuse the light.

  The passage portion may have a curved portion. The passage means may comprise a cover member. The cover member may have translucency that allows visual recognition of the game ball passing through the passage portion. The cover member may have a translucent property that allows passage of the game ball to be visible in a part of the area.

  In the case where the front and back sides of the gaming board are respectively provided with passage portions, not only the passage on the front side but also the back side may be biased.

  The second passage portion and the third passage portion may have the same or different passage lengths. The second and third passage portions may have a portion formed of game nails connected in a width in which the game balls can not pass.

  The passage may be provided with a guide (for example, a rib) for guiding or guiding the gaming ball (for example, FIG. 38).

  The opening of the second passage may have a higher probability that game balls enter than the opening of the third passage. A rib may be provided adjacent to the opening. The ribs may be outside or inside the passageway.

  The opening of the second passage may be different from the opening of the third passage in the vertical direction. The openings of the second passage may be respectively provided on the side portions spaced apart in the left and right. The openings of the third passage may be respectively provided on the left and right side portions. A game ball coming out of the second opening may enter the third opening.

  At least one of the second and third detection means may be on the back side of the gaming board. At least one of the second and third detection means may be on the front side of the gaming board.

  The distribution unit may distribute game balls alternately to the second passage portion and the third passage portion. The passage means may be one in which game balls are alternately detected by the second and third detection means.

  The distributing unit may continuously distribute game balls to the same passage unit.

  The jackpot with the second special symbol may have more benefits to the player than the jackpot with the first special symbol. The jackpot with the first special symbol may have more benefits to the player than the jackpot with the second special symbol. In the second detection means, the normal symbol may be varied by the detection. The symbol may be changed normally by the detection of the third detection means.

  The distribution unit may distribute game balls to two passage units. The distributing unit may distribute game balls to three passage units.

Embodiment B
<Overall configuration>
The entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball firing handle 134 for launching to the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of various rendering devices by the operation of the player, and a chance button for emitting the chance button 136 Lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button 142 for instructing to return the player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 40 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 39 viewed from the back side.

  At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 41 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  A display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124. The display area of the display device 208 includes a display area R1 in which the first display can be performed. The display area R1 may be the entire display area of the display device 208, but is a partial area in the present embodiment. In the case of the present embodiment, the first display includes the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  In the lower right area of the game board 200, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, and a first special symbol holding lamp 218 The second special symbol hold lamp 220 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the display device 208 is configured of a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). Display area R1 is divided into four display areas of left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, right symbol display area 208c and effect display area 208d, and left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b and right symbol The display area 208c can display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d can display an image used for effect.

  Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the display device 208, it is not necessary to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device 7 Other display devices including a segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and is formed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are formed of, for example, 7-segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In the game area 124, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting openings 231 and 232, and a variable winning opening 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the first special view start opening 230 and the second special view start opening 231 are provided in the start opening unit U1. As in the passage structure described in the embodiment A, the starting opening unit U1 constitutes a passage unit that distributes the game balls entering from the upper part to the first special view starting opening 230 or the second special drawing starting opening 231.

  Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are provided in the variable winning opening unit U2.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper tray 126. While discharging, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special view start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the common view start port 228. The second special figure starting port 232 has a wing member 232a which can be opened and closed on the right, and while the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and it is won a common drawing variation game, a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is hit and stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times.

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of a ball into the second special view starting port 231 or 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls are used as prize balls on the upper tray 126. While discharging, the special figure fluctuation game by the 2nd special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view starting opening 231 or 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 has a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. A ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 235 is also provided with an openable / closable mechanism, and it is impossible to enter the ball during closing, and for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) and closed. This may result in a V prize.

  Further, in the game area 124, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction conversion members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, any winning opening or starting is made. After guiding the ball that did not win in the mouth to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out port 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (1st special view start opening 230, 2nd special view start opening 231, 232) or do not win any winning opening or start opening, or only pass the common view start opening 228 To reach the out port 240.

  The game board 200 is also provided with movable bodies 1 to 3 for effect. The movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are located above the display area R1 at their initial positions, and the movable body 3 is located below the display area R1 at the initial position. In the initial position, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are disposed overlapping in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1 is located on the front side, and the movable body 2 is located on the rear side. The cover 203 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 3. When in the initial position, only the upper portion of the movable body 3 is exposed from the cover 203, and the portions other than the upper portion are covered by the cover 203 etc. . Therefore, when in the initial position, it is difficult to view other than the upper part of the movable body 3 in comparison with the upper part, and when the cover 203 is made of a non-translucent member, parts other than the upper part become invisible. . On the other hand, when the movable body 3 is made to emit light, the light emission of the portion covered by the cover 203 can also be made visible by configuring the cover 203 with a translucent member, and the movable body 3 is a cover It may be possible to suggest to the player that he is hiding in 203.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 also uses a counter circuit 318 (two in this circuit) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes its value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316 is received. And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a bottom dishing sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a device, for example, the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, for example, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of figure display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common view holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high certainty lamp Drive circuit 330 for display control of 222 etc.), various movable members 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view start port 232, the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234, etc. A drive circuit 334 for control is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won in the second special view start opening 232, the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special view start opening 231, 232 is The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special view start port 231, 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a chance button 136 Based on the signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing, the sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 A work area of the VRAM 436 is used to connect to a VDP 434 (video display processor) that generates a display image and displays the image on the display device 208.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of various actuators 224 such as motors provided in the movable bodies 1 to 3 and the like, and position detection sensors provided on the movable bodies 1 to 3 etc. The sensor circuit 518 outputs detection signals from various sensors 424 to the basic circuit 502, the game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and the game stand frame lamp 542 are controlled. By connecting a lamp drive circuit 540 for game stand frame and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication between the lamp drive circuit 530 for game board and the lamp drive circuit 540 for game stand frame. There is.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of symbol>
Next, using FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop displaying. The types of figures and figures will be described. FIG. 43 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, the ball enters the 2nd special drawing starting opening 231, 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects that it is done. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do.

  These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2.

  Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display, and a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop view pattern of the special view 1 or 2 The display is called symbol fluctuation stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 43 (a), ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 43 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, after the end of the 15R special jackpot game and after the end of the 15R jackpot game, both transition to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is a 15R special jackpot symbol is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state, and "special figure B" which is a 15R big hit symbol is a special figure low probability common figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability variation, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a 1st small hitting design, "special figure H" is a 2nd small hitting design, and all are special figure low probability common figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same thing as a 2R hourless short jackpot. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the display device 208 are different between the two, and even in the same state, the "special figure G" By adding "special drawing H" and "special drawing F", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

  FIG. 43 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the display device 208 are detected on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that the ball enters the second special view start port 232. In each of the symbol display areas, the display is switched in the order of "decorative 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → ... Perform "variation display of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R jackpot of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R jackpot corresponding to 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". When informing 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") where the same odd decorative pattern is lined three To stop.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called "special figure E" hidden probability variation, the 2R jackpot called "special figure F" sudden normal, or the first small hit for "special figure G" or "special figure H" In the case of notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of notifying 2R jackpot called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R jackpot called sudden time reduction of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 41 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.43 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A", which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B", which is a disconnected design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 43 (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 44 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step SA01, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step SA03, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step SA05, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step SA03, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. Go to SA07. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step SA03, and step SA05 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step SA07, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step SA09, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step SA13).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step SA13 to initialize the basic circuit 302.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step SA13 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal).

  Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step SA11 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step SA13 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step SA13.

  In step SA11, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state.

  That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step SA15) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. At step SA11, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step SA13, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command representing that the initialization process (step SA13) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in step SB33 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step SA15, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step SB07 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step SA15 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  At step SB01, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step SB03, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not detected) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (this processing does not detect an abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  At step SB05, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor.

  Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step SB05, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 42, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step SB05, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal present) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234 or 235, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 231 or 232, or It is determined that the drawing start port 228 has been passed. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228 have been won. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps SB07 and SB09, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step SA15 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated.

  For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it.

  In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  At step SB11, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  At step SB13, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step SB15, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 231, 232, 228 are winning, the winning balls provided in RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening are provided. The value of the number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step SB17, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the first special view starting opening 230, the second special view starting opening 231, 232, the common drawing starting opening 228 and the variable winning openings 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step SB03. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area.

  If there is a winning on the second special view starting port 231, 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 2 winning value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. While obtaining as a random number value, a value is obtained as a special figure 2 random number value from a random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in a corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there are winnings on the variable winning openings 234 and 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is stored in the respective winning storage areas for the variable winning openings.

  In step SB19, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step SB21, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 43 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 43 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the ordinary drawing state update processing in the case where the ordinary drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB23 without doing anything.

  In step SB23, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB25). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Also, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first lost flag, a second lost flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 43 (a), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Probability fluctuation flag is off, If the probability fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hitting flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the special segment I and the second outlier flag are on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so that the respective special symbol I is configured, In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed.

  By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), 15R jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the final display of any one symbol of the first out-of-pattern (special image J) is performed. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In order to set a special game 2 in action in the setting area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period for displaying an image notifying a player that the display device 208 starts a big hit. Information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, the effect waiting time period is indicated in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the display device 208 is ended. Set the information.

  In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on.

  The term "time-saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the jackpot game, a number of games in the second special view starting slot 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step SB33) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step SB27 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step SB27). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step SB25 and step SB27 is completed, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step SB29), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step SB31).

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the second special view starting port 231, 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step SB33, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 231, 232, variable winning opening 234, 235 Including the presence or absence of winning a prize.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set.

  In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the value of the special drawing probability fluctuation flag, The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are kept is set. In the end effect setting transmission process described above, command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, the value of the special view probability fluctuation flag, The information which shows the number of the 1st special figure fluctuation game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation game etc which are kept is set.

  In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step SB33, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  At step SB35, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step SB37, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step SB05 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step SB19) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step SB39, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step SB43, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB41.

  At step SB41, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved at step SB01 are set in the original registers, and interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 44 is performed. Return to

  On the other hand, in step SB43, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power interruption upon power recovery is saved as return data to a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power interruption processing such as initialization of input / output port is performed. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>
The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of strobe interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SC01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in SC01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step SC03, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05.

  In step SC05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. At step SC07, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300. At step SC09, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in SC07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SC11, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step SC09 to effect data according to pressing of the chance button. In step SC13, when there is an instruction to VDP 434 among the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step SC15, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step SC17, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step SC19, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in SC09, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step SC21, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in SC09, the setting to output this control command is performed, and the process returns to SC03.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. At step SD01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SE01 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step SC03 in the first sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SC03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step SE03 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step SC19, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step SC13 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  At step SF01, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step SF03, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF05, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step SF05, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step SF01, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step SF07, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step SF09, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step SF11, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step SF11, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>
The process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step SG01 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in SG01. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step SG03, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SG05.

  In step SG05, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step SG07, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. At step SG09, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in the SG07, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step SG11, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step SG13, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to SG03.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. At step SH01 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of

  In step SI01 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step SG03 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step SG03, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step SI03 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, update processing or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

<Demonstration equipment>
The configuration of the rendering device, in particular, the configurations of the movable body 1 to the movable body 3 and the moving mechanism thereof will be described. First, the entire configuration of the game board 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 is a perspective view of the game board 200, FIG. 49 is a rear view of the game board 200, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 200.

  The game board 200 includes a front unit 201A, a game board 201B and a rear unit 201C stacked in order from the front side in the depth direction.

  The front unit 201A is a unit constituting the game area 124 and the like, and includes a winning opening, a starting opening unit U1, a variable winning opening unit U2, rails, display devices of symbols, nails, etc. The gaming board 201B is It is a plate-like support member for supporting the front unit 201A.

  The game board 201B is formed of, for example, a transparent resin board or a wooden board, and an opening for exposing the rendering device behind is formed in the central part thereof. At the lower side of the opening, the cover 203 has a projecting portion 203a that protrudes to the front side, and restricts the game ball flowing down the game area 124 from bouncing back and forth from the opening of the game board 201B. ing.

  FIG. 51 is a partially exploded back view of the game board 200, mainly showing a configuration provided on the back side of the game board 201B. Ball passage units RT1 to RT3 are formed on the back of the game board 201B. The ball passage unit RT1 is a passage for discharging game balls from the game area 124 that have won a plurality of general winning openings 226 located on the left side of the game area 124, and the ball passage unit RT2 It is a passage for discharging the winning game balls from the game area 124, and the ball passage unit RT3 is a passage for discharging the winning game balls from the game area 124 to the general winning opening 226 provided in the variable winning hole unit U2. is there.

  The upper walls 201c and 201d of the ball passage units RT1 and RT2 are inclined toward the out port 240, and the gaming balls which get over the projecting portion 203a and enter the back side of the gaming board 201B are the upper walls 201c and 201d. Guides around the back of the outlet 240 to facilitate discharge.

  A plurality of holes 201a for fixing a part of the configuration of the front unit 201A with screws are formed in the game board 201B, and a screw is inserted through the holes 201a to fix a part of the configuration of the front unit 201A. . An annular rib 201b is formed around a part of the holes 201a. The rib 201b is a part of which is an inclined wall for guiding the screw into the hole 201a, which makes it easy to align the screw with the hole 201a. In addition, although the rib 201b is a part of a vertical wall, it may be an inclined wall over the entire circumference.

  The rear unit 201C will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50 and 52. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 201C. The rear unit 201C is a unit mainly provided with a rendering device, and is a rectangular frame body having an opening at the center, and a rectangular frame body fixed to the back of the support member 7A and having an opening at the center. And a supporting member 7B.

  The movable body 1 is supported by the support member 7A via the moving mechanism 4. The movement mode of the movable body 1 may be any of vertical, horizontal, diagonal, rotation, and rotation, but in the case of this embodiment, the movement mechanism 4 is an elevating mechanism for moving the movable body 1 up and down. is there. The moving mechanism 4 includes a drive mechanism 4A supported on the left side of the opening of the support member 7A and a guide mechanism (follower mechanism) 4B supported on the right side. The drive mechanism 4A and the guide mechanism 4B are separated in the left-right direction. Extend parallel to one another in the vertical direction. The movable body 1 is bridged between these mechanisms 4A and 4B. A decoration unit 8A is disposed on the front side of the drive mechanism 4A, and a decoration unit 8B is disposed on the front side of the guide mechanism 4B. The decoration units 8A and 8B perform effects by light.

  The movable body 3 is also supported by the support member 7A via the moving mechanism 6. The movement mode of the movable body 3 may be any of vertical, horizontal, oblique, rotation, and rotation, but in the case of the present embodiment, the movement mechanism 6 is an elevating mechanism for moving the movable body 3 up and down. is there. The moving mechanism 6 is supported below the opening of the support member 7A.

  The movable body 2 is supported by the support member 7B via the moving mechanism 5. The movement mode of the movable body 2 may be any of vertical, horizontal, diagonal, rotation, and rotation, but in the case of this embodiment, the movement mechanism 5 is an elevating mechanism for moving the movable body 2 up and down. is there. The moving mechanism 5 includes a drive mechanism 5A supported on the left side of the opening of the support member 7B and a guide mechanism (follower mechanism) 5B supported on the right side. The drive mechanism 5A and the guide mechanism 5B are separated in the left-right direction. Extend parallel to one another in the vertical direction. The movable body 2 is bridged between these mechanisms 5A and 5B.

  With such a configuration, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are disposed to be offset in the depth direction, and are arranged to be able to overlap each other in the depth direction. In this case, it may be easy to secure the movable space of each movable body.

  The moving mechanism 4 and the moving mechanism 5 have the same configuration in the case of this embodiment, and the drive mechanism 5A is behind the drive mechanism 4A and the guide mechanism 5B is behind the guide mechanism 4B in the depth direction. It is located as. With such a configuration, the moving mechanism 4 and the moving mechanism 5 may be able to adopt exactly the same mechanism. On the other hand, since the drive mechanisms 4A and 5A are mechanisms including a motor or the like as described later, the thickness in the depth direction may be thick. Therefore, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the guide mechanism 5B is located behind the drive mechanism 4A and the drive mechanism 5B is located behind the guide mechanism 4B so as to overlap in the depth direction. In some cases, the installation space can be made thinner in the depth direction.

  The display device 208 is fixed to the back surface of the support member 7B, and the substrate case unit 7C is further fixed. The substrate case unit 7C can accommodate the substrates related to the moving mechanisms 4 and 5, the decoration units 8A and 8B, the display device 208, and other substrates.

  With the above configuration, the display area of the display device 208 is disposed behind the movable bodies 1 to 3. The movable bodies 1 to 3 and the display area of the display device 208 may always overlap in the depth direction, but the movable bodies 1 to 3 are movable to positions overlapping the display area of the display device 208 in the depth direction Conversely, at least some of the movable bodies 1 to 3 may be arranged so as not to overlap with the display area of the display device 208 in the depth direction at all times.

<Movement Mechanism 4, Movable Body 1 and Decoration Unit 8A, 8B>
The moving mechanism 4, the movable body 1 and the decoration units 8A and 8B will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54 are exploded perspective views of the moving mechanism 4. FIG. 55 is a detail view of part of the drive mechanism 4A. FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 1.

<Movement mechanism 4>
The drive mechanism 4A of the moving mechanism 4 is fixed to the left side of the support member 7A, and the guide mechanism 4B is fixed to the right side of the support member 7A. The decorative member 70 is fixed to the upper side of the support member 7A.

  The driving mechanism 4A is a mechanism that generates a driving force for moving the movable body 1 up and down, and various driving force transmission mechanisms such as a belt transmission mechanism and a ball screw mechanism can be adopted. In this case, a rack-pinion mechanism using a motor 43A as a drive source is employed.

  The drive mechanism 4A includes a base 40A and a cover 40B. The base 40A is a cover for covering the mechanism disposed in the space between the base 40A and the cover 40B from the rear side, and the cover 40B is a cover for covering from the front. The motor 43A is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the back of the base 40A. The output shaft of the motor 43A passes through the base 40A and is fixed to the gear 41B disposed in the space between the base 40A and the cover 40B. The gear 41B meshes with a gear 41A rotatably supported by the base 40A and the cover 40B, and the gear 41A meshes with a gear 41C rotatably supported by the base 40A and the cover 40B.

  The gears 41A to 41C are all spur gears, but the gear 41C has a toothless portion 41a in which a part of the tooth portion on the periphery is missing, and on its side surface, it protrudes parallel to the rotation axis direction It has an engaging portion 41b. The gear 41C meshes with the rack portion 44a of the movable member 44A. The movable member 44A is supported slidably in the vertical direction by a slide rail 44B extending in the vertical direction. The slide rail 44B includes a fixed rail 44e fixed to the base portion 40A, an intermediate rail 44d slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the fixed rail 44e, and a movable rail 44c slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the intermediate rail 44d. The movable member 44A is supported by the movable rail 44c.

  The rack portions 44a of the movable member 44A are arranged in the vertical direction, and move in the vertical direction by the rotation of the gear 41C by the drive of the motor 43A. In FIG. 55, when the gear 41C rotates in the direction of arrow d1 (counterclockwise), the movable member 44A rises, and when the gear 41C rotates in the direction of arrow d2 (clockwise), the movable member 44A descends. The left end portion of the movable body 1 is supported by the movable member 44A via the bracket 44b, and the movable body 1 basically operates in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 41C. As shown in FIG. 55, when the rack portion 44a and the toothless portion 41a face each other, the drive transmission between the movable member 44A and the gear 41C is interrupted, and the movable member 44A is in a free fallable state. The free fall of the movable member 44A means the free fall of the movable body 1, and in this case, the movable body 1 operates without being interlocked with the rotation of the gear 41C. A shock absorbing material 44f is disposed under the base portion 40A to define the lower limit of the free fall of the movable member 44A (that is, the lower limit of the free fall of the movable body 1), and the shock at the time of the fall is alleviated.

  The base portion 40A also supports sensors 43B and 43C that detect the position of the movable body 1. The sensors 43B and 43C may be any sensor, but in the case of the present embodiment, they are optical sensors (photo interrupters) that detect the detection piece 44g provided on the movable member 44A. The sensor 43B and the sensor 43C are disposed vertically separated from each other, the sensor 43B detects whether or not the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position, and the sensor 43C determines that the movable body 1 is at the lower limit position It is detected whether or not it is located at the position). The harness 43a is a wiring such as the sensors 43B and 43C.

  The base portion 40A also includes a restriction unit 42 capable of restricting the operation of the movable body 1. The regulating operation may be any operation, but in the case of the present embodiment, the regulating unit 42 can regulate the lowering (downward operation) of the movable body 1. The descent of the movable body 1 can also be regulated by the motor 43A, but in the present embodiment, by providing the regulation unit 42 separately from the motor 43A, the descent of the movable body 1 can be performed with power saving by deenergizing the motor 43A. It is possible to regulate.

  The restriction unit 42 includes an actuator 42A as a drive source. The actuator 42A may be a motor, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is a solenoid, in particular a pull solenoid, and raises the plunger 42a at the time of energization (excitation state). The plunger 42a is provided with a return spring 42D for always biasing the plunger 42a downward.

  The control unit 42 also includes a control member 42C. The restricting member 42C is rotatably supported by the base portion 40A and the cover portion 40B via the shaft 42c, and includes a restricting portion 42d capable of engaging with the engaging portion 41b of the gear 41C. At the lower end of the plunger 42a, an operation member 42B connected to the regulating member 42C via a pin 42b is attached. The pin 42b is loosely fitted to the regulating member 42C. The vertical movement of the plunger 42a moves the operation member 42B up and down, thereby pivoting the restriction member 42c around the shaft 42c.

  The regulation operation will be described with reference to FIG. When the actuator 42A is not energized (non-excitation state), the regulating member 42C is positioned at the regulating position by the biasing of the return spring 42D. The restricting position is a position where the restricting portion 42d of the restricting member 42C can engage with the engaging portion 41b of the gear 41C.

  When the gear 41C rotates in the direction of the arrow d2, the rotation of the gear 41C is restricted by the engagement between the restricting portion 42d and the engaging portion 41b. At the time of regulation, the reaction force input from the engagement portion 41b to the regulation portion 42d is generally an upward reaction force passing through the shaft 42c, so that rotation regulation of the gear 41C is possible only with the biasing force of the return spring 42D. It is. Thus, the operating range of the gear 41C is restricted. The gear 41C is restricted in rotation as shown by the arrow d2, but this direction of rotation is the direction of rotation for lowering the movable body 1, and hence the lowering of the movable body 1 can be regulated by the regulating unit 42. In the case of this embodiment, the descent of the movable body 1 can be regulated at the initial position by the regulation unit 42. That is, it is possible to maintain the movable body 1 at the initial position without energizing the motor 43A.

  When the gear 41C rotates in the direction of the arrow d1, the engaging portion 41b abuts on the side portion SD of the regulating member 42C. Since this contact direction is circumferential with respect to the shaft 42c, the restricting member 42C rotates in the direction of the arrow d3 against the biasing force of the return spring 42D and is positioned at the unrestricted position (release position), The rotation of the gear 41C in the direction of the arrow d1 is not restricted. This rotation direction is the rotation direction for raising the movable body 1, and therefore, when the motor 43A is driven to raise the movable body 1 from the initial position, the operation of the movable body 1 is not restricted by the restriction unit 42.

  Next, the restriction release operation will be described. When the actuator 42A is energized (excited state) when the restricting member 42C is located at the restricting position, the plunger 42a is pulled up, whereby the operating member 42B is pulled up against the biasing force of the return spring 42D. Therefore, the restricting member 42C pivots in the direction of the arrow d3 and is positioned at the non-restricting position (release position). By the regulation member 42C pivoting in the direction of the arrow d3, the engagement between the engagement portion 41b and the regulation portion 42d is released, the rotation regulation of the gear 41C is released, and the drop regulation of the movable body 1 is released. . For this reason, the movable body 1 can be lowered by rotating the gear 41C in the direction of the arrow d2 by driving of the motor 43A.

  The operation member 42B is provided with an operation portion 42e that protrudes to the back side. The operation portion 42e is disposed to be operable from the back of the base portion 40A through the opening 40a formed in the base portion 40A. Therefore, a store clerk or the like in the hall can manually move the operation unit 42 e in the vertical direction at the time of maintenance or inspection, and thereby can move the regulating member 42 C to the non-regulating position.

  The descent of the movable body 1 can be selected from descent due to driving of the motor 43A and free fall utilizing the toothless portion 41a. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 1 is positioned at the maximum elevation position where the movable body 1 is lifted by a fixed amount from the initial position, the positional relationship in which the toothless portion 41a and the rack portion 44a face each other is obtained. Fall down. Since the descent mode of the movable body 1 can be selected from descent due to control and descent due to free fall, it may be possible to diversify the effects.

  Next, the guide mechanism 4B will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The guide mechanism 4B is a mechanism that supports the right end portion of the movable body 1 and guides the vertical movement of the movable body 1 following the drive mechanism 4A.

  The drive mechanism 4B includes a base 45A and a cover 45B. The base 45A is a cover that covers the mechanism disposed in the space between the base 45A and the cover 45B from the rear side, and the cover 45B is a cover that covers the front from the front.

  In the base portion 45A, grooves 45b for supporting the shaft 46B are formed in two places vertically separated from each other, and the shaft 46B is disposed with the axial direction as the vertical direction. The base 45A also has a recess 45a that forms a space for moving the movable member 46A. The same groove or recess as the groove 45b or the recess 45a is also formed in the cover portion 45B.

  The movable member 46A includes a base portion 46a and a cover portion 46b, and two roller pairs 46d are rotatably supported in the inner space thereof. The roller pair 46d is disposed to sandwich the shaft 46B, and the movable member 46A slides in the vertical direction by the guide of the shaft 46B.

  The right end portion of the movable body 1 is supported by the movable member 46A via a bracket 46c, and the movable member 46A moves following the operation of the movable body 1 by the drive mechanism 4A. A shock absorbing material 46e is disposed at the lower end of the recess 45a, which defines the lower limit of free fall of the movable member 46A (that is, the lower limit of free fall of the movable body 1), and the impact at the time of fall is alleviated.

<Decoration unit 8A, 8B>
Decoration unit 8A, 8B is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. These may make it difficult to see the moving mechanism 4 and may be able to boost the game.

  The decoration unit 8A is provided with decoration parts 80a and 80b fixed to the cover part 40B and a substrate 80e as a structure located on the front side of the drive mechanism 4A. A plurality of light emitting elements 80 f (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 80 e. The substrate 80e is covered by a lens member 80d, and the lens member 80d is further covered by a cover body 80c. The lens member 80d and the cover body 80c have translucency.

  The decoration unit 8A also includes a lens member 81a fixed to the base portion 40A and a substrate 81b supported by the lens member 81a, as a configuration located on the right side of the drive mechanism 4A. A plurality of light emitting elements 81 c (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 81 b and covered with a lens member 81 a. The lens member 81a has translucency.

  By driving the light emitting elements 80f and 81c, it may be possible to boost the game. Since the light emitting elements 80 f and 81 c are arranged in the vertical direction, the effect of emphasizing the movement of the movable body 1 by controlling the lighting and extinguishing of the light emitting elements 80 f and 81 c in accordance with the vertical movement of the movable body 1 May be able to

  Although the decoration unit 8B has a configuration similar to that of the decoration unit 8A (a structure corresponding to the decoration parts 80a and 80b, the substrate 80e, the lens member 80, and the cover body 80c) as the structure located on the front side of the guide mechanism 4B. Illustration is omitted.

  The decoration unit 8B also includes a lens member 82a fixed to the base portion 45A and a substrate 82b supported by the lens member 82a, as a configuration located on the left side of the guide mechanism 4B. A plurality of light emitting elements (not shown, for example, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 82b and covered with a lens member 82a. The lens member 82a has translucency. The wiring unit 82c is connected to the substrate 82b.

<Movable body 1>
The movable body 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 1 is a deformable movable unit whose outer shape is deformed. The movable body 1 includes a base portion 10, movable portions 11, 12, 14 and a structure 16. The base portion 10 is a member extending in the left-right direction, the drive mechanism 4A is connected to the left end portion thereof, and the guide mechanism 4B is connected to the right end portion thereof.

  The movable portions 11, 12, 14 are provided displaceably with respect to the base portion 10, and they may be provided with their own drive sources, but in the present embodiment, a single motor 15a is used as a drive source. The movable portions 11, 12, 14 can be displaced in conjunction with each other, and the number of drive sources may be reduced.

  Gears 15 e to 15 h (spur gears) for transmitting the driving force of the motor 15 a to the movable portions 11 and 12 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the base portion 10. Gear 15e meshes with gears 15f and 15h. The gear 15h meshes with the gear 15g. Further, on the back surface of the base portion 10, a relay substrate 17a, a cover 17b for covering the back thereof, a harness cover 17d for covering a harness 17c which is a wiring of the motor 15a or the like are provided.

  A support portion 10 a rotatably supporting the movable portion 11 and a support portion 10 b rotatably supporting the movable portion 12 are provided. The support portions 10a and 10b are circular recesses with the pivot shafts 10a 'and 10b' fixed at their centers, and a part of the peripheral wall is cut out. A part of the gear 15f enters the support 10a through the notch of the peripheral wall of the support 10a, and a part of the gear 15g enters the support 10b through the notch of the peripheral wall of the support 10b. It is entering.

  The movable portion 11 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 11a, a substrate 11c, a lens member 11e, and a cover body 11f. A spur gear-like gear portion 11b is integrally formed on the base portion 11a. The pivot shaft 10a 'is inserted into the central hole of the gear portion 11b, and the gear portion 11b is accommodated in the support portion 10a. Ru. The gear portion 11b disposed in the support portion 10a meshes with the gear 15f. A plurality of light emitting elements 11 d (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 11 c. The plurality of light emitting elements 11 d are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 11. The lens member 11e covers the substrate 11c, and the cover 11f covers the lens member 11e. The lens member 11 e and the cover 11 f have translucency, but may have a non-transmissive portion in part.

  The movable portion 12 has a shape that is symmetrical to the movable portion 11 and is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating the base portion 12a, the substrate 12c, the lens member 12e, and the cover body 12f. It is done. A spur gear-like gear portion 12b is integrally formed on the base portion 12a, and the pivot shaft 10b 'is inserted into the central hole of the gear portion 12b, and the gear portion 12b is accommodated in the support portion 10b. Ru. The gear portion 12b disposed in the support portion 10b meshes with the gear 15g. A plurality of light emitting elements 12 d (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 12 c. The plurality of light emitting elements 12 d are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 12. The lens member 12e covers the substrate 12c, and the cover 12f covers the lens member 12e. The lens member 12e and the cover body 12f have translucency, but may have a non-transmissive portion in part.

  The movable portion 14 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 14a, a substrate 14e, a lens member 14g, and a cover body 14h. The substrate 14e is fixed to the back of the base portion 14a, and the lens member 14g has a configuration of two left and right members, and each member covers the substrate 14e. The cover body 14h is fixed to the front side of the base portion 14a, and covers the lower portion of the base portion 14a and the lens member 14g. A plurality of light emitting elements 14 f (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 14 e. The plurality of light emitting elements 14 f are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the movable portion 14. The lens member 14g and the cover body 14h have translucency, but may have a non-transmissive portion in part.

  The structure 16 includes a front side base portion 16A and a rear side base portion 16E. The front base portion 16A is fixed to the base portion 10, and the structure 16 is supported by the base portion 10.

  The base portion 14a of the movable portion 14 is provided with a vertically extending pillar portion 14b, and the pillar portion 14b is vertically movably supported so as to be sandwiched between the front side base portion 16A and the rear side base portion 16E. Ru. Specifically, the front side base portion 16A is formed with a groove 16a extending in the vertical direction in which the column portion 14b slides, and the rear side base portion 16E is in contact with the rear surface of the column portion 14b at a position facing the groove 16a. It has a contact portion 16c.

  A rack portion 14c is formed vertically on the side portion of the column portion 14b, and a detection piece 14d is formed on the upper portion of the column portion 14b. A sensor 18 for detecting the position of the movable portion 14 is attached to the rear base portion 16E. The sensor 18 may be any sensor, but in the case of this embodiment, it is an optical sensor (photo interrupter) that detects the detection piece 14 d, and detects whether the movable portion 14 is positioned at the initial position.

  A motor 15a is fixed to the back of the front side base portion 16A. Motor 15a is, for example, a stepping motor. The output shaft of the motor 15a passes through the front side base portion 16A and is fixed to the gear 15b located on the front side of the front stream base portion 16A. Gears 15c and 15d which are spur gears are rotatably supported by the front base portion 16A, the gear 15b meshes with the gear 15d, and the gear 15d meshes with the gear 15c. The front base portion 16A has a notch that exposes a part of the gear 15c to the back, and the gear 15c engages with the rack portion 14c of the column portion 15b. Therefore, when the motor 15a is driven, the driving force is transmitted to the rack portion 14c via the gears 15b, 15d, and 15c to operate the movable portion 14.

  The shaft 15d is also fixed to the gear 15c. The shaft 15d is rotatably supported by the front base portion 16A, and is fixed to the gear 15e through the rear base portion 16B and the base portion 10. Therefore, the gear 15c and the gear 15e rotate integrally. Therefore, when the motor 15a is driven, the driving force is also transmitted to the gear 15e through the gears 15b, 15d, and 15c, and further transmitted to the gear portions 11b and 12b through the gears 15f to 15h, and the movable portion 11 and Operate 12 Thus, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 operate in conjunction with the single motor 15a as a drive source. The movable parts 11 and 12 are located at the same position in the depth direction, and the movable part 14 is located at a position (front side position) offset from the movable parts 11 and 12 in the depth direction. In operation, the movable parts 11 and 12 do not overlap each other in the depth direction, but the movable parts 11 and 12 and the movable part 14 may overlap in the depth direction.

  The structure 16 also includes a substrate 16B, a lens member 16C, and a cover 16D. A plurality of light emitting elements 16 b (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 16 B. The plurality of light emitting elements 16 b are arranged in a plane, and the entire structure 16 can emit light. The lens member 16C covers the substrate 16B, and the cover 16D covers the lens member 16C. The cover 16D can be provided with a decorative shape, pattern, or color, and in the case of the present embodiment, an eyeball-like shape is provided as shown in FIG.

<Movement mechanism 5 and movable body 2>
The moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 2.

<Movement mechanism 5>
The moving mechanism 5 has the same configuration as that of the moving mechanism 4 although the shape and the like are partially different, and will be briefly described. The configuration of the moving mechanism 5 corresponding to the configuration of the moving mechanism 4 replaces the head 4 with 5 and attaches the same reference numerals. The matters described for the moving mechanism 4 can be appropriately applied to the moving mechanism 5. The drive mechanism 5A of the moving mechanism 5 is fixed to the left side of the support member 7B, and the guide mechanism 5B is fixed to the right side of the support member 7B.

  The drive mechanism 5A is a mechanism that generates a drive force for moving the movable body 2 up and down. The drive mechanism 5A includes a base 50A and a cover (not shown). The base portion 50A is a cover body that covers from the rear side a mechanism disposed in the space between the base portion 50A and a cover portion (not shown), and the cover portion corresponds to the cover portion 40B of the moving mechanism 4 It is a cover body which covers from. The motor 53A is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the back of the base portion 50A. The output shaft of the motor 53A passes through the base portion 50A and is fixed to the gear 51B disposed in the space between the base portion 50A and the cover portion. The gear 51B meshes with the gear 51A, and the gear 51A meshes with the gear 51C.

  The gear 51C has a toothless portion 51a in which a part of the peripheral tooth portion is missing, and an engaging portion 51b projecting in parallel with the rotation axis direction on the side surface. The gear 51C meshes with the rack portion 54a of the movable member 54A. The movable member 54A is slidably supported by the slide rail 54B in the vertical direction. The slide rail 54B includes a fixed rail 54e, an intermediate rail 54d, and a movable rail 54c, and the movable member 54A is supported by the movable rail 54c.

  The racks 54a of the movable member 54A are arranged in the vertical direction, and move in the vertical direction by the rotation of the gear 51C by the drive of the motor 53A. When the gear 51C rotates counterclockwise, the movable member 54A ascends, and when the gear 51C rotates clockwise, the movable member 54A descends. The left end portion of the movable body 2 is supported by the movable member 54A via the bracket 54b, and the movable body 2 basically operates in conjunction with the rotation of the gear 51C. When the rack portion 54a and the toothless portion 51a face each other, the drive transmission between the movable member 54A and the gear 51C is interrupted, and the movable member 54A is in a free state capable of free fall. The free fall of the movable member 54A means the free fall of the movable body 2, and in this case, the movable body 2 operates without being interlocked with the rotation of the gear 51C. A shock absorbing material 54f is disposed under the base portion 50A, which defines the lower limit of the free fall of the movable member 54A (that is, the lower limit of the free fall of the movable body 2) and mitigates the impact upon the fall.

  The base portion 50A also supports sensors 53B and 53C that detect the position of the movable body 2. The sensors 53B and 53C are optical sensors (photo interrupters) that detect a detection piece 54g provided on the movable member 54A. The sensor 53B and the sensor 53C are disposed vertically separated from each other, and the sensor 53B detects whether or not the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position, and the sensor 53C determines that the movable body 1 is at the lower limit position It is detected whether or not it is located at the position).

  The base unit 50A also includes a restriction unit 52 capable of restricting the operation of the movable body 2. In the case of this embodiment, the lowering (downward movement) of the movable body 2 can be restricted by the restriction unit 52. The descent of the movable body 2 can also be regulated by the motor 53A, but in the present embodiment, by providing the restriction unit 52 separately from the motor 53A, the descent of the movable body 2 can be performed with power saving by deenergizing the motor 53A. It is possible to regulate.

  The restriction unit 52 includes an actuator 52A as a drive source, and in the case of the present embodiment, the actuator 52A is a solenoid, particularly a pull solenoid, and raises the plunger 52a when energized (excited state). The plunger 52a is provided with a return spring 52D for always biasing the plunger 52a downward.

  The control unit 52 also includes a control member 52C. The restricting member 52C is rotatably supported by the base portion 50 and the cover portion via the shaft 52c, and includes a restricting portion 52d engageable with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. At the lower end of the plunger 52a, an operation member 52B connected to the regulating member 52C via a pin 52b is attached. The pin 52b is loosely fitted to the regulating member 52C. By vertically moving the plunger 52a, the operation member 52B moves up and down, whereby the restricting member 52c pivots around the shaft 52c.

  When the actuator 52A is not energized (non-excitation state), the regulating member 52C is positioned at the regulating position by the biasing of the return spring 52D, and the regulating portion 52d of the regulating member 52C engages with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. It is possible.

  When the gear 51C rotates clockwise, the rotation of the gear 51C is restricted by the engagement between the restricting part 52d and the engaging part 51b, and the descent of the movable body 2 can be restricted at the initial position. That is, it is possible to maintain the movable body 2 in the initial position without energizing the motor 53A.

  When the gear 51C rotates counterclockwise, the engaging portion 51b abuts on the side portion of the restricting member 52C, and the restricting member 52C rotates and is positioned at the non-restricting position (release position). Do not regulate the rotation around. Therefore, when the motor 53A is driven to raise the movable body 2 from the initial position, the operation of the movable body 2 is not restricted by the restriction unit 52.

  When the restricting member 52C is located at the restricting position, when the actuator 52A is energized (excited state), the plunger 52a is pulled up and the restricting member 52C is rotated, so that the engaging portion 51b and the restricting portion 52d The engagement is released. For this reason, the movable body 2 can be lowered by rotating the gear 51C clockwise by the drive of the motor 53A.

  The operation member 52B is provided with an operation portion 52e that protrudes to the back side. The operation portion 52e is disposed to be operable from the back of the base portion 50A through the opening 50a formed in the base portion 50A. Therefore, a store clerk or the like in the hall can manually move the operation unit 42 e in the vertical direction at the time of maintenance or inspection, and thereby can move the regulating member 52 C to the non-regulating position.

  The descent of the movable body 2 can be selected from descent due to driving of the motor 53A and free fall using the toothless portion 51a. In the case of the present embodiment, when the movable body 2 is positioned at the maximum elevation position where the movable body 2 is lifted by a fixed amount from the initial position, the positional relationship in which the toothless portion 51a and the rack portion 54a face each other becomes free. Fall down.

  Next, the guide mechanism 5B will be described. The guide mechanism 5B is a mechanism that supports the right end portion of the movable body 2 and guides the vertical movement of the movable body 2 following the drive mechanism 5A.

  The drive mechanism 5B includes a base 55A and a cover (not shown). The base 55A is a cover for covering the mechanism disposed in the space between the base 55A and the cover from the rear side, and the cover is a cover for covering from the front.

  Grooves 55b for supporting the shaft 56B are formed on the base 55A so as to be vertically separated from each other at two positions, and the shaft 56B is disposed with the axial direction as the vertical direction. The base 55A also has a recess 55a that forms a space for moving the movable member 56A. The same grooves and recesses as the grooves 55b and the recesses 55a are also formed in the cover portion.

  The movable member 56A includes a base portion 56a and a cover portion 56b, and two roller pairs 56d are rotatably supported in the inner space thereof. The roller pair 56d is disposed to sandwich the shaft 56B, and the movable member 56A slides in the vertical direction by the guide of the shaft 56B.

  The right end portion of the movable body 2 is supported by the movable member 56A via a bracket 56c, and the movable member 56A moves following the operation of the movable body 2 by the drive mechanism 5A. A shock absorbing material 56e is disposed at the lower end portion of the recess 55a to define the lower limit of the free fall of the movable member 56A (that is, the lower limit of the free fall of the movable body 2), and the shock when falling is mitigated.

<Movable body 2>
The movable body 2 is a deformable movable body unit whose outer shape is deformed, and particularly in the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 2 is a deployed movable body unit in which the movable portion changes from the stored state to the deployed state. The movable body 2 includes a cover portion 20A, a base portion 20B, and a pair of movable portions 23. The base portion 20B is a member extending in the left-right direction, the drive mechanism 5A is connected to the left end portion thereof, and the guide mechanism 5B is connected to the right end portion thereof.

  The pair of movable portions 23 is provided displaceably with respect to the base portion 20B, and in the case of the present embodiment, the rotation operation in which the whole of the pair of movable portions 23 rotates and the pair of movable portions 23 expand and store Deployment and storage operations are possible.

  The base portion 20B is a cover body that covers from the front side a mechanism disposed in the space between the base portion 20B and the cover portion 20A, and the cover portion 20A is a cover body that covers from the rear side. The base portion 20B has a circular opening at its center, and the rotation member 21A is rotatably supported by the opening. The cover 20A has an opening concentric with the opening of the base 20B, and the rotary connector 25A is disposed in the opening. The rotary connector 25A is fixed to the back of the cover 20A by the mounting member 25B, and constitutes a slip ring for supplying control signals and electric power to the electrical components supported by the rotary member 21A via the harness 25C. The center of the rotary member of the rotary connector 25A is defined by the shaft 24e.

  The movable body 2 includes a drive mechanism 24 capable of performing the rotation operation of the pair of movable portions 23. The drive mechanism 24 is a gear mechanism provided with a motor 24a as a drive source. Motor 24a is, for example, a stepping motor. The motor 24a is fixed to the back of the cover 20A, and its output shaft passes through the cover 20A and is fixed to the gear 24b in the space between the cover 20A and the base 20B. Gears 24c and 24d are disposed between the cover portion 20A and the base portion 20B. The gear 24b meshes with the gear 24d, and the gear 24d meshes with the gear 24c.

  Tooth portions 21a are formed on the entire circumferential surface of the rotating member 21A, and the hub 21a meshes with the gear 24c. With the above configuration, when the motor 24a is driven, the rotation member 21A can be rotated.

  The sensor unit 27 includes a sensor for detecting the rotational position of the rotating member 21A, and a substrate on which the sensor is mounted, and is supported by the base portion 20B. The sensor unit 27 includes, for example, an optical sensor such as a photo interrupter that detects the detection piece 21b provided on the rotation member 21A, and detects whether the rotation member 21A is positioned at the initial position. The relay substrate 29 is a substrate for relaying various wires, and is supported by the base portion 20B.

  The base portion 21B is fixed to the rotation member 21A, and the base portion 21B rotates integrally with the rotation member 21A. In the base portion 21B, a drive mechanism 26 for the deployment and storage operation of the pair of movable portions 23 is disposed. The drive mechanism 26 is a gear mechanism provided with a motor 26a as a drive source. Motor 26a is, for example, a stepping motor. The motor 26a is fixed at the back of the base portion 21B, and the output shaft of the motor 26a passes through the base portion 21B and the gear 26b is fixed at the front side of the base portion 21B.

  A pivoting member 22A is rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 21B. The pivoting member 22A has a cylindrical bulging portion 22b bulging rearward at the central portion thereof, and the bulging portion 22b enters a circular recess 21e formed on the front side of the base portion 21B. . A tooth (not shown) is formed on the circumferential surface of the bulging portion 22b, and the gear 26b meshes with this tooth.

  At the center of the bulging portion 22b, a shaft portion 22a protruding rearward is formed, and the shaft portion 22a is rotatably supported by a shaft hole 21f provided at the central portion of the base portion 21B. The shaft portion 22a and the shaft hole 21f are located coaxially with the rotation center of the rotating member 21A. By driving the motor 26a, the pivoting member 22A pivots about the shaft 22a as a pivot center via the gear 26b and the teeth of the bulging portion 22b.

  A shaft 24e is fixed to the center of the shaft portion 22a, and a stopper 28B is fixed to the shaft 24e. The stopper 28B is a locking member that holds the base portion 21B between the stopper 28B and the pivoting member 22A, whereby the pivoting member 22A is rotatably fixed to the base portion 21B.

  In the space between the rotation member 21A and the base portion 21B, a sensor 28A is disposed in addition to the motor 26a and the stopper 28B. The sensor 28A is a sensor that detects the rotational position of the rotation member 22A. The sensor 28A may be any sensor, but in the case of this embodiment, it is an optical sensor (photo interrupter) for detecting the detection piece 28a provided on the stopper 28B, and is the pivoting member 22A positioned at the initial position? Whether or not to detect.

  The base portion 21B has a pair of arm portions extending in the opposite direction to the center thereof, and a connecting hole 21c is formed at the end of each arm portion. One end of the link 21D is rotatably connected to the connection hole 21c via the bush 21d.

  The pivoting member 22A has a pair of pivot portions 22c at positions symmetrical with respect to the center thereof. A shaft support member 22D is mounted on the shaft support portion 22c, and the shaft support member 22D is fixed to the movable portion 23, whereby the movable portion 23 is rotatably supported by the rotation member 22A.

  The pivoting member 22A also has a pair of stopper portions 22d formed at symmetrical positions with respect to the center thereof. The stopper portion 22d is a portion that abuts on the link 21D and regulates its displacement when the link 21D is positioned to a predetermined position, and defines the maximum deployed position of the movable portion 23.

A substrate 22B is supported on the front side of the pivoting member 22A. A plurality of light emitting elements L1 to L5 (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 22B. In the case of the present embodiment, the light emitting elements L1 to L5 are arranged in a cross shape. The substrate 22B is covered by a cover 22C. Although the cover body 22C is a light transmitting member, it may have a non-transmission portion in part. The base 22 </ b> B and the cover 22 </ b> C are formed with a notch that avoids interference with the shaft support member 22 </ b> D.

  The movable portion 23 is a blade-shaped arm member as a whole, and is a laminate of a base portion 23a, a substrate 23b, a lens member 23d and a cover 23e. The base portion 23a is provided with a fixing portion 23f to which the pivot support member 22D is fixed and a pivot support portion 23g by which the other end of the link 21D is rotatably supported. A plurality of light emitting elements 23c (here, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 23b. The lens member 23d covers the substrate 23b and covers the cover 23e. Although the lens member 23d and the cover body 23e are light transmitting members, they may have a non-transmission portion in part.

  With the above configuration, the rotation member 21A is rotated by the drive of the motor 24a, whereby the base portion 21B, the rotation member 22A, the pair of movable portions 23 and the like are integrally rotated. And rotation member 22A rotates (rotation) with respect to base part 21B by rotation of motor 26a. At this time, the movable portion 23 is pivotally supported by the pivoting member 22A with respect to the fixed portion 23f, and is connected with the base portion 21B via a link 21d. For this reason, the movable portion 23 performs a pivoting operation with the fixed portion 23f as the pivot center, thereby performing the unfolding operation and the stowing operation.

<Movement mechanism 6 and movable body 3>
The moving mechanism 6 and the movable body 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the moving mechanism 6 and the movable body 3. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the movable body 3.

<Movement mechanism 6>
The moving mechanism 6 includes a base portion 60A. The movable member 60B is supported by the base portion 60A via the slide rail 63. The movable member 60B is slidably supported in the vertical direction by a slide rail 63 extending in the vertical direction. The slide rail 63 includes a fixed rail 63c fixed to the base portion 60A, an intermediate rail 63b slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the fixed rail 63c, and a movable rail 63a slidable in the vertical direction by the guide of the intermediate rail 63b. The movable member 60B is supported by the movable rail 63a. The base portion 30 of the movable body 3 is fixed to the movable member 60B.

  One end of the arm member 61 is rotatably supported at the left end of the base 60A via the shaft 61a, and one end of the arm 62 is rotated at the right end of the base 60A via the shaft 62a. It is freely supported. Grooves 30a, 30b extending in the left-right direction are formed in the lower part of the base 30, and the other end of the arm member 62 is rotatably connected to the groove 30a via the slide member 62b. The other end of the arm member 61 is rotatably connected via the slide member 61b.

  The moving mechanism 6 includes a drive mechanism 64 that rotates the arm member 61. The drive mechanism 64 is a gear mechanism using a motor 64b as a drive source, and the motor 64b is, for example, a stepping motor. The drive mechanism 64 includes a base portion 64a supported by the base portion 65A, and the motor 64b is supported on the front side of the base portion 64a. A gear cover 64f is fixed to the back of the base portion 64a, and gears 64d and 64e are rotatably supported in the space between the base portion 64a and the gear cover 64f. The output shaft of the motor 64b passes through the base portion 64a, and the gear 64c is fixed in the space between the base portion 64a and the gear cover 64f. The gear 64c meshes with the gear 64d, and the gear 64d meshes with the gear 64e. The arm member 61 is formed with a tooth portion 61d that meshes with the gear 64e, and the arm member 61 is rotated by the drive of the motor 64b.

  The pivoting of the arm member 61 urges the base portion 30 in the vertical direction, and the arm member 62 follows the pivoting movement to move the movable body 3 up and down. As the arm members 61 and 62 rotate, the slide members 61b and 62b reciprocate in the left and right direction along the grooves 30b and 30a, converting the rotation of the arm members 61 and 62 into the elevating motion of the movable body 3.

  A harness cover 61c is attached to the back of the arm member 61, and a not-shown harness is routed in a space between the arm member 61 and the harness cover 61c. An arm cover 62 b is disposed on the front side of the arm member 62.

  The gear cover 64f supports a sensor 65 for detecting the position of the arm member 61. The sensor 65 may be any sensor, but in the case of this embodiment, it is an optical sensor (photo interrupter) that detects the detection piece 61 e formed on the arm member 61. The sensor 65 detects whether the arm member 61 is at the initial position.

  On the back of the base portion 60A, a cover member 68 for protecting the attachment portion of the shaft 61a, a relay board 67, and a biasing unit 66 are provided.

  The biasing unit 66 is a unit that uses the spring 66E as a drive source to bias the arm member 62 in a predetermined direction. In the present embodiment, when the movable body 3 is lifted, the spring 66E is extended and the movable body 3 is lowered. It is configured to exert a biasing force in the direction. Specifically, the biasing unit 66 includes a base portion 66A fixed to the back of the base portion 60A. A vertical groove 66a is formed in the base portion 66A, and the movable member 66d is mounted to guide the vertical movement of the movable member 66d. A gear 66B is rotatably supported by the base 66A via a shaft 62a.

  The gear 66B is connected to the arm member 62 via the shaft 62a, and the rotation of the arm member 62 also rotates the gear 66B. A gear 66C is rotatably supported by the base 66A via a shaft 66c. The gear 66C meshes with the gear 66B and meshes with the rack portion 66d formed on the movable member 66D. The spring 66E connects the movable member 66D and the base portion 60A, and always biases the movable member 66D downward. When the movable body 3 ascends, the movable member 66D ascends by the rotation of the arm member 62 via the rotation of the gear 66B, the spring 66E extends, and the biasing force increases.

<Movable body 3>
The movable body 3 is in the form of a circle as a whole, and is a rotary display unit provided with a rotatable display device 34, and in particular, is a versa-lighter movable object unit constituting a versa lighter. The display device 34 is a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements (here, LEDs are described in detail later) is mounted, and is configured to be rotatable by a drive mechanism using the motor 35 as a drive source.

  The motor 35 is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the back of the base portion 30. The output shaft of the motor 35 passes through the base portion 30, and the gear 35a is fixed on the front side of the base portion 30. On the back of the display device 34, a gear 35b is fixed coaxially with the center of rotation, and the gear 35a meshes with the gear 35b.

  The shaft 36 is fixed to the axial center of the gear 35 b. The shaft 36 is rotatably supported by the rotary connector unit 37. The rotary connector unit 37 includes a slip ring fixed to the base unit 30 for supplying control signals and power to the light emitting elements mounted on the display device 34, and a sensor for detecting the rotational position of the display device 34.

  A display device 32 is disposed on the front side of the base portion 30. Unlike the display device 34, the display device 32 is a device fixed to the base unit 30, and is a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting elements (here, LEDs will be described in detail later). The cover body 33 is a member having translucency, and is disposed so as to cover the inner peripheral portion of the display device 32, but the plurality of light emitting elements 32a are located on the outer peripheral portion of the display device 32, It is not covered by 33.

  The cover body 31 is fixed to the front side of the base portion 30 and covers the display devices 32 and 34. The cover body 31 is a member having translucency.

  69 (a) is a front view of the movable body 3, and FIG. 69 (b) is a front view of the movable body 3 with the cover 31 removed. FIG. 69 (c) is a front view of the movable body 3 which has passed through the cover body 31.

  The outer shape of the cover body 31 is circular, and the front wall has a shape in which twelve circular portions 31a are formed around a central circular portion 31b. Asperities are continuously formed on the peripheral wall of the cover body 31 in the circumferential direction.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the circular portion 31 b is entirely transparent, and the configuration behind it is visible. The circular portion 31a is partially opaque. In the case of the present embodiment, the characters I to XII are formed in each of the circular portions 31a, and since the characters are colored, they are opaque. Depending on the letters I to XII, the cover body 31 may be seen on the clock face. The characters can be formed by pasting a seal, painting or the like.

  Further, concentric multi-circular fine grooves are formed in each circular portion 31a, and this thin groove also reduces the permeability of the circular portion 31a to make it difficult to see the back of the circular portion 31a.

  The display device 32 includes twelve light emitting elements L14. Each light emitting element L14 is disposed corresponding to the circular portion 31a, and one light emitting element L14 is disposed behind the center of one circular portion 31a. Since the display device 32 is fixed to the base portion 30, the relative position between each light emitting element L14 and the base portion 30 or the cover 31 does not change, and each light emitting element L14 is formed of I to XII , It is difficult to view through the cover 31. When the light emitting element L14 is made to emit light, light may be diffused by the narrow groove of the circular portion 31a and the entire circular portion 31a may appear to be emitting light, and characters of I to XII can be visually accentuated There is a case.

  The display device 34 includes a light emitting element L11 arranged at a position as the rotation center, and a plurality of light emitting element rows LA arranged radially from the rotation center. In the case of the present embodiment, the number of light emitting element rows LA is six, and the light emitting element rows LA are arranged at equal pitches in the circumferential direction. Each light emitting element row LA includes a plurality of light emitting elements L12 and a light emitting element L13 located at the outermost periphery, and these are linearly arranged.

  The light emitting element row LA can change the relative position with respect to the base portion 30 and the cover body 31 by the rotation of the display device 34. On the other hand, since the light emitting element L11 is located at the rotation center, it is impossible to change the relative position with respect to the base portion 30, the cover body 31 or the light emitting element L14.

  As described above, by mixing the light emitting elements L12 and L13 whose relative positions with respect to the base portion 30 and the cover body 31 change and the light emitting elements L11 and L14 whose relative positions do not change, various light emission effects may be possible. is there. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the light emitting elements L11, the light emitting element rows LA, and the light emitting elements L12 are arranged in the same straight line as shown in FIG. 69 (c) according to the rotation angle of the display device 34. May be possible. In this case, the light emitting element L13 is located at a position overlapping the circular portion 31a in the depth direction. In other words, the light emitting element L13 overlaps or disappears from the circular portion 31a by the rotation of the display device 34. Since the circular portion 31a has lower permeability than the circular portion 31b, the appearance of light emission of the light emitting element L13 may change before and after passing through the position overlapping with the circular portion 31a, and various light emission effects are possible. It may be Conversely, since light emitting elements L11 and L12 always overlap with circular portion 31b in the depth direction, it may be easy to always see through cover body 31 and when the display content of light emitting elements L11 and L12 is easy for the player to visually recognize There is.

  In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69 (d), the light emitting element L11 is disposed on the rotation center axis AX of the display device 34, and the light emitting element row LA is arranged in the radial direction of the rotation center axis AX. However, other configurations are possible. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (e), the light emitting element array LA may be disposed in parallel with the rotation center axis AX. Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (f), the light emitting elements L11 may be disposed on the rotation center axis AX, and the light emitting element rows LA may be radially arrayed inclining from the radial direction. In the present embodiment, the rotation center axis AX is an axis in the horizontal direction and in the depth direction, but is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (g), it may be an axis in the vertical direction. It may be an axis inclined from the direction.

<Example of production operation>
An operation example of the movable bodies 1 to 3 will be described in order.

<Movable body 1>
FIG. 61 exemplifies the deformation operation of the movable body 1, and shows an operation example of the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 together with main mechanisms in a front view and a rear view of the movable body 1. FIG. 61 (a) shows the initial position of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14, and FIG. 61 (c) shows the position (moving position) after moving the movable parts 11, 12 and 14. FIG. 61 (b) shows an intermediate position between the initial position and the movement position. The movable portions 11, 12 and 14 are deformable from the initial position to the movement position through the intermediate position, and can be returned from the movement position to the initial position through the intermediate position. In addition, when the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are positioned at the initial position, the sensor 18 is configured to detect the detection piece 14d, and in control, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are positioned at the initial position. It is recognized from the detection result of the sensor 18 whether or not it does.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable portion 11 and the movable portion 14 perform different operations. Further, the movable portion 12 and the movable portion 14 perform different operations. The movable portion 11 moves along the curved track OR1, and is a pivoting motion about the pivot axis 10a '. The movable part 12 moves along the curved track OR2 and is a rotation operation about the rotation axis 10b 'as a rotation center, and is an operation that is symmetrical with the movable part 11 in the lateral direction. The movable portion 14 is a translational motion that moves along the linear trajectory OR3. As described above, there is a difference between the movable portion 14 and the movable portions 11 and 12 in the translational motion and the rotational motion. By providing movable parts having different operations as described above, the rendering effect may be able to be improved. In particular, when the movable parts provided on the same movable body 1 perform different operations, the rendering effect may be able to be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the movable portions 11 and 12 perform only the rotation operation, but may be configured to perform the rotation operation and the translation operation along a track including a linear track, in this case, the rotation The motion and the translation motion may be motions sequentially performed or motions performed in parallel. Similarly, the movable part 14 performs only translational movement, but may be configured to perform translational movement and rotational movement along a track including a curved track, in which case the rotational movement and the translational movement It may be an operation performed sequentially or an operation performed in parallel.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 extend in the left-right direction at the initial position, while the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 form a triangular shape at the moved position. In some cases, it may be possible to give the player unexpectedness. Also, in the middle position, the movable parts 11 and 12 may appear as wings spread, and in the movement position, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 may be seen as a pyramid, and the player is given a mysterious impression May be able to give to.

  Furthermore, in the process of operation, the movable parts 11 and 12 and the movable part 14 partially overlap in the depth direction as seen at the intermediate position, so that a sense of depth can be given to the player, enhancing the rendering effect There are times when you can. Furthermore, at the movement position, the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 do not overlap with each other in the depth direction, and the ends of the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 are in proximity to each other. In some cases, it may be possible to impress the player with the accuracy of the operation, and in some cases, the rendering effect may be enhanced. By arranging the movable portions 11 and 12 and the movable portion 14 at positions shifted in the depth direction, it may be easy to secure movable spaces of the movable bodies.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 operate in conjunction with each other, and the operation period from the initial position to the movement position or from the movement position to the initial position is the same. For this reason, in some cases, it may be possible to give the player a sense of unity of the operation of the movable portions 11, 12, and 14. The operating periods of the movable parts may or may not overlap with some of the periods. FIG. 73 shows an example of the timing of the operation period. The control of the operation period can be realized mechanically or by providing an individual drive source to each movable portion to enable independent operation.

  In FIG. 73, the first operation is, for example, the operation of the movable portion 11, the second operation is, for example, the operation of the movable portion 12, and the third operation is, for example, the operation of the movable portion 14. Indicates the passage of time.

  FIG. 73 (a) is an example already described, and is an example in which the operating periods of the three movable parts are the same. FIG. 73 (b) is an example in which the operation periods of the two movable parts are the same, and the operation periods of the remaining one movable part are different. FIG. 73 (c) is an example in which the operating periods of the three movable parts are different from one another. The example of FIG. 73 (d) is an example in which the operation periods of the first operation and the second operation partially overlap, and the operation periods of the second operation and the third operation partially overlap. In these operations, the lengths of the operating periods of the movable parts may be the same or different. FIG. 74 (e) shows an example in which the operating periods of the three movable parts and their lengths are different from each other. It shows.

  Next, an operation example including the movement operation of the movable body 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. 62 and 63 are diagrams showing an operation example of the movable body 1.

  FIG. 62 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 1 is in the initial position. As described above, the fact that the movable body 1 is at the initial position is detected by the sensor 43B.

  62 (b) to 62 (f) illustrate the elevation position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 4 and the aspect of the movable body 1 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 62 (b) shows the case where the movable body 1 is located at the raised position. The raised position is a position slightly above the initial position, and is a position where the display region R1 and the movable body 1 do not overlap. The initial position is also a position where the display area R1 and the movable body 1 do not overlap. When the movable body 1 is in the initial position or the raised position, and the movable body 2 is in the initial position described later, the movable body 2 is positioned behind the movable body 1 as shown in FIG. Covered by 1 makes it difficult to see.

  When the movable body 1 is raised above the raised position, the rack portion 44a and the toothless portion 41a face each other, and the movable body 1 falls freely. Fig. 62 (d) shows the case where the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, and Fig. 62 (c) shows the case where the movable body 1 is located at an intermediate position between the raised position and the lowered position. When the movable body 1 is positioned at the lowered position, as described above, the case of free fall and the case of control descent by the drive of the motor 43A can be selected, and the rendering effect is enhanced by properly using two descents. There are times when you can. As described above, the fact that the movable body 1 is at the lowered position is detected by the sensor 43C.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 1 and the movable body 3 are in a positional relationship in which they interfere in the depth direction. Therefore, when moving the movable body 1 to the lowered position, the movable body 3 is positioned at the initial position described later so as not to be raised. Conversely, when raising the movable body 3, the movable body 1 is not positioned at the lowered position. Alternatively, the operation restriction of the movable body 1 may be performed by contact with the movable body 3.

  In the intermediate position, the movable body 1 partially overlaps the display region R1, and the movable body 2 in the initial position starts to be exposed. In the lowered position, the movable body 1 entirely overlaps at the center of the display area R1 and may attract the player's attention to the movable body 1. In addition, the display contents of the display area R1 are displayed by the movable body 1 It may be possible to partially hide it. In the lowered position, the movable body 2 in the initial position is entirely exposed.

  62 (e) shows a mode in which the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position and the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved to the intermediate position (FIG. 61 (b)). (F) shows a mode in which the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position and the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved to the movement position (FIG. 61 (c)). The operations of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 can be performed regardless of the position of the movable body 1, but when the movable body 1 is in the lowered position, the movable body 1 can be performed by executing these operations. May be able to make

  Since the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 and the structure 16 are offset in the depth direction, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 and the structure 16 do not interfere with each other in operation, and the partial directions in the depth direction And the overlapping range is different depending on the progress of the operation. As a result, the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 may be able to be operated without reducing the visibility of the structure 16. Further, the overlapping range of the movable portions 11, 12 and 14 and the display region R1 differs from the overlapping range depending on the progress of the operation. As a result, the range in which the player can see (or the range to be hidden) in the display region R1 may change, and the rendering effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) show an example of the regulation release by the regulation unit. In the initial position, the movable body 1 is restricted from being lowered by the restriction unit 42. FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the restriction is released at the initial position, and shows a state in which the restriction member 42C is rotated and not engaged with the engagement portion 41b of the gear 41C. The gear 41C can be rotated clockwise, and FIG. 63 (b) shows a state in which the gear 41C is rotated until the engaging portion 41b is positioned at the 0 o'clock position of the timepiece. Thereby, the movable body 1 is slightly lowered from the initial position. By repeating a slight amount of clockwise and counterclockwise rotation around the position of the gear 41C in FIG. 63 (b), an effect of vibrating the movable body 1 up and down becomes possible. 63 (c) to 63 (e) illustrate the elevation position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 4 and the aspect of the movable body 1 in the game area 124 at that time.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows the state of the rotational position where the engagement portion 41b of the gear 41C is located at the 0 o'clock position, as in FIG. 63 (b). The movable body 1 and the display area R1 do not overlap, but in front view, the closer the lower end of the structure 16 is to the upper side of the display area R1, the closer. FIG. 63 (d) shows the state of the rotational position where the gear 41C is rotated clockwise and the engagement portion 41b is located at the 1 o'clock position of the watch. The movable body 1 descends slightly and overlaps the display area R1. FIG. 63 (e) shows the state of the rotational position where the gear 41C is rotated counterclockwise and the engagement portion 41b is positioned at the 11 o'clock position of the watch. The movable body 1 is slightly elevated, and is located at a position not overlapping the display region R1 again. When the engaging portion 41b is positioned at the 11 o'clock position of the watch, the engaging portion 41b is in contact with the side portion SD of the restricting member 42C to turn the restricting member 42C, however, the engaging portion 41b is closer than the restricting portion 42d. It is not located on the left side and therefore is not engaged with the restricting portion 42d. Therefore, when the gear 41C is repeatedly rotated so that the engaging portion 41b reciprocates between the 11 o'clock position and 1 o'clock, there is no need to perform the restriction release operation of the restriction unit 42, and the upper and lower Although the vibration operation can be performed, the restriction release of the restriction unit 42 may be performed.

<Movable body 2>
FIG. 64 exemplifies the unfolding operation of the movable body 2, and shows an operation example of the movable body 2 along with the main configuration of the movable body 2 by transmitting the movable portion 23. For ease of understanding, the rotation member 21A is not rotated, and the expansion operation of only the rotation of the rotation member 22A is shown, but further, the entire rotation operation by rotation of the rotation member 21A is also possible. .

  The state A shows an initial position in which the pair of movable parts 23 is in the initial state (stored state), and the state D shows a deployed maximum position in which the pair of movable parts 23 is in the expanded state. C shows an intermediate position between the initial position and the development maximum position. The pair of movable portions 23 can be deformed from the initial position to the development maximum position via the intermediate position, and can be returned to the initial position from the development maximum position to the intermediate position. When the pair of movable parts 23 is located at the initial position, the sensor 28A is configured to detect the detection piece 28a, and in control, whether or not the pair of movable parts 23 is located at the initial position Is recognized from the detection result of the sensor 23A.

  When in the initial position, the pair of movable portions 23 are close to each other with their side surfaces closed, and the light emitting elements L1 to L5 behind them overlap in the depth direction with any of the pair of movable portions 23. In this state, the light emitting elements L1 to L5 overlap the substrate 23b, the lens 23d, and the cover 23e. In particular, when the substrate 23b does not have translucency, the presence of the light emitting elements L1 to L5 becomes difficult to visually recognize. However, when the light emitting elements L1 to L5 are driven, the light may leak from the periphery of the pair of movable parts 23 and may be visible, which may enhance the rendering effect.

  When the pivoting member 22A is pivoted from the state A, the position of the pivot support member 22D connecting the pivoting member 22A and the movable portion 23 is moved, while the connection point between the link 21D and the pivoting member 21A (bush 21d The position of) does not change. Therefore, the movable portion 23 develops into the state B to the state D while the movable range is restricted by the link 21D.

  As the state B to the state D are developed, the pair of movable parts 23 starts to separate from each other and shifts to the open state. Here, the light emitting element L3 is disposed at the rotation center of the rotation member 22A. The light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 are disposed on the opposite side to the light emitting element L3, and the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are disposed on the opposite side to the light emitting element L3. The line connecting the light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 and the line connecting the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 are orthogonal to each other, and the light emitting element L3 is located at the intersection.

  In each of the states B to D, the light emitting element L3 disposed at the rotation center of the turning member 22A is in the exposed state without overlapping with any of the pair of movable portions 23 in the depth direction. Therefore, the player may easily recognize the light emission of the light emitting element L3. In each of the states B to D, the light emitting element L4 and the light emitting element L5 do not overlap in the depth direction with any of the pair of movable parts 23, and are in an exposed state. Therefore, the player may easily recognize the light emission of the light emitting elements L4 and L5.

  On the other hand, the light emitting element L1 and the light emitting element L2 do not overlap in the depth direction in the state B and the state C, but are in the exposed state, but in the state D, the pair of movable portions It overlaps with one of the 23 in the depth direction. In this state, the light emitting elements L1 and L2 overlap the substrate 23b, the lens 23d, and the cover 23e. In particular, when the substrate 23b does not have translucency, the presence of the light emitting elements L1 and L2 becomes difficult to visually recognize. However, when the light emitting elements L1 and L2 are driven, the light may leak from the periphery of the pair of movable parts 23 and may be visible, which may enhance the rendering effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, as the light emitting elements L1 and L2 shift from the state A to the state D, the state changes from overlapping with the movable portion 23 → not overlapping with the movable portion 23 → overlapping with the movable portion 23 Do. Therefore, the appearance of light of the light emitting elements L1 and L2 may change upon transition from the state A to the state D (or vice versa), and the effect of the presentation may be enhanced.

  Next, distances A to D are distances from the rotation center of the rotation member 22A in the states A to D to the farthest position of the movable portion 23, and the relationship of distance A <distance B <distance C <distance D is there. When the movable body 2 is expanded, the movable body 2 and the movable body 3 may interfere with each other in the depth direction in the case where the movable body 2 interferes with peripheral structures within a distance D from the rotation center of the rotation member 22A. There is a positional relationship, and when they are close, they may interfere.

  Therefore, when the movable body 2 is developed, interference can be avoided by rotating the rotary member 21A and moving the farthest position of the movable portion 23. The rotation center of the rotation member 21A is coaxial with the rotation center of the rotation member 22A.

  For example, when there is a configuration in which the left and right interfere with each other, the movable portion 23 may be rotated and deployed so that the farthest position of the movable portion 23 is positioned vertically. Conversely, if there is a configuration that interferes with the upper and lower sides, the movable portion 23 may be rotated and deployed so as to be positioned farthest to the left. In the case where the movable portion 23 is in the unfolded state and the rotating member 21A is further rotated to rotate the pair of movable portions 23 as a whole, when there is a configuration that interferes with the surroundings, the state B is to avoid interference It may be rotated while transitioning to state C once. For example, when interference occurs at a position of 0 to 10 degrees in rotation angle, state B or state C is in the range of 0 to 10 degrees in rotation angle, and state D in the range of 10 to 360 degrees. Can.

  Next, an operation example including the moving operation of the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. 65 and 66 are diagrams showing an operation example of the movable body 2. The movable body 2 can perform the same movement operation as the movable body 1.

  FIG. 66 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 2 is at the initial position (the movable portion 23 is at the initial position). As described above, the fact that the movable body 2 is at the initial position is detected by the sensor 53B.

  66 (b) to 66 (f) also show the elevation position of the movable body 1 by the moving mechanism 5 and the aspect of the movable body 2 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 66 (b) shows the case where the movable body 2 is at the raised position. The raised position is a position slightly above the initial position, and is a position where the display area R1 and the movable body 2 do not overlap. The initial position is also a position at which the display area R1 and the movable body 2 do not overlap. When the movable body 2 is in the initial position or the raised position and the movable body 1 is in the initial position, the movable body 2 is positioned behind the movable body 1 as shown in FIG. 62 (b) or 65 (b). And the movable body 1 makes it difficult to view.

  When the movable body 2 is elevated beyond the elevated position, the rack portion 54a and the toothless portion 51a face each other, and the movable body 2 falls freely. FIG. 65 (d) shows the case where the movable body 1 is located at the lowered position, and FIG. 65 (c) shows the case where the movable body 2 is located at an intermediate position between the raised position and the lowered position. When the movable body 2 is positioned at the lowering position, as described above, the case of free fall and the case of control lowering by the drive of the motor 53A can be selected, and the rendering effect is enhanced by properly using two lowerings. There are times when you can. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 2 and the movable body 3 are in a positional relationship in which they interfere in the depth direction. Therefore, when moving the movable body 2 to the lowered position, the movable body 3 is positioned at the initial position described later and is prevented from being raised. Conversely, when raising the movable body 3, the movable body 2 is not positioned at the lowered position. Alternatively, the movement restriction of the movable body 2 may be performed by contact with the movable body 3.

  At the intermediate position, the movable body 2 partially overlaps the display area R1. In the lowered position, the movable body 2 may be entirely overlapped from the center to the upper portion of the display area R1, and the player's attention may be attracted to the movable body 2. In addition, the movable body 2 displays the display area R1. You may be able to partially hide the display content of.

  FIG. 65 (e) shows a mode in which the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position and the movable part 23 of the movable body 2 is moved to the intermediate position (state C in FIG. 64). A mode is shown in which the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position, and the movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is operated in the unfolded state (state D in FIG. 64). The movable body 2 can further rotate the movable portion 23. If there is no interference with the surroundings, the expansion / storing operation of the movable portion 23 or the rotational operation of the entire pair of movable portions 23 does not cause the position of the movable body 2. Although it is practicable, when the movable body 2 is located at the lowered position, the movable body 2 may be made noticeable by performing these operations.

  66 (f) and (g) show the movable portion 23 in the accommodated state, and the rotational position of the whole is made different, and the aspect of FIG. 66 (f) and the aspect of FIG. 66 (g) are different. There is a difference of 45 degrees of rotational position.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (f) and (g), there are cases where it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by moving the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the lowered position and performing the operation of each movable portion.

  FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) show an example of the restriction release by the restriction unit 52. FIG. At the initial position, the movable body 2 is restricted from being lowered by the restriction unit 52. FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the restriction is released at the initial position, and shows a state in which the restricting member 52C is rotated and not engaged with the engaging portion 51b of the gear 51C. The gear 51C can be rotated clockwise, and FIG. 66 (b) shows a state in which the gear 51C is rotated until the engagement portion 51b is positioned at the 0 o'clock position of the timepiece. Thereby, the movable body 2 is slightly lowered from the initial position. By repeating a slight amount of clockwise and counterclockwise rotation around the position of the gear 51C in FIG. 66 (b), an effect of vibrating the movable body 2 up and down becomes possible. 66C to 66E illustrate the elevation position of the movable body 2 by the movement mechanism 5 and the aspect of the movable body 2 in the game area 124 at that time. Here, the movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is in the accommodated state, but may be vibrated as the unfolded state or the intermediate state.

  FIG. 66 (c) shows the state of the rotational position where the engagement portion 51b of the gear 51C is located at the 0 o'clock position, as in FIG. 66 (b). Although the movable body 2 and the display area R1 do not overlap, in front view, they are so close that the lower end of the movable body 2 is in contact with the upper side of the display area R1. FIG. 66 (d) shows the state of the rotational position where the gear 51C is rotated clockwise and the engagement portion 51b is located at the 1 o'clock position of the timepiece. The movable body 1 descends slightly and overlaps the display area R1. FIG. 66 (e) shows the state of the rotational position where the gear 51C is rotated counterclockwise and the engagement portion 51b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the watch. The movable body 2 is slightly elevated and located at a position not overlapping the display area R1 again. When the engaging portion 51b is located at the 11 o'clock position of the watch, the engaging portion 51b is in contact with the side portion of the restricting member 52C to turn the restricting member 52C, but the left side of the restricting portion 52d And therefore not in engagement with the restrictor 52d. Therefore, when the gear 51C is repeatedly rotated so that the engaging portion 51b reciprocates between the 11 o'clock position and 1 o'clock, there is no need to perform the restriction releasing operation of the restriction unit 52, and the upper and lower sides of the movable body 2 are not required. Although the vibration operation can be performed, the restriction release operation of the restriction unit 52 may be performed.

<Example of combined operation of movable body 1 and movable body 2>
A rendering operation example in which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are combined will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 (a) shows the case where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are in the initial position, and the movable parts are also in the initial position. In this state, all or part of the light emitting elements 11d, 12d and 16b of the movable body 1 and all or part of the light emitting elements L1 to L5 and 23c of the movable body 2 are shown in FIG. It may be driven (lighted or blinked). In some cases, it may be possible to make the player feel a sense of unity by making the light emission colors the same for the movable body 1 and the movable body 2, and by setting the light emission colors to different colors There are times when you can make Although the movable body 2 is hidden by the movable body 1, the light of the light emitting element may leak from the periphery of the movable body 1 and be visible, or may be partially transmitted through the movable body 1 so as to be visible. is there.

  67 (b) to 67 (n) show an example in which the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position, and the movable state 2 → the accommodated state → the whole rotation → the expanded state → the accommodated state is sequentially operated. The movable body 2 is returned to the initial position by). The movement to the lowered position in FIG. 67 (b) may be free fall. As in the case of FIG. 67 (a), the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be made to emit light continuously or for a predetermined time even after the movement to the lowered position of FIG. 67 (b). When the movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position, the display 208 may display the variation of the decorative symbol in an area different from the display area R1. The deployment and storage operation of the movable body 2 may be repeated. The rotation operation of the movable body 2 may be repeatedly performed. The deployment and storage operation of the movable body and the rotation operation may be performed sequentially or in parallel.

  68 (p) to 68 (r) show an example in which the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, and the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 are moved to the moved position and returned to the initial position; And the movable body 1 is returned to the initial position. The movement to the lowered position in FIG. 68 (P) may be free fall. As in the case of FIG. 67 (a), the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be made to emit light continuously or for a predetermined time also after the movement to the lowered position of FIG. 68 (p). When the movable body 1 is moved to the lowered position, the display 208 may display the variation of the decorative symbol in an area different from the display area R1.

  The mode of FIG. 68 (q) may notify that the player has made an advantageous setting. Some or all of the aspects of FIGS. 67 (b) to 67 (n) may inform the player that an advantageous setting has been made, and in the case of the aspect of FIG. 68 (q). In comparison, the player may be notified that a more advantageous setting has been made, and the mode of FIG. 68 (q) may be notified that the player has a more advantageous setting. It may be

<Movable body 3>
An example of the movement operation of the movable body 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a view showing an operation example of the movable body 3.

  FIG. 70 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is in the initial position. In the present embodiment, the initial position is the lowest position in the upper and lower movement range of the movable body 3. In addition, when the movable body 3 is positioned at the initial position, the sensor 65 is configured to detect the detection piece 61 e, and the sensor 65 determines whether the movable body 3 is positioned at the initial position in control. It is recognized from the detection result of

  FIG. 70 (c) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is in the raised position, and FIG. 70 (b) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is in the middle between the initial position and the raised position. The raised position is the highest position in the upper and lower movement range of the movable body 3 in the present embodiment.

  Such vertical movement of the movable body 3 is performed by rotating the arm members 61 and 62 by the drive of the motor 64b. Further, the lowering operation of the movable body 3 is also possible only by the biasing force of the spring 66E without driving the motor 64b. While the movable body 3 moves from the initial position to the raised position, or while returning from the raised position to the initial position, the slide members 61b and 62b move from the outer end to the inner end to the outer end of the grooves 30b and 30a. And the grooves 30b and 30a are reciprocated one time.

  71 (a) to 71 (c) show the elevation position of the movable body 3 and the aspect of the movable body 3 in the game area 124 at that time. FIG. 71 (a) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is located at the initial position. Most of the movable body 3 is covered by the cover 203 or the like, and only a part of the upper side is exposed. The movable body 3 and the display area R1 do not overlap in the depth direction.

  Even when the display 32 or the display 34 is performed at the initial position, it may not be clearly seen by the player. However, display may be performed by the display device 32 or the display device 34, and in the case where the cover 203 is formed of a translucent member, it is possible to make the player recognize light emission of the display device 32 or the display device 34 In some cases, it may be possible to suggest to the player that the movable body 3 is hidden by the cover 203. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be a display different from when the movable body 3 is located at the intermediate position or the raised position, or may be the same display.

  FIG. 71 (b) illustrates the case where the movable body 3 is located at the intermediate position. More than half of the movable body 3 is exposed from the cover 203. The upper part of the movable body 3 and the display area R1 overlap in the depth direction. At the intermediate position, display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be performed. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be a display different from when the movable body 3 is located at the initial position or the raised position, or may be the same display.

  FIG. 71 (c) exemplifies the case where the movable body 3 is at the raised position. The movable body 3 is entirely exposed from the cover 203. Since the outer shape of the movable body 3 is circular, the movable body 3 may appear as sunrise when the movable body 3 comes out from the initial position to the raised position. The movable body 3 entirely overlaps the display area R1 in the depth direction. When the movable body 3 is moved to the raised position, the display 208 may display the variation of the decorative symbol in a region different from the display region R1.

  When display is performed by the display device 32 or the display device 34 at the raised position, the display can be easily viewed as a whole, and there may be cases where the rendering effect can be enhanced. The display by the display device 32 or the display device 34 may be a display different from when the movable body 3 is located at the initial position or the intermediate position, or may be the same display. When the movable body 3 moves to the raised position, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be positioned at the initial position in order to avoid interference.

  FIG. 72 is a view showing the movable body 3 located at the raised position with the cover 31 removed, and shows an aspect in which the display device 34 is rotating. The position of the display device 34 differs by about 30 degrees between FIG. 72 (a) and FIG. 72 (b). The display device 34 can function as a versa writer and can perform various displays.

<Operation at power on>
As an initial operation when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the operation confirmation of the movable bodies 1 to 3 and the movement mechanisms 4 to 6 may be performed. The operation check may be performed in the following order. By starting operation little by little without starting it from the beginning, failure may be avoided and it may be easier to detect an abnormality.

1. The movable body 3 is raised by the moving mechanism 6, and when it is detected that it has moved from the initial position, it is returned to the initial position.
2. The display device 34 is rotated, and when it is detected by the sensor in the rotary connector unit 37 that the display device 34 has made a round, the display device 34 is stopped at the initial position.
3. The movable mechanism 1 moves the movable body 1 to the lowered position.
4. The movable parts 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 are moved, and when it is detected that they have moved from the initial position, they are returned to the initial position.
5. The movable body 1 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 4.
6. The movable body 2 is moved to the lowered position by the moving mechanism 5.
7. The movable portion 23 of the movable body 2 is moved (deploying operation), and when it is detected that the movable portion 23 has moved from the initial position, the movable portion 23 is returned to the initial position.
8. The movable body 2 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 5.
9. The movable body 3 is moved to the raised position by the moving mechanism 6.
10. The display 34 is rotated several times.
11. The movable body 3 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 6.
12. The movable body 1 is raised by the moving mechanism 4 and the movable body 1 is freely dropped.
13. After moving the movable parts 11, 12 and 14 of the movable body 1 to the movement position, they are returned to the initial position.
14. The movable body 1 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 4.
15. The movable body 2 is lifted by the moving mechanism 5 and the movable body 2 is freely dropped.
16. After the movable body 2 is deployed and rotated, it is returned to the initial position.
17. The movable body 2 is returned to the initial position by the moving mechanism 5.
When another movable body is provided, the operation confirmation may be performed in parallel with the operations 1 to 17.

<Summary of the embodiment>
A1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A plurality of drive means (e.g. 15a, 43A);
A first movable part (e.g. 14);
A second movable part (e.g. 11 or 12);
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of drive means (hereinafter referred to as “first drive means”. (For example, 15a) is a means capable of causing the first movable portion to execute the first operation ( For example, FIG. 61),
The first drive means is a means capable of causing the second movable portion to execute the second operation (for example, FIG. 61).
The first operation is an operation different from the second operation (for example, FIG. 61)
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to provide a game console having features in the movable portion. In addition, it may be possible to show the player various actions while suppressing the number of driving means to a small number, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

A2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first operation is an operation in which the first movable portion moves along a first trajectory (for example, OR3),
The second operation is an operation in which the second movable unit moves along a second trajectory (for example, OR1 or OR2),
The first trajectory is a trajectory different from the second trajectory,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player various motions with different orbits.

A3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first trajectory is a trajectory including a linear trajectory (eg, OR3),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player a simple operation.

A4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second trajectory is a trajectory that includes a curved trajectory (eg, OR1 or OR2),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player a surprising action.

A5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least a portion of the operation period of the first operation overlaps with at least a portion of the operation period of the second operation,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since there is a period in which the plurality of movable parts operate at the same time, it may be possible to show the player an action having interest.

A6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The operation period of the first operation is the same as the operation period of the second operation,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, since the plurality of movable parts operate at the same time, it may be possible to show the player an action having interest.

A7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Equipped with a movable body (eg 1),
The movable body is a movable body including the first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body including the second movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body including the first drive means,
The movable body is a movable movable body,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player various actions.

A8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body including a third movable portion (e.g. 12 or 11).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player various actions.

A9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first drive means is a means capable of causing the third movable portion to execute a third operation,
The third operation is an operation different from the first operation.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player various actions while suppressing the number of driving means to a small number.

A10. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third operation is an operation in which the third movable unit moves along a third trajectory (for example, OR3 or OR2),
The third orbit is an orbit including a curved orbit,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to show the player a surprising action.

A11. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first movable portion is a movable portion that is different in position from the second movable portion in the front-rear direction of the game console.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to secure the movable space of each movable portion.

A12. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
At least a portion of the first movable portion may overlap with at least a portion of the second movable portion in the front-rear direction of the gaming table.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be easy to secure the movable space of each movable portion, and in some cases, it may be possible to perform an operation with a sense of depth, or some of the movable portions may not be visible in the middle of the operation. , You may be able to perform interesting actions.

A13. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
Equipped with a structure (eg 16)
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game console (for example, FIG. 63).
At least a portion of the second movable portion may overlap with at least a portion of the structure in the front-rear direction of the game console (for example, FIG. 63).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the movable space of each movable portion may be easily secured, and an operation with a sense of depth may be performed.

A14. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A display means (eg, 208) capable of displaying the first display;
At least a part of the first movable part may overlap with at least a part of the first display in the front-rear direction of the game console (for example, FIG. 63).
At least a part of the second movable part may overlap with at least a part of the first display in the front-rear direction of the game console (for example, FIG. 63).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the rendering effect can be enhanced by the effect of the operation of the movable portion and the display of the display means.

A15. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

A16. The game console of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

  A17. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The first trajectory may be a linear trajectory only. The first movement may be a movement including a translational movement. The first motion may be translational motion only. The second trajectory may be a curved trajectory only. The second operation may be an operation including a pivoting operation. The second operation may be an operation of only a rotation operation. The first track and the second track may be tracks including a common track.

  For example, the first movable portion and the second movable portion may operate as shown in FIG. 140 (a). In the example of the figure, from the initial position where the movable part 1 and the movable part 2 are arranged side by side horizontally, the movable part 1 translates upward and the movable part 2 pivots and becomes vertically oriented as a whole The example which changed into T shape is shown.

  The operation period of the first operation may not overlap with the operation period of the second operation. The operation period of the second operation may start after the start of the operation period of the first operation. The operation period of the first operation may start after the start of the operation period of the second operation. The operation period of the first operation may or may not overlap with the operation period of the third operation.

  The first movable part and the second movable part are part or all of a specific shape (for example, a circle, triangle, square, polygon, character shape, number shape, face shape, title, mark) after operation May be represented.

  The first display is the hold display, the hold icon, the change icon, the notice icon, the icon area display, the decoration pattern, the fourth pattern, the mini decoration pattern, the notice display, the prefetch notice display, the tutorial display, the pseudo link display, the reach display , Right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, number of consecutive calls display, number of acquired balls display, number of acquired displays, volume adjustment display, light quantity It may be at least one of adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, and abnormality occurrence display.

  The driving means may be means capable of simultaneously operating three or more movable parts. FIG. 140 (b) shows an operation example of three movable parts. In the example of the figure, from the initial position in which the movable parts 1 to 3 are vertically arranged in parallel and separated from each other vertically, the movable part 2 at the center is turned to become horizontal, and the left and right movable parts 1 and movable An example is shown in which the portions 3 translate in directions approaching each other, and as a whole, change from the III shape to the N shape and further to the H shape.

  The movable body may have a longer or shorter width in the vertical direction after operation than the width in the vertical direction before the operation of the first movable portion and the second movable portion, or the same. May be. The movable body may have a shorter or longer width in the lateral direction after operation than the width in the lateral direction before the operation of the first movable portion and the second movable portion. May be.

  The movable body may be provided with drive means different from the drive means.

  The movable body may be a movable body that can move in at least one of the vertical direction, the lateral direction, and the longitudinal direction. The movable body may be a movable body capable of performing at least one of an oscillating operation and a reciprocating operation.

  Another movable body (for example, 2) may be provided, and at least a portion of the first movable portion may overlap with at least a portion of the other movable body in the front-rear direction, and at least one of the second movable portions The portion may overlap with at least a portion of the other movable body in the front-rear direction. The other movable body may be a movable body that can move in at least one of the vertical direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction.

  The movable body (for example, 1) may include the structure (for example, 16). A part of the first movable part may always overlap the structure. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game console. When the second movable body is in the first state, a part of the second movable portion may overlap with the structure, and when the second movable body is in the second state, the second movable body may The other part of the movable part of may overlap with the structure. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game console.

  The first movable part may comprise one or more first light emitting means (for example 14f). The second movable part may comprise one or more second light emitting means (e.g. 11 d or 12 d). The third movable part may comprise one or more third light emitting means (e.g. 12d or 11d). The structure may comprise one or more light emitting means (e.g. 16b).

  The first light emitting means may overlap the structure during operation of the first movable part. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game console. The second light emitting means may overlap with at least one of the structure and the first movable part during operation of the second movable part. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game console. The third light emitting means may overlap with at least one of the structure and the first movable portion during operation of the third movable portion. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game console.

  The first movable portion may have a first non-transmissive portion (e.g., a portion of 14 h), and a portion of the first light emitting means is the first non-transmissive in the back and forth direction of the game console It may be located behind the section. The second movable portion may have a second non-transmissive portion (e.g., a portion of 11f or 12f), and a portion of the second light emitting means is the second light emitting portion in the front-rear direction of the game console It may be located behind the non-transmissive portion. The third movable portion may have a third non-transmissive portion (for example, a portion of 12f or 11f), and a portion of the third light emitting means is the third light emitting portion in the front-rear direction of the game console. It may be located behind the non-transmissive portion.

  The movable body may be a triangular formed movable body (for example, FIG. 61 (c)). The triangle forming movable body may be provided with another movable body (for example, 2), and the other movable body may be a development movable body (for example, FIG. 64). When viewed from the front, the contour of the part of the deployable movable object may be tangent to the contour of the part of the triangular shaped movable object and may be integrally seen. The movable portion may be an arm portion. The arm portion of the triangular form movable object in the initial position may overlap with a part of the arm portion of the deployable movable object in the initial position. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game console. The arm portion of the triangular form movable object in the initial position may not overlap with another part of the arm portion of the deployable movable object in the initial position. The direction that does not overlap may be the front and back direction of the game console. The arm portions of the triangular shaped movable object in the initial position may overlap with all the arm portions of the deployment movable object in the initial position. The overlapping direction may be the front-rear direction of the game console.

  The time until the triangle of the triangle formation part is completed may be faster, later or the same as the time until the deployment operation of the deployment movable object is completed. The time for which the triangle forming part falls from the initial position to the maximum movement position by driving the motor may be faster than the time for the deployment movable object to fall from the initial position to the maximum movement position by driving the motor. It may be late or the same. The time for which the triangle forming part is raised from the maximum movement position to the initial position by driving the motor may be faster than the time for the deployment movable object to rise from the maximum movement position to the initial position by driving the motor. It may be late or the same. In the state in which the triangle forming movable object overlaps with the expanding movable object, the expanding movable object may perform a light emitting effect while the triangle forming movable object is performing a light emitting effect, and a part of the light emission modes are common May be At this time, only a part of the LEDs of the deployable object may emit light, and the other part of the LEDs may not emit light. The state of being overlapped may be a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction of the game console. The expansion movable object may perform a light emission effect while the triangular formation movable object is performing a light emission effect and a vibration effect.

B1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A movable body (for example, 1),
Driving means (for example, 43A) capable of driving the movable body;
A game console equipped with
A control unit (for example, 42) capable of controlling the movement of the movable body;
The restricting means is a means different from the driving means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by the regulation of the movement of the movable body. In addition, in some cases, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the movable body and to prevent a decrease in the player's interest. Also, if necessary, it may be possible to release the restriction and operate.

B2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The restriction means is a means capable of executing the release of the restriction (for example, FIG. 63 (a)),
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to cause the movement of the movable body that has been restricted.

B3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The restricting means is a means capable of executing the restriction of the movement of the movable body in the first direction.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the movable body in the first direction.

B4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first direction is downward,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to restrict the movement in the direction in which gravity is applied.

B5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body capable of performing an operation in a second direction (for example, upward) during execution of the restriction by the restriction means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there may be a case where only necessary control can be performed without restricting the entire operation of the movable body.

B6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body capable of performing the motion in the first direction after performing the motion in the second direction.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even while the restriction by the restriction means is being executed, the operation in the first direction may be able to be performed by interposing the operation in the second direction.

B7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It comprises a gear (for example, 41C) which can be driven by the drive means,
The movable body is a movable body that may operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear,
The regulation means is a means capable of performing regulation of the operation range of the gear.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the operation may be regulated with a relatively simple configuration.

B8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The restriction means is a means provided with another drive means (for example, 42A) different from the drive means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the regulating means can be driven independently.

B9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The other driving means is a solenoid,
During execution of the restriction by the restriction means, the solenoid is in a non-excitation state,
The solenoid is in an energized state during the release of the restriction by the restriction means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, power consumption may be reduced.

B10. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body capable of performing a first operation during the release.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the first operation can be executed by the release.

B11. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first operation is a vibration operation,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the rendering effect may be enhanced.

B12. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

B13. The game console of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

  B14. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The movable body may be a movable body which may not operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear. The movable body may be a movable body capable of performing an operation in the first direction when it does not operate in conjunction with the operation of the gear.

  When the solenoid is not energized, the rotation of the gear may be added to the regulating means. When the rotation direction of the gear is the first direction, the restricting member of the restricting means is maintained at the restricting position, and in the second direction, the restricting member is displaced from the restricting position to the non-restricting position. It is also good.

  A cover (for example, 40A) for covering the restriction means may be provided, and one or more openings (for example 40a) may be formed in the cover, and the restriction means can be externally contacted through the openings It is also good.

  Another movable body (for example, 2) may be provided, and a regulating means (for example 52) may be provided to the other movable body.

  Two or three or more of the regulation means may be provided for the movable body, and the regulation range of the operation of the movable body by the respective regulation means may be different or the same.

  The restricting means may be configured of another movable body (for example, 3), and a portion of the movable body contacts a portion of the movable body to restrict the operating range of the movable body. May be

C1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game console having movable movable bodies (for example, 2),
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L1 or L2),
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion (for example, 23),
The first light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in a first state (for example, the state B in FIG. 64);
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable portion in a second state (for example, the state D of FIG. 64).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body. Also, the way of showing the light emitting means can be made different depending on the state, and the interest of the player may be improved.

C2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting unit is a unit that overlaps the first movable portion in an initial state (for example, the state A in FIG. 64).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the light emitting means further different depending on the state.

C3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the initial state via at least the first state (for example, FIG. 64).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the light emitting means different continuously depending on the state.

C4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means capable of emitting light in the second state.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, even if it overlaps with the first movable portion, there may be cases where effects can be made by the light of the first light emitting means.

C5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L3),
The second light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in the first state (for example, the state B in FIG. 64),
The second light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in the second state (for example, the state D in FIG. 64).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to improve the player's interest by the light emitting means overlapping the first movable portion and the light emitting means not overlapping the first movable portion.

C6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means (for example, L2 or L1),
The movable body is a movable body having a second movable portion (for example, 23),
The third light emitting means does not overlap the second movable portion in the first state (for example, the state B in FIG. 64),
The third light emitting unit is a unit overlapping the second movable portion in the second state (for example, the state D in FIG. 64).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, the way of showing the light emitting means can be made different depending on the state, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

C7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first movable portion is a movable portion having a light emitting substrate (for example, 23b),
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in an initial state.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the light emitting means different depending on the state.

C8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in the second state.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the light emitting means different depending on the state.

C9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first movable portion is a movable portion having a cover (for example, 23e),
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover in an initial state.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the light emitting means different depending on the state.

C10. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover in the second state.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the light emitting means different depending on the state.

C11. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

C12. The game console of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

  C13. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The first movable portion may be a movable portion capable of performing a first operation while transitioning from the initial state to the second state. The second movable portion may be a movable portion capable of performing a second operation while transitioning from the initial state to the second state. The first movement may include a pivoting movement or may include a translational movement. The first operation may include a deployment operation. The second motion may include a pivoting motion or a translation motion. The second operation may include a deployment operation.

  The position of the first light emitting means may be different from or the same as the position in the initial state and the position in the second state. The position of the second light emitting means may be the same or different between the position in the initial state and the position in the second state. The position of the third light emitting means may be different from or the same as the position in the initial state and the position in the second state. The second light emitting means may be means that overlaps the first movable portion or the second movable portion in the initial state.

  The first light emitting means has an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, and no overlap with the movable portion in the order of the initial state, the first state, and the second state. No presence, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, or no overlap.

  The second light emitting means has an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, and no overlap with the movable portion in the order of the initial state, the first state, and the second state. No presence, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, or no overlap.

  The third light emitting means has an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, an overlap, and no overlap with the movable portion in the order of the initial state, the first state, and the second state. No presence, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, no overlap, or no overlap.

  FIG. 140 (c) shows a change of the overlap between the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2. The example of the figure shows an example in which the movable part 1 is rotated and does not overlap from the state where the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2 overlap, and the movable part 1 is further rotated and overlapped again. ing.

  FIG. 140 (d) shows a variation of the overlap between the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2. In any of the examples, one of the movable portion 1 and the light emitting means 2 may move, or both may move. Further, part or all of the movable part 1 may have a transmitting part, or part or all of the movable part 1 may be a half mirror.

  In the example of (d-1), although the light emitting means 2 moves from the state where the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2 overlap, the overlapping state is continued, and then the movable part 1 moves to the top. It shows an example of no more wrapping.

  In the example of (d-2), from the state in which the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2 do not overlap, the light emitting means 2 moves to overlap with the movable part 1 and the light emitting means 2 further moves Also, an example is shown in which the overlap continues.

  In the example of (d-3), the light emitting means 2 is moved from the state where the movable portion 1 and the light emitting means 2 do not overlap, and the light emitting means 2 is in a state of overlapping with the movable portion 1. Shows an example in which there is no overlap.

  In the example of (d-4), from the state where the movable portion 1 and the light emitting means 2 overlap, the light emitting means 2 moves but the overlapped state continues, and then the light emitting means 2 moves further It shows an example in which the wrapped state is continued.

  In the example of (d-5), from the state where the plurality of movable parts 1 and 3 and the light emitting means 2 overlap, the movable part 3 moves so as not to overlap with the light emitting means 2. An example is shown in which the light emitting means 2 has moved so that none of the three parties overlap.

  A cover (for example, 22C) having a non-transmissive portion may be provided in front of the first light emitting means.

  The longest second width of the end of the first movable part and the end of the second movable part in the second state corresponds to the end of the first movable part in the first state The width may be longer or shorter than the longest first width of the end of the second movable portion.

  The movable region of the movable body may be shorter or longer in the downward distance from the center of the movable body than the lateral distance from the center of the movable body.

  The movable body may be a movable body having a rotary portion (for example, 21A), and the rotary portion may be a rotary portion having the first movable portion and the second movable portion, and the rotary portion is The rotary unit may be rotatable while repeating the first state and the second state.

When the first movable part and the second movable part are vertically positioned, the second state is brought into contact with another structure (for example, another movable body or center part) It may be a positional relationship. In addition, the positional relationship may be in contact when positioned left and right.
C21. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game console having movable movable bodies (for example, 2),
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L1 or L2),
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L3),
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion (for example, 23),
The movable body is a movable body having driving means (for example, 26a),
The first light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in a first state (for example, the state B in FIG. 64);
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable portion in the second state (for example, the state D in FIG. 64),
The second light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in the first state, and
The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the first movable portion in the second state,
The first light emitting means is means that overlaps the first movable portion in a third state (for example, the state A in FIG. 64).
The substrate (for example, 22B) on which the first light emitting unit is mounted is a substrate on which the second light emitting unit is also mounted.
The posture of the substrate changes during operation of the first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body that may operate when an operation means (for example, 136) is operated,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the third state via at least the first state by driving of the one driving means (for example, FIG. 64).
The first movable portion is a movable portion having a light emitting substrate (for example, 23b),
The first light emitting unit is a unit that overlaps the light emitting substrate in the second state.
C22. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped to a structure (for example 16),
It is characterized by
C23. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The third state is an initial state (eg, state A in FIG. 64),
It is characterized by
C 2 4 . The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in an initial state.
It is characterized by
C2 5 . The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first movable portion is a movable portion having a cover (for example, 23e),
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover in an initial state.
It is characterized by
C2 6 . The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover in the second state.
It is characterized by
C2 7 . The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable part (for example, FIG. 64),
It is characterized by
C2 8 . The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second state is a state in which the first movable portion is not in operation.
It is characterized by
C 29 . The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It has a game board (for example, 201B) having a game nail,
The movable body is a movable body operable behind the gaming board (for example, FIG. 50).
It is characterized by
C3 0 . The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by
C3 1 . The game console of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

D1. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game console having movable movable bodies (for example, 3),
The movable body is a movable body having a base portion (for example, 30),
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L11),
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L12, L13),
The first light emitting means is a means that can not change the relative position with the base portion,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position with the base portion.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to provide a game console characterized by a movable body. In addition, it may be possible to make the way of showing a plurality of light emitting means different, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

D2. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a cover body (for example, 31),
The first light emitting means is a means that can not change the relative position with the cover body,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position with the cover body.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the plurality of light emitting means show differently, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

D3. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body overlapping the first light emitting means,
The cover body is a cover body overlapping with the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the light emitting means different through the cover body.

D4. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a display means (for example, 34),
The display means is means including the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the display means different in appearance.

D5. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The display means is means including the first light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the display means different in appearance.

D6. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second light emitting means is a means that can not change the relative position with the first light emitting means.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the plurality of light emitting means different.

D7. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The display means is means capable of performing display in a state where the movable body is located at a position different from the initial position (for example, FIG. 70 (b) (c)).
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the display unit can be used as a notification unit of internal information.

D8. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The display means is means capable of performing display when the movable body is at the initial position.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, there are cases where the display means can be used as an indication means of internal information.

D9. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body having a first portion (for example, 31a),
The movable body is a movable body having a third light emitting means,
The third light emitting means is a means that can not change the relative position with the cover body,
The first portion is a portion overlapping with the third light emitting means,
The first site is at least a partially opaque site.
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the plurality of light emitting means different.

D10. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body having a second portion (for example, 31b),
The second portion is a portion overlapping with the second light emitting means,
The second site is a transparent site,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the way of showing the plurality of light emitting means different.

D11. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that can not change the relative position with the first portion (for example, any portion of 30) of the base portion,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position to the first site,
It is characterized by

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to make the plurality of light emitting means show differently, and it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

D12. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by

D13. The game console of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

  D14. The following configurations can also be adopted.

  The movable body may include a substrate (for example, 34), the substrate may be a substrate having the first light emitting means, and the substrate may be a substrate having the second light emitting means. The first light emitting means may be means located at the center of the substrate. The substrate may be a rotatable substrate. The first light emitting means may be means located at the rotation center of the substrate. The display means may be means capable of displaying by rotation of the substrate.

  The substrate may be a substrate in which a plurality of the second light emitting means are arranged in at least one row (for example, LA). The second light emitting means may be disposed on a straight line or may be disposed on a curve. The substrate may be a substrate in which a plurality of the second light emitting means are arranged in two or more rows, and the second light emitting means in adjacent rows do not overlap when the substrate is rotated. (Eg, FIG. 69 (b)). The color of the resist (solder resist) of the substrate may be black. The color of silk printing of the substrate may be black.

  The rotation axis (for example, AX) of the substrate may be at least one of the longitudinal direction, the vertical direction, and the lateral direction of the gaming table.

  The third light emitting means may be a means which may be located on an extension of the line of the plurality of second light emitting means (for example, FIG. 69 (b) (c)).

  The opaque portion may be displayed with any of letters, numbers, marks, and icons.

  The first portion may have a lens shape.

  The second light emitting means (e.g., L13) may be means movable behind the first portion. The second light emitting means may be means movable behind a portion having the lens shape of the first portion.

The change of relative position may be rotation, rotation or translation. FIG. 140 (e) shows an example of the change of the relative position of the light emitting means. In the example of the figure, the light emitting means 2 translates from the state where the base portion 3 and the light emitting means 1 and 2 are located at the initial position, and the relative position changes with respect to the base portion 3. The example which the relative position has not displaced with respect to the part 3 is shown.
D21. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A game console having movable movable bodies (for example, 3),
The movable body is a movable body having a first structure (for example, 30),
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means (for example, L14),
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means (for example, L12, L13),
The first light emitting means is a means that does not change the relative position with the first structure,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position to the first structure body,
The first light emitting means is a means that does not change the relative posture with the first structure.
It is characterized by
D22. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second light emitting means is a movable means,
The first light emitting means is means located outside the movement range of the second light emitting means (for example, FIG. 69)
It is characterized by
D23. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A first drive means (e.g. 64b);
A second drive means (e.g. 35);
The first structure is movable by driving of the first driving means,
The second light emitting means is movable by driving of the second driving means.
It is characterized by
D24. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
A second structure (eg 203),
The movable body is a movable body located behind the second structure (for example, FIG. 71).
It is characterized by
D25. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a cover body (for example, 31),
The first light emitting means is a means that does not change the relative position with the cover body,
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position with the cover body.
It is characterized by
D26. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body overlapping the first light emitting means,
The cover body is a cover body overlapping with the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by
D27. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The movable body is a movable body having a display means (for example, 34),
The display means is means including the second light emitting means.
It is characterized by
D28. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The display means is means including a third light emitting means (eg, L11),
It is characterized by
D29. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The second light emitting means is a means that does not change the relative position with the third light emitting means.
It is characterized by
D30. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The display means is means capable of performing display in a state where the movable body is located at a position different from the initial position (for example, FIG. 70 (b) (c)).
It is characterized by
D31. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The display means is means capable of performing display when the movable body is at the initial position.
It is characterized by
D32. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body having a first portion (for example, 31a),
The first light emitting means is a means that does not change the relative position with the cover body,
The first portion is a portion overlapping with the first light emitting means,
The first site is at least a partially opaque site.
It is characterized by
D33. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The cover body is a cover body having a second portion (for example, 31b),
The second portion is a portion overlapping with the second light emitting means,
The second site is a transparent site,
It is characterized by
D34. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
The first light emitting means is a means that does not change the relative position with the first part (for example, any part of 30) of the first structure;
The second light emitting means is a means capable of changing the relative position to the first site,
It is characterized by
D35. The game console (for example, 100) of the above embodiment is
It is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by
D36. The game console of the above embodiment is
Is a slot machine,
It is characterized by

Embodiment C
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. First, the overall configuration of pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  75 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 74 viewed from the back side. The back of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and a ball tank 150 located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears the error by the operation of the game clerk A discharge substrate case 172 which accommodates a discharge substrate 170 having a C. 168. A discharge substrate which constitutes a discharge control section 630 which performs control processing on the discharge of the game ball 74 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. The outer rail 202 extends from the top to the right of the rendering device 206 so that the game ball can fly to the right playing area 124 of the gaming board 200 through the space between the top of the rendering device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. That is, the game area 124 holds the first lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206 as a decoration member as a path through which the released game balls flow down, and the decoration member as a path through which the shot game balls flow down And a second down flow path on the right side. In the following, hitting the gaming ball on the first lower route may be referred to as "left hitting", and hitting the game ball on the second flowing route may be referred to as "right hitting".

  In the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, the effect movable body 224 is disposed at the upper portion thereof, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display device 212 at the lower portion thereof. The second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special symbol holding lamp 218, the second special symbol holding lamp 220, and the high probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later. In FIG. 76, the effect movable body 224 is at an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect movable body 224 can not be viewed from the player at the initial position. ing. The effect movable body 224 moves in a plane (hereinafter, may be referred to as a display screen front plane) substantially parallel to the display screen of the decoration symbol display device 208 in front of the decoration symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). It can be done. The configuration and drive system of the effect movable body 224 will be described later with reference to the drawings.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within a display screen of, for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, four). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure change games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure change games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a first common drawing start opening 227, a second common drawing start opening 229, and a special drawing start opening 230; A special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and a variable winning opening 234 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entering the general winning openings 226 (the general winning opening 226 is winning). When it is determined that the dispensing device 152 is driven, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "prize balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rental balls" There is) and.

  The first common drawing start port 227 and the second common drawing start port 229 are configured with devices called gates or through chuckers for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. . In the present embodiment, the first blowout starting port 227 is disposed in the first-class lower route on the left side sandwiching the rendering device 206, and the second blowdown path on the right side sandwiching the rendering device 206 A figure starting port 229 is arranged. That is, in the present embodiment, the game ball can pass to the first flat figure starting port 227 by left hitting, and the game ball can pass to the second flat figure starting port 229 by right hitting. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed the first common drawing start opening 227 or the second common drawing start opening 229 does not discharge to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the first common drawing start opening 227 or the second common drawing start opening 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210. . In addition, in a period other than a predetermined period (for example, during the power support state, during super reach effect execution, during a big hit game), when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first blowout start port 227 The pachinko machine 100 uses the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the common pattern decorative symbol variation game with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as the award balls to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 start opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the second common view start opening 229. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 has the feather component 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and the ball can not enter during closing of the feather component 232a, and it is elected for common drawing fluctuation game, common drawing display device 210 When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 is started. The ball entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Since the second common drawing starting port 229 and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 below it are within the second flow down path on the right side across the rendering device 206, the 1st lower path down to the left side across the rendering device 206 The game ball which has advanced to does not pass through the second regular drawing start opening 229 or enter the special view 2 start opening 232. In addition, since the first common drawing starting port 229 and the special drawing 1 starting port 230 are in the first class lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206, the second down flow path on the right side across the rendering device 206 The advanced gaming ball does not pass through the first drawing start opening 227 or enter the special drawing 1 start opening 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the special view 1 start opening 230 of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 has a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. A ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball which has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (Special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning in any winning opening and start opening, or first common view start opening 227, second common view start opening 229 Only reach the out port 240 by passing through.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the non-rollable area of the game ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center part of the stage 244 is to the special figure 1 start opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit 318 (this circuit is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the open sensor and the bottom plate full sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Symbol display devices, such as a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common drawing display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222 Etc.), and control various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members such as the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 etc. A drive circuit 334 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Output 100 game information (for example, gaming state).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator signal 414 as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, the effect movable body 224, and the movable object 703 described later. A drive circuit 422 for performing drive control, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting current positions and initial positions of the effect movable body 224 and the movable object 703, and a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136; A predetermined detection sensor, for example, a sensor circuit 428 outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 or the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data are connected. ing. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 includes a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. . To the basic circuit, a drive circuit for controlling the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the special view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment are stopped and displayed using FIG. And explain the kind of common drawing. FIG. 78 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, and after this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" is started, the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 78 (a) shows ten types of special views from "special view A" to "special view J" as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 78 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" and "special figure B" are 15 round (15R) special big hit symbols, and "special figure C" and "special figure D" are 15R big hit symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the power support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). The power support state will be described in detail later, but the state transitioning to the power support state is referred to as a map-high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the power-sap state is referred to as a map-low probability state. 15R special big hit design "special figure A" and "special figure B" are special figure high probability popular figure high probability state, 15 special round pattern "special figure C" and "special figure D" are special Figure low probability It is a state of high probability. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", "special drawing C", and "special drawing D" are symbols whose degrees of advantage relative to the player are relatively large.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design and is called sudden change. Suddenly, after the big hit game is over, it becomes a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state similarly to the 15R special big hit symbol. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot design and is called a hidden probability change. Hidden probability changes become a special figure high probability spread map low probability state (latency definite change state) after the big hit game is over. Hidden probability does not shift to the power support state after the end of the big hit game.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol. After the small hit game is over, it becomes a special figure low probability common figure low probability state (may be referred to as a normal state or a normal gaming state). In the small hit game, the same number of times (two times in the case of the present embodiment) as the "special figure E" or the "special figure F" is released.

  In addition, “special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, which is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs lottery of whether or not it is a big hit in the determination of success or failure, and thereafter, based on the result of the determination of success or failure, "special figure A" after symbol variation display. It is configured to determine which one of the “special figure J” is to be displayed on the special view 1 or the special view 2 display device 212 or 214 in a stopped state. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped after the symbol variation display, thereby determining the number of rounds of big hit games and the profit status after the big hit games (for example, special figure probability change state The presence or absence of the power supply condition is automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to, for example, determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery separately from the determination of the stop symbol. In addition, while the pachinko machine 100 determines the stop symbol, for example, the number of rounds of the big hit game is automatically determined, while the state of profit after the big hit game is determined by lottery, the stop symbol, the number of rounds, and The profit state may be appropriately associated and configured.

  FIG. 78 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And when notifying the 15R big hit, 15R special big hit, the symbol combination where the same decorative pattern is lined up three in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-decoration" 2-Display the decoration 2 etc.). In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot, a symbol combination in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged (for example, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3", "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", etc.) Show stop.

  In addition, 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure F" hidden probability change, when notifying a small hit of "special figure G" and "special figure H", stop "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" indicate. Moreover, when notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure E", "display 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special drawing I" and "special drawing J", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 78 (b).

  In the present embodiment, the combination of decorative symbols and the type of big hit are uniquely decided, but it may be made incomprehensible to the player which combination of decorative symbols will be the big hit.

  FIG. 78 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. In the stop display mode of the common drawing of this embodiment, three kinds of “common drawing A,” which is a hit symbol 1, “common drawing B,” which is a hit symbol 2, and “common drawing C,” which is a detached symbol is there. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a hit is made in the common drawing change game and the determination of the stop symbol are performed by drawing of software random numbers. For example, the opening patterns of the special figure 2 start opening 232 (electric chew) are different in the hit symbols 1 and 2. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the first common drawing start port 227 or the second common drawing start port 229, the common drawing display device 210 lights up all seven segments, Perform the "variable display of a common figure" which repeats lighting of one central segment. Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "general diagram B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 78 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  FIG. 78 (d) shows an example of a decorative symbol for a normal symbol. There are three types of decorative symbols for ordinary symbols according to the present embodiment, “common figure decoration 1”, “common figure decoration 2”, and “common figure decoration 3”. The figurine decoration 1 has, for example, a symbol aspect reminiscent of "o", the figurine decoration 2 has a symbol aspect reminiscent of "o", for example, and the figurine decoration 3 has "x" for example It has a symbol form to evoke. On condition that a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the first bit map starting port 227 other than a predetermined period (for example, in the power support state, during super reach effect execution, during the big hit game) In the decorative symbol display device 208, a regular drawing decorative symbol variation game in which the display is switched in the order of "general drawing decoration 1" → "general drawing decoration 2" → "general drawing decoration 3" ... is played with a predetermined probability.

  In the case of informing the hit of "Plow map A", "Plow map decoration 1" is stopped and displayed, and in the case of the notification of "Put map B", "Plow drawing decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, In the case of notifying of the release of "Ptoko C", "Puroko 3" is stopped and displayed.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 79 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms (milliseconds) is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If the voltage is less than 9 V (in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generation for generating an initial value of a special figure determination random number value counter for generating a special figure determination random value used for a lottery for determining a stop symbol in special figure variation game Update the random number counter for Further, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a common drawing winning random number counter that generates a common drawing winning random value used for the success / failure determination of the common drawing fluctuation game is updated. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special drawing determination random number value counter and a random number counter for generating its initial value, and a common drawing winning random number value counter and a random number counter for generating the initial value. In step S115, the initial values of the two initial value generation random number counters are updated. For example, assuming that the possible numerical range of the initial value generation random number counter is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the initial value generation random number counter, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then the original initial value generation random number counter Remember to At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original initial value generation random number counter. The other initial value generation random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). Periodically (in this embodiment, once in about 2 ms, which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt), restart is performed.

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 77, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, previous detection signal present, and present detection signal present) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal) If there is a match with the information indicating that there is an entry) into the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, or It is determined that there has been a passage of the second common drawing start port 229. That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and these starting openings 230, 232, 227, 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated. In the random number for initial value generation of the main control unit main process of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, to generate an initial value of a random number counter for generating a random number for common drawing determination used in symbol determination lottery of common drawing The random number counter for generating the initial value of is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number for determining the common drawing is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number for common drawing determination provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is 1 Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In addition, in the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, a special drawing determination random number value counter for generating a special drawing determination random value, used in the main control unit 300, and a common drawing for generating a common drawing winning random value A winning random number counter and a random number determination counter for generating a random number for determining a general drawing are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value for special image determination is 0 to 99, the value is acquired from the special image determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 to generate the special image determination random value. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original random number value counter for special drawing determination. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number value counter for special image determination. Moreover, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the special figure determination random number value counter is in a circle, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random number value counter is acquired And set it to the special figure determination random number value counter. For example, a value is acquired from a random number value counter for special drawing determination that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special figure determination random number value counter, and the special figure determination random number value counter At the same time, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the special drawing determination random number value counter has made one revolution next. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the special figure determination random number value counter has made one turn next, the initial value storage for determining that the common drawing win random number value counter has made one round An area is provided in the RAM 308. The special figure determination random number value counter may be separately provided with a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 2 or the same counter May be used.

  Also, for example, when the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 65535, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and the acquired value is 1 Are stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 65536, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 65535, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value, the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for common generation prize random number generation, and the common generation prize random number value generation The initial value set at this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, while setting it in the random number counter.

  Also, for example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number for determining the common drawing is 0 to 99, the value obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number for common drawing determination provided in the RAM 308 is obtained Is added to 1 and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number for common drawing determination which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 If the stored initial value is equal to the previously set initial value, a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the common drawing determination random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a random number for common drawing determination is to make one revolution next while setting it in the random number counter for random number value generation. Keep it.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the value of the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value counter for generating the special drawing fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special drawing fluctuation game or the initial value thereof is updated. Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is, for example, 20000 ms in the common drawing low probability state, and is 1000 ms in the common drawing high probability state. The pachinko machine 100 may determine the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game by drawing using a predetermined table, and generates a random value value for common drawing fluctuation time determination for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the common drawing fluctuation game. It is also possible to update the value of the random number value counter for determining the common drawing fluctuation time or its initial value.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 227, 229 have a winning, the RAM 308 stores the number of winning balls provided for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the area is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this prize acceptance process, it is determined whether there is a prize in special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232, first common drawing starting port 227, second common drawing starting port 229 and variable winning opening 234 . Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When a special figure 1 start opening 230 has a prize, and the corresponding special figure 1 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserve number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) The jackpot determination random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230 of the (hard random number circuit) 318 is provided in the RAM 308 The special figure determination random number value is acquired from the special figure determination random number value counter and stored in the order of acquisition in the special figure 1 random number value storage area. The combination of the big hit determination random number value and the special figure determination random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area (hereinafter abbreviated as 'special figure 1 random number value set' or 'special figure 1 start information') is 1 is stored the same number as the special figure 1 pending number stored in the pending number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 reservations decreases, the data of the set of special figure 1 random number values with the highest priority (first and most stored) is At the same time as erasing is performed, the retention order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 random number value set is processed to be raised by one. In addition, every time the number of the Special Figure 1 suspension increases, the data of the new Special Figure 1 random number value pair is in the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value pair with the lowest retention order (last). Will be written.

  When there is a prize in special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full (in this example, it will be full with reserve number 4), random number value generation circuit While obtaining the big hit judgment random number value which is generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232 of 318, the big hit special purpose provided in the RAM 308 The random number value for big hit special figure determination is acquired from the figure determination random number value counter and stored in the order of acquisition in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Special figure 2 Random number value for big hit judgment and random number value for big hit special figure decision in the random number value memory area (Hereafter, it is abbreviated as “pair of special figure 2 random value value” or “special figure 2 start information”) Are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 pending number stored in the special figure 2 pending number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random number value pair of the highest retention order is erased and the remaining special figure 2 random number values It is processed so that the holding order of the data of the set is advanced by one. Also, every time the number of special drawing 2 reservations increases, data of a new special drawing 2 random number value pair is written in the next holding order of the data of the special drawing 2 random number value pair of the lowest holding order.

  If the first common drawing start port 227 or the second common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing win random number value counter is It is acquired as a figure winning random number value and stored in the corresponding common figure random number value storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the first common drawing hit flag is on, hit When the flag per second common drawing is on so that the display mode of symbol 1 (general drawing A) is on, the off flag is on so that the display mode is on hit 2 (general drawing B) The 7-segment LED that configures the display unit 210 is turned on / off to control the off-set symbol (general view C), and the off-set flag is turned off. The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is performed so as to be the display mode. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the above-mentioned lighting and extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that the common figure stop display is carried out to the setting field is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 confirms the display of any of the symbols 1 (common figure A), 2 (Fig. 78 common figure B), and the detached pattern (generally figure C). I do. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, either the first common drawing per flag or the second common drawing per flag is turned on based on the common drawing determination result. If the first and second common drawing hit flags are on, then the common drawing state update at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In the process, the general drawing operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and a solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 (a part of various solenoids 332) Outputs a signal for holding the blade member 232a in the open state, and sets information indicating the open period in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening and closing of the above, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off as described later. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. Whether the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number value stored in the above-mentioned common drawing random number storage area when Perform a hit determination (a pass / fail determination of a common drawing fluctuation game) to be determined. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the symbol is determined by random number lottery based on the random number for common drawing determination stored in the random number storage area. If the common drawing determination result is a hit 1 and the first common drawing flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and if the common drawing determination is a 2 and a second common drawing, the second common drawing provided in the RAM 308 Set the hit flag on. If the result of the hit determination is an out-of-profile, the out-of-layer out-of-plane outlier flag provided in the RAM 308 is set on. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing in the common drawing high probability state is 1000 ms, and the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing in the common drawing low probability state is 20000 ms. When the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing is determined by lottery, the value of the random number value counter for common drawing fluctuation time determination which generates the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired as a random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination, Based on the random value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time, one of the plurality of fluctuation times for displaying the common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and the fluctuation display time is selected as the common drawing fluctuation display time As a result, it is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special view 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing of the special figure 2 change start, the special figure 2 value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 reserve number stored in the special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 Restore in the pending count storage area. At the same time, it controls the blinking of the special view 2 holding lamp 220. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 in FIG. 76 are LED numbers 1-4 sequentially from left to right in the figure, for example, red LEDs for the special figure 2 hold number are arranged in ascending order of LED numbers. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is lit and Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A or B, 15R big hit flag shown in FIG. 78 (a) is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is In the case of special feature C or special feature D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special feature probability flag is on, the special figure The probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure F when the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure G when the first small hitting flag is on, the special figure H when the second small hitting flag is on. , Special figure I, when the first out flag is on 2 Turn on / off drive control of the 7-segment LEDs that make up the special view 2 display device 214 so that the special view J becomes each mode when the 2 out of line flag is on, and stop special view 2 in the setting area of the RAM 308 Make settings to indicate that it is being displayed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A, special figure B), 15R big hit symbol (special figure C, special figure D), a sudden definite figure (special figure E) , Hidden probability variation symbol (special figure F), first small hit symbol (special figure G), second small hit symbol (special figure H), first off symbol (special figure I), and first off symbol (special symbol J) Confirm display of any one symbol. Thereafter, in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of times of power assistance stored in the number of times of power assistance (details will be described later) stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of power assistance and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0 If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) The special area 2 is set in the setting area, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), ie, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit is displayed. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) The door member 234a is held in an open state by a solenoid for opening / closing driving of the door member 234a of the variable winning hole 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected in the variable winning hole 234. A signal is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of times of power support (for example, 100 times) is set in the number of times of power support stored in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. Turn on the short time flag provided in. If the common drawing probability change flag is set to OFF, the number of power support times is not set in the power support frequency storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Here, the time saving state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. At this time, when the short flag is set to on, the drawing is in a high probability state (general drawing probability change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The control state by these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu open-rolling is put together, and it is called the electric support (starting opening prize support by electric tulip) state. In addition, including the control state which shortens the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game, it calls time saving state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is larger than 0, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. The notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting opening 232 It is carried out prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the starting port 230 in FIG. In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 2 random number value group (starting information) is selected from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Acquire and decide whether to make a big hit or not using a judgment table (not shown), decide whether to make a small hit or not, and decide the time from the start of the variable display of the special figure 2 to the stop display After the change display of the special figure 2, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined. After taking out the first set of special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the storage of the special figure 2 random number value set in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and Subtract 1 from the number of reservations. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random number values is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second start information storage means) provided in the RAM 308 with the special figure 2 random number value set extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area. The above-described determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in the temporary area.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Further, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the special figure related In the case of the symbol change stop command, it includes information indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game selected in the lottery process, and includes the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc. is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds etc. There is. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning in special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in variable prize opening 234, etc. including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag value, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the variation time of the special figure variation game selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variation game or the special figure 2 variation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag value, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are pending etc Set the information indicating. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc pending Set the information indicating. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information). In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 79 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the pressing of the chance button.

  In step S313 following step S311, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315 following step S313, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S317 following step S315, when there is an instruction to the effect movable body 224 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S319 following step S317, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400, update processing of other effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the structure and operation of the effect movable body used in the pachinko machine 100 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. 82 to 102. FIG. FIG. 82 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front as in FIG. In FIG. 82, the presentation movable body 224 descends from an initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display screen front of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front. It shows a stopped state inside.

  The effect movable body 224 has, for example, a shape resembling a sword, and with respect to the rectangular opening frame which defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the blade points upward and the point of the sword is on the right side. The handle of the sword is located at. Maintaining this positional relationship, the effect movable body 224 can move up and down in the rectangular opening frame. In the initial position, the effect movable body 224 moves to the inside of the opening frame from the upper side of the opening frame and becomes invisible. In the maximum descent position of the effect movable body 224, the effect movable body 224 may be moved to the inner side of the opening frame from the lower side of the opening frame so as not to be visible.

  FIG. 83 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front as in FIG. In FIG. 83, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 82, and the movable object 703 imitating a blade is rotated counterclockwise about a central portion of the base 701 by a predetermined angle. Is shown.

  Next, the structure of the movable object unit of pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 84 and FIG. In the following description, with the pachinko machine 100 installed on an island facility of a game arcade, the side closer to the player is referred to as "front" (front, front, front end, etc.) and vice versa. , And the rear end, etc.), the upper side (upper, upper, upper end, etc.) of the player as viewed from the player, and vice versa (lower, lower, lower end, etc.) Seeing from the person, let the horizontal left side be "left" (left side, left side, left end, etc.), and vice versa "right" (right side, right side, right end, etc.). FIG. 84 is an appearance perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front side. FIG. 85 is an appearance perspective view of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a) show the case where the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position. In the movable object unit 700, the right drive system base 713 and the left drive system base 712 having elongated metal plates are opposed in the left and right direction, and the upper end of the right drive system base 713 and the upper end of the left drive system base 712 are connection members of elongated metal plates. It is connected at 710, and the lower end of the right drive system base 713 and the lower end of the left drive system base 712 are connected by a connecting member 711 of an elongated metal plate to be assembled in a rectangular frame shape.

  A guide member 717 having a cylindrical metal rod elongated along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) is fixed to the right drive system base 713. A motor mr is disposed at the lower end of the right drive system base 713, a gear gr1 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor mr, and a gear gr2 is engaged with the gear gr1. A pulley pr is disposed at the upper end of the right drive system base 713, and a belt vr is bridged between the pulley pr and the gear gr2. The belt vr is bridged in parallel with the direction in which the guide member 717 extends.

  A guided member 721 is attached slidably around a cylindrical metal rod of the guiding member 717. The guided member 721 is fixed to the belt vr. By driving the motor mr to move the belt vr, the guided member 721 fixed to the belt vr can be guided by the guiding member 717 to move up and down along the cylindrical member of the guiding member 717 . A movable body right end holding member (not shown) for holding the right end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 721.

  A guide member 715 having a cylindrical metal rod elongated along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) is fixed to the left drive system base 712. A motor ml is disposed at the lower end of the left drive system base 712, a gear gl1 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor ml, and a gear gl2 is engaged with the gear gl1. A pulley pl is disposed at the upper end of the left drive system base 712, and a belt vl is bridged between the pulley pl and the gear gl2. The belt vl is stretched in parallel with the direction in which the guide member 715 extends.

  A guided member 719 is attached slidably around the cylindrical metal rod of the guiding member 715. The guided member 719 is fixed to the belt vl. By driving the motor ml to move the belt vl, the guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl can be guided by the guiding member 715 to move up and down along the cylindrical member of the guiding member 715 . A movable body left end holding member (not shown) for holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 is detachably attached to the guided member 719.

  At the right end of the effect movable body 224, a motor 723 for rotating the movable object 703 with the central portion of the base 701 as the center of rotation is fixed. 84 (b) and 85 (b) show a state in which the right drive system and the left drive system cooperate and synchronously move the effect movable body 224 downward from the initial position by a predetermined distance. There is. In FIG. 84 (c) and FIG. 85 (c), the movable object 703 is rotationally moved in a state where the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 84 (b) and FIG. It shows the state.

  FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view (portion) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. Although illustration is omitted, the same configuration is provided in the right drive system of the movable object unit 700. A box-like region is provided in the guided member 719 fixed to the belt vl and slidably holding the guiding member 715, and the box-like region is orthogonal to the sliding direction of the guided member 719 in the box-like region. A claw portion 725 which can be projected by a predetermined distance in the direction of movement is accommodated. The tip of the claw portion 725 is formed in a hook shape. Further, an upper end portion of the tip end of the claw portion 725 is formed with an inclined surface which can come in contact with a pin 729 described later. A spring 723 in contact with the rear end of the claw portion 725 is disposed in the box-like region. By the action of the spring 723, the claw portion 725 is always biased in the projecting direction. The box-like region accommodates the claw portion 725 and the spring 723 and is closed by the lid member 727.

  A movable body left end holding member 731 for holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 is slidably mounted on the lower side of the guided member 719 on the guide member 715. The movable body left end holding member 731 is formed with a hook portion 731 a whose tip end is engageable with the hook portion 725 of the guided member 719.

  With the movable body left end holding member 731 holding the left end of the effect movable body 224 positioned at the lowermost end of the guide member 715, when the motor ml is rotated in a predetermined direction to move the belt vl, guided When the member 719 is lowered, the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 can be engaged. Thereby, the movable body left end holding member 731 can be connected to the guided member 719. When the motor ml is rotated in the other direction to move the belt vl and the guided member 719 is lifted after the engagement is completed, the movable body left end holding member 731 connected to the guided member 719 is also lifted together. By driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 similarly, the effect movable body 224 located at the lowermost end can be pulled up.

  A pin 729 protrudes and is fixed at a position above the left drive system base 712 by a predetermined distance above the initial position of the effect movable body 224 and in contact with the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the to-be-guided member 719 rises beyond the initial position and brings the claw 725 into contact (collision) with the pin 729, the pin 729 moves the claw 725 by a predetermined amount in a direction to be pushed toward the box member. As a result, the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 can be separated. By driving the right drive system of the movable object unit 700 in the same manner, the effect movable body 224 located at the top can be freely dropped.

  In order to return the effect movable body 224 to the initial position, the guided member 719 is moved to the movable body left end holding member 731 located at the lowermost end to engage the claw portion 725 and the claw portion 731a. Can be moved to the upper position, and the same operation can be performed in synchronization with the right drive system to move the effect movable body 224 to the initial position.

  FIG. 87A is an exploded perspective view (portion) of the left drive system of the movable object unit 700 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIGS. 87 (b) to (d) show the circular portion of FIG. 87 (a) in an enlarged manner. The engagement cancellation operation | movement of the nail | claw part 725 and the nail | claw part 731a by the pin 729 is demonstrated using FIG.87 (b)-(d). FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which the guided member 719 holding the movable body left end holding member 731 is moved upward by a predetermined distance from the initial position by driving of the drive system. The claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 are engaged. In addition, the bottom of the pin 729 is in contact with the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719. When the guided member 719 moves further upward, the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 so that the claw portion 725 engages with the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 Are moved in the direction to eliminate

  In FIG. 87 (c), the guided member 719 moves further upward, and the bottom of the fixed pin 729 pushes the upper slope of the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 to engage the claw portion 725 with the claw portion 731a. Indicates that the condition has been resolved.

  In FIG. 87 (d), the engagement between the claw portion 725 of the guided member 719 and the claw portion 731a of the movable body left end holding member 731 is released, and the guided member 719 and the movable body left end holding member 731 are separated and movable. The left end holding member 731 is shown in the middle of free fall.

  FIG. 88 is a front view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 88 (a) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is in the initial position not displaced relative to the base 701. FIG. FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which the movable object 703 is displaced counterclockwise about a central portion of the base portion 701 by a predetermined angle. For driving the movable object 703, a drive system including a motor 723 and pulleys and belts (not shown) is used. FIG. 88 (c) shows the movable object 703 rotated counterclockwise by the maximum angle. The movable object 703 is provided with an LED substrate inside, and can perform effects by making the LED emit light.

  FIG. 89 is an external perspective view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. A belt vc is bridged between a gear gc for transmitting the rotation of a motor 723 (not shown) at the right end of the base 701 and a gear (not shown) rotatably fixed to the central portion 703c of the base 701. A movable object 703 is connected to the gear of the central portion 703c. By rotating the motor 723, the belt vc is driven to rotate the gear of the central portion 703 c, whereby the movable object 703 can be rotationally moved relative to the base 701.

  On the left side of the central portion 703c of the base 701, a photosensor 740 in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are disposed opposite to each other via a space portion 740a is disposed. The photo sensor 740 includes a light emitting element and a light receiving element which are disposed to face each other with the space portion 740 a interposed therebetween. The light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown in FIG. 89) are directed to the space portion 740 a so that the light path from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion becomes horizontal with the pachinko machine 100 installed in an island facility etc. It is arranged. For example, a black resin with a predetermined width behind the light receiving element so that the light emitted from the decorative symbol display device 208 positioned behind the effect movable body 224 does not enter the light receiving portion of the light receiving element of the photosensor 740 The light impermeable member used is provided. In this example, a wall 740 b behind the light receiving element of a part of the housing of the photo sensor 740 is used as a light impermeable member.

  In the vicinity of the photo sensor 740, a shutter 750 having a light shielding piece 750c is attached which shields light from entering the space 740a of the photo sensor 740 and emitted from the light emitting element so as not to be received by the light receiving element. The shutter 750 is rotatably fixed at the rotation center 750 a. On the opposite side of the light shielding piece 750c with respect to the rotation center 750a, a protruding piece abutting portion 750b capable of coming into contact with the protruding piece 703s provided on the movable object 703 is provided. The rotation center 750 a is internally provided with a spring mechanism (not shown), and the spring mechanism urges the shutter 750 so that the light shielding piece 750 c does not enter the space 740 a of the photosensor 740 unless an external force is applied. It is done. When the projecting piece 703s abuts against the projecting piece abutting portion 750b and presses, the light shielding piece 750c enters the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. In the vicinity of the shutter 750, the lid member 701a is attached to the base portion 701 for protection.

  In this embodiment, the photosensor 740 detects the presence or absence of the light shielding piece 750c, and the first auxiliary control unit 400 determines that the movable object 703 is at the initial position when the photosensor 740 detects the light shielding piece 750c. When the photosensor 740 does not detect the light shielding piece 750c, it is determined that the movable object 703 is at a position other than the initial position.

  FIG. 90 is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 91 (a) is an external perspective view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. 91 (b) to (d) show the circular part of FIG. 91 (a) in an enlarged manner. The operation of the projecting piece 703s and the shutter 750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 and 91 (b) to 91 (d). FIGS. 90 (a) and 91 (b) show a state where the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. In the initial position of the movable object 703, the projection piece 703s abuts against the projection contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 to push up the projection contact portion 750b, so that the light shielding piece 750c descends to the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. It is entering. In this state, the photosensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIGS. 90 (b) and 91 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 has been rotated a predetermined angle from the initial position about the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s is also rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. For this reason, the projecting piece 703 s separates from the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since no pressing force acts on the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b, the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b descends due to the biasing force of the spring and the light shielding piece 750 c ascends and withdraws from the space portion 740 a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photosensor 740 can not detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIGS. 90 (c) and 91 (d) show a state in which the movable object 703 rotates at a maximum angle from the initial position about the central portion 703c and comes into contact with the mechanical end and stops. Since the projection piece 703s is separated from the projection contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 and no pressing force is applied to the projection contact portion 750b, the projection contact portion 750b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring to maintain the stopped state. At the same time, the light shielding piece 750c is also lifted and maintained in the state of being withdrawn from the space 740a of the photo sensor 740. The photo sensor 740 can not detect the light shielding piece 750 c.

  FIG. 92 shows a rear view and a partial cross-sectional view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 92 (a) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 90 (a). FIG. 92 (b) shows a cross section taken along the line A-A of FIG. 92 (a), and FIG. 92 (c) shows a partially enlarged cross section of FIG. 92 (b). FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c) show a state in which the movable object 703 is stopped at the initial position. In the initial position of the movable object 703, the projection piece 703s abuts against the projection contact portion 750b of the shutter 750 to push up the projection contact portion 750b, so that the light shielding piece 750c descends to the space portion 740a of the photo sensor 740. It is entering. In this state, the photosensor 740 can detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  FIG. 92 (d) is a rear view of the effect movable body 224 according to the present embodiment, and is similar to FIG. 90 (b). FIG. 92 (e) shows a cross section taken along the line B-B in FIG. 92 (d), and FIG. 92 (f) shows a partially enlarged cross section of FIG. 92 (e). FIGS. 92 (d) to 92 (f) show a state where the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. When the movable object 703 is rotated by a predetermined angle, the protruding piece 703s is also rotated by a predetermined angle from the initial position around the central portion 703c. For this reason, the projecting piece 703 s separates from the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b of the shutter 750. Since no pressing force acts on the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b, the projecting piece abutting portion 750 b descends due to the biasing force of the spring and the light shielding piece 750 c ascends and withdraws from the space portion 740 a of the photo sensor 740. In this state, the photosensor 740 can not detect the light shielding piece 750c.

  93 to 96 schematically show cross sections of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the effect movable body 224 will be described using FIG. 93 to FIG. The effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 93 to FIG. 96 show a state in which the game board 200 is viewed horizontally from left to right. In FIG. 93 (a), the display movable area 224 as the first means is stopped at the initial position, and the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the second means arranged behind the display movable body 224. Shows a state in which light is emitted forward from. A photosensor 740 is disposed on the base 701 of the effect movable body 224. The photosensor 740 has a pair of wall portions disposed opposite to each other with a space portion 740a formed to have a predetermined width in the horizontal front-rear direction. A light emitting element 740c is disposed on the front wall of the pair of walls, and a light receiving element 740d is disposed on the rear wall 740b. In the wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is disposed, at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b functions as a light impermeable member as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light impermeable member. Further, a movable object 703 is provided on the effect movable body 224 as a fourth means. In addition, since the effect movable body 224 is at the initial position and the movable object 703 is also at the initial position, the light shielding piece 750c of the shutter 750 projects in the vertical direction to the space 740a to shield the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c. Therefore, the light receiving element 740d does not detect light exceeding the predetermined threshold intensity.

  The effect movable body 224 is an initial position (first position) not overlapping with the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position overlapping with at least part of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction The second position can be moved.

  In this example, although the example in which the effect movable body 224 can move the linear trajectory in the vertical direction is shown, the effect movable body 224 is not limited to the linear trajectory and moves the trajectory including the trajectory including the curve or the arc. It may be possible, and it may be movable in the lateral direction or in the oblique direction without being limited to the vertical direction. Further, the effect movable body 224 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, and can emit light while the movable object 703 is moving. May be

  Further, the photo sensor 740 detects whether the movable object 703 is at the initial position based on whether the light receiving element 740 d receives the light from the light emitting element 740 c. When the movable object 703 is in the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c is blocked by the light shielding piece 750c and can not be received by the light receiving element 740d, and when the movable object 703 moves, the light from the light emitting element 740c Since the light is not blocked by the light shielding piece 750c, the light receiving element 740d can receive light. When the movable object 703 is at the initial position, the light from the light emitting element 740c can be received by the light receiving element 740d without being blocked by the light shielding piece 750c, and when the movable object 703 moves, the light emitting element 740c Of the light may be blocked by the light shielding piece 750c so that the light receiving element 740d can not receive light.

  The light blocking piece 750 c of the shutter 750 changes the position in accordance with the movement of the movable object 703. In this example, the shutter 750 is provided separately from the movable object 703, but the movable object 703 and the light shielding piece 750c may be integrally provided. In addition, the reflectance of at least part or all of the surface of the light shielding piece 750c may be lower than the reflectance of at least part or all of the surface of the effect movable body 224 (it is difficult to reflect light).

  The movable object 703 can move in a range including the third position (initial position) and the fourth position (moving position). In this example, the center portion 703c is rotationally moved about the rotation axis, and the degree of overlapping with the base portion 701 of the effect movable body 224 is smaller at the fourth position than at the third position. That is, the movable object 703 is more likely to protrude from the base 701. Further, the movable object 703 has a light emitting substrate (LED substrate), can emit light at any position, can emit light even while the movable object 703 is moving, and can emit light while the effect movable body 224 is moving, The light emission mode may be different between the third position and the fourth position.

  In FIG. 93 (b), the effect movable body 224 moves downward from the initial position as shown by the arrow, and is positioned in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the effect movable body 224. Show the condition. Light is emitted forward from the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as illustrated. The light emitted from the decorative symbol display device 208 illuminates the effect movable body 224 located in the front from the rear, but the rear wall 740b of the pair of walls of the photosensor 740 is at least a region behind the light receiving element 740b Functions as a light impermeable member. In this manner, a part of the members constituting the photo sensor 740 is positioned behind the light receiving element 740 d as a light impermeable member, thereby preventing the light receiving element 740 d from receiving the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 can do.

  In FIG. 94, the movable object 703 rotates about the rotation axis of the central portion 703c from the state of FIG. 93 (b), and the movable object 224 is more than the position (third position) shown in FIG. 93 (b). It shows a state where it has moved to the fourth position where the degree of overlap with the base 701 is small. When the movable object 703 rotates a predetermined amount, as described with reference to FIGS. 91 (b) to (d), the movable piece 703 contacts the projecting piece abutting portion 750b of the shutter 750 and presses the projecting piece abutting portion 750b. Since the protruding piece 703 s moves, the protruding piece abutting portion 750 b is lowered by the biasing force of the spring and the light shielding piece 750 c is raised and retreats from the space portion 740 a of the photo sensor 740. Thus, the light emitted from the light emitting element 740c is received by the light receiving element 740d.

  FIG. 95 is a view schematically showing a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modification of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. In the photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 95A, the light receiving element 740d is disposed on the front wall of the pair of wall portions, and the light emitting element 740c is disposed on the rear wall 740b. By doing this, when the movable object 703 is at the initial position, the light-impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 including the light emitting element 740c and the light shielding piece 750c are located behind the light receiving element 740b. In some cases, the light from the symbol display device 208 can be prevented from being received by the light receiving element 740b.

  The photosensor 740 of the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 95 (b) has a pair of wall portions disposed opposite to each other with a space portion 740a formed to have a predetermined width in the vertical direction. A light emitting element 740c is disposed on the lower wall portion of the pair of wall portions, and a light receiving element 740d is disposed on the upper wall portion 740b. In the wall portion 740b in which the light receiving element 740d is disposed, a region behind the light receiving element 740b functions as a light impermeable member as a third means. Note that the entire housing of the photosensor 740 may be a light impermeable member. The light shielding piece 750 c is configured to move in the horizontal longitudinal direction as the movable object 703 moves from the initial position. By doing this, since the wall 740b made of the light impermeable resin member of the photosensor 740 including the light receiving element 740d is located behind the light receiving element 740d, the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 can be further received. In some cases, it may be difficult for 740d to receive light. In addition, since the direction of the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 and the direction of the light from the light emitting element 740 c are orthogonal to each other, it may be difficult to make the light receiving element 740 d receive the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 is there.

  FIG. 96 schematically shows a cross section of a region including the effect movable body 224 and the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the present embodiment, and shows a modification of the configuration of the effect movable body 224. As shown in FIG. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIGS. 96 (a) to 96 (c) has, for example, the same structure as the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 93, and as a third means, a thin plate separate from the photosensor 740. It is characterized in that a light impermeable member 760 is provided. The light impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 96A is arranged to cover at least the rear of the photosensor 740 on the rear side of the base 701. The light impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 96 (b) is arranged to cover at least the rear and the lower of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side and the lower side of the base 701. The light impermeable member 760 shown in FIG. 96C is arranged to cover at least the rear and upper and lower sides of the photo sensor 740 on the rear side and upper and lower sides of the base 701. By arranging such a light impermeable member 760 at least in the rear of the photo sensor 740, it may be possible to prevent the light from the decorative symbol display device 208 from entering the light receiving element 740 d more reliably. The light impermeable member 760 is not limited to a thin plate, and may be, for example, a light shielding film coated at least on the rear of the photo sensor 740 on the rear surface of the base 701.

  Next, the rendering operation of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 shows effects and the like in the special view 1 fluctuation game. FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 substantially in chronological order in this order. In each of FIGS. 97 (a), (c) to (f) and (h), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. The device 212, the special view 2 display 214, the general view holding lamp 216, the special view 1 holding lamp 218, and the special view 2 holding lamp 220 are shown extracted. FIG. 97 (b) shows that the game ball passes through the first common drawing start port 227. FIG. 97 (g) shows a state in which the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 is opened to the left and right.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, from the top, the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, and the special figure 2 hold number display area a3. , And the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the number-of-progress hold number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing are arranged. In addition, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reservation number display area 801. From the center to the right of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 hold number display area. A central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 which performs common drawing effect display or variable icon display.

  FIG. 97 (a) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. It shows the state in which the display is being performed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbol moves downward from above (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is halted, the special figure 2 indicatory device 214, for example the 1st off hand design “special figure I” is halted and displayed as a halted symbol aspect. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variation game is being stopped is displayed. Further, the common drawing variation game is being stopped, and the common drawing display device 210 is stopped and displayed, for example, the removal symbol “common drawing C” as a stop symbol aspect. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed.

  In the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, three LEDs are turned on, and it is shown that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is "3". Further, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three reserve indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is three. Further, a number "3" indicating the number of reservations of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display area a1. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for informing the prefetch result of the special figure 1, and for example, a character image of "爺" is displayed. The second and third hold displays h2 and h3 are normal hold displays, for example, a black circle image is displayed.

  The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 shows that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is “0”. In the special symbol 2 pending number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, no pending display is shown and it is shown that the pending number of the special figure 2 is zero. In addition, in the special figure 2 reserve number display area a 3, a number “0” indicating the reserve number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general drawing reserve lamp 216 indicates that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations in the common drawing is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 does not display a general drawing effect display or a variable icon display, and a default display is performed. In the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "0" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows that three game balls have passed continuously through the first drawing start opening 227.

  FIG. 97 (c) is the first time that three game balls pass through the first regular drawing start port 227 as shown in FIG. 97 (b) during the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. 97 (a). Shows the state in which the 図 変 動 game has been started. The common drawing display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the ordinary drawing decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbols of the three common drawings shown in FIG. 78 (d) sequentially move from the top to the bottom (in the figure , Indicated by the downward arrow). In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being executed is displayed. Two LEDs are turned on in the common drawing holding lamp 216, which indicates that the number of holdings in the common drawing is "2". Further, in the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a number "2" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (d) shows, for example, as a stop symbol aspect in the common drawing display device 210 when the common drawing change game shown in FIG. 97 (c) is ended during the special drawing 1 changing game shown in FIG. 97 (a). A state in which the out-of-design symbol "P" C is stopped is displayed. In addition, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a common drawing decoration 3 (for example, an image representing a cross mark) indicating that the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out during the common drawing stop period is stopped and displayed It is done. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (e) shows a state in which a second regular game variation game has been started during the special figure 1 variation game shown in FIG. 97 (a). The common drawing display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the ordinary drawing decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbols of the common drawing are sequentially moved from the top to the bottom. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being executed is displayed. In the common view holding lamp 216, one LED is turned on, and it is shown that the number of holdings in the common view is “1”. Further, in the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "1" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  FIG. 97 (f) shows, for example, as a stop symbol aspect in the common drawing display device 210 when the common drawing change game shown in FIG. 97 (e) is ended during the special drawing 1 changing game shown in FIG. 97 (a). The hit symbol “P [Figure] B” is in the state of being stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the common drawing decoration 2 (for example, an image representing a double circle) indicating that the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is hit during the common drawing stop period is stopped It is displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed. In the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, around the special effect area 803, an effect image g1 at the time of winning the common drawing is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (f), when it is won in the common view fluctuating game, as shown in FIG. 97 (g), the power tw-opened state in which the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 is opened to the left and right.

  FIG. 97 (h) shows an example of the effect performed when the special view 2 start port 232 is in the open state shown in FIG. 97 (g). In the special effect area 803, a character image of "Tono" indicating that the electric chow is open is displayed, and in the balloon area indicating the speech of the ton, for example, a tutorial (game console explanation) image g2 of "during electric chop open!" Is displayed It is done. As described above, in the present example, the common drawing effect display corresponding to the common drawing fluctuation game as shown in FIG. 97 is performed.

  FIG. 98 shows effects and the like in the special view 1 fluctuation game. FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. In each of FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (h), the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the game board 200 shown in FIG. 76, the common view display device 210, the special view 1 display 212, and the special view 2 display Shown in 214 are the general drawing holding lamp 216, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, and the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220.

  In the vicinity of the left vertical side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, from the top, the special figure 1 hold number display area a1, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area a2, and the special figure 2 hold number display area a3. , And the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the number-of-progress hold number display area a5, and the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing are arranged. In addition, the left side from the center of the lower side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 1 reservation number display area 801. From the center to the right of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special figure 2 hold number display area. A central portion of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a special effect area 803 which performs common drawing effect display or variable icon display.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212, “special view J” of the second out-of-process symbol is stop-displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decorative 5-decorative 3-decorative 4" indicating disengaging is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped. In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is halted, the special figure 2 indicatory device 214, for example the 1st off hand design “special figure I” is halted and displayed as a halted symbol aspect. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, a display indicating that the special figure 2 variation game is being stopped is displayed. Further, the common drawing variation game is being stopped, and the common drawing display device 210 is stopped and displayed, for example, the removal symbol “common drawing C” as a stop symbol aspect. Further, in the fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing, a display indicating that the common drawing fluctuation game is being stopped is displayed. In addition, the special effect area 803 does not display a general drawing effect display or a variable icon display, and a default display is performed.

  In the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, three LEDs are turned on, and it is shown that the number of reservations in special figure 1 is "3". Further, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, three reserve indications h1 to h3 are displayed, and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is three. Further, a number "3" indicating the number of reservations of the special drawing 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display area a1. The first and second hold displays h1 and h2 of the special figure 1 hold count display area 801 are normal hold displays, for example, a black circle image is displayed. The third hold display h3 is a prefetch hold display for notifying of the prefetch result of the special view 1, and for example, a character image of "爺" is displayed.

  The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 shows that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is “0”. In the special symbol 2 pending number display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, no pending display is shown and it is shown that the pending number of the special figure 2 is zero. In addition, in the special figure 2 reserve number display area a 3, a number “0” indicating the reserve number of the special figure 2 is displayed.

  The general drawing reserve lamp 216 indicates that all the LEDs are turned off, and the number of reservations in the common drawing is “0”. In addition, the special effect area 803 does not display a general drawing effect display or a variable icon display, and a default display is performed. In the common drawing reservation number display area a5 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number "0" indicating the reservation number of common drawing is displayed.

  FIG. 98 (b) shows that the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, and the special figure 1 display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. It shows the state in which the display is being performed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in which the decorative symbol moves downward from above (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Since the suspension of the special figure 1 decreases by one with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, two LEDs are lit on the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, and the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is "2" It is shown. In addition, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, two reserve indications h1 and h2 are displayed, and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is two. Further, a number "2" indicating the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 number-of-retentions display area a1. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a normal hold display, and the second hold display h2 is a prefetch hold display for notifying of the prefetching result of the special view 1. In the special effect area 803 at the center of the lower horizontal side of the rectangular display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation icon is displayed by the black circle image as if the digested hold had moved.

  FIG. 98 (c) shows a state in which a default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the special view 1 change game.

  FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c. ing.

  In FIG. 98 (e), the decoration 4 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is the decoration symbol It shows a state in which the variable display is performed.

  FIG. 98 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212, “special view J” of the second out-of-process symbol is stop-displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 7” indicating stoppage is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped.

  FIG. 98 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 display device 212 is performing the variation display of the special figure 1 while the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Since one reserve of special figure 1 decreases with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, one LED lights on special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the number of reserve of special figure 1 is "1". It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 reserve number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, one reserve indication h1 is displayed and it is shown that the reserve number of the special figure 1 is one. Further, in the special figure 1 pending number display area a1, a numeral "1" indicating the pending number of the special figure 1 is displayed. The first hold display h1 of the special figure 1 hold number display area 801 is a prefetch hold display for notifying of the prefetch result of the special figure 1. In the special effect area 803, an image of a black circle is displayed as if the saved reserve has moved.

  FIG. 98 (h) shows a state in which the default image is displayed in the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the special view 1 change game. Further, the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c show the state where the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 99 shows effects etc. in the special view 1 fluctuation game. FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (h) show the operation of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order in this order. The state shown in FIG. 99 (a) continues from the state shown in FIG. 98 (h).

  In FIG. 99 (a), the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the decoration 5 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b is the decoration pattern. The normal reach state in which the variable display is performed is shown.

  FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212, “special view J” of the second out-of-process symbol is stop-displayed as a stop symbol mode. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5" indicating disengaging is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped.

  FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is being performed, and the special view 1 display device 212 performs the change display of the special view 1. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbols is performed. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. Since the reserve of special figure 1 decreases one with the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, all LEDs turn off in special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the number of reserve of special figure 1 is “0” It is shown. Further, in the special figure 1 pending number display area 801 of the decorative symbol display device 208, no pending display is shown and it is shown that the pending number of the special figure 1 is zero. Further, a number "0" indicating the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is displayed in the special drawing 1 number-of-retentions display area a1. In the special effect area 803 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fluctuation icon is displayed by the image of "爺" as if the reserved hold had moved. Further, in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message of “press the button!” And an image imitating the chance button 136 are used to display a button press indication. In addition, a button reception period display image showing a period for receiving pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 or the button acceptance period elapses within the remaining time shown in the button acceptance period display image, as shown in FIG. 99 (d), the image simulating the day circle is the special figure 1 fluctuation game It is displayed as a notice image for giving notice of the result of. The decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  In FIG. 99 (e), the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the decoration 7 is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and only the middle symbol display device 208b performs the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol. The normal reach state is shown.

  FIG. 99 (f) shows a state in which the normal reach has evolved to the super reach. The left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and most of the display area is used as an effect display area. In the present example, a super reach image in which a samurai is shouting "It's a game!" Is displayed.

  In FIG. 99 (g), the samurai wins the game and the character "win" is displayed, and "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. Show the situation.

  FIG. 99 (h) shows the big hit when the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, which is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right corner of the display area, moves to the center of the display area to show a big hit. 7 ”is shown enlarged and stopped. In addition, in the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, there is a display indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being stopped. As described above, in the present example, the special figure effect display corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 is performed.

  FIG. 100 shows an example of effects by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 100A illustrates a time setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 100 (b) exemplifies an effect setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 100 (c) exemplifies a volume setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 100 (d) illustrates a luminance setting display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The player can make various settings for the pachinko machine 100 through the screens shown in FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (d).

  FIG. 100 (e) exemplifies a hit display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The central large screen of the display area is used for the effect display area, and in this example, a hit display image is displayed in which a warrior on a horse is moving on a mountain path. Around the display area, for example, a special big hit image of a number “7” indicating that the big hit is a special big hit is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, an acquired sphere number display image is displayed on the upper side portion of the display area (in this example, "80 spheres" is displayed). In addition, a round number display image is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area (in this example, "1R" is displayed). In the lower right corner, a display image showing the number of times of big hit (the number of times of continuous play) is displayed (in this example, “the number of times of big hit: 1” is displayed).

  FIG. 100 (f) exemplifies a display screen during power support displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure variation game is performed at the time of the power support state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c at the center of the display area. When in the power support state, the player should make a right hit to pass many gaming balls through the second flat view starting port 229 and make the special view 2 starting port 232 win many gaming balls. For this reason, with the variable display of the decorative symbol as the background display, the direction of launch by the arrow clockwise with the character string "I hit right!" And the enlarged game ball in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Suggestions are shown. In the special effect area 803, a fluctuation icon is displayed by the image of the normal suspension of the special view 2, and further, one normal suspension display h4 is displayed in the special view 2 suspension display area.

  FIG. 100 (g) illustrates a demo display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the character string "Daito" is displayed. FIG. 100H illustrates an error display screen displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a door open error screen and a counter full error screen are displayed.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (j), as shown in FIG. 82, the effect movable body 224 is from the initial position above the upper side of the rectangular opening frame that defines the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being lowered and being stopped in the front plane of the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 97 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (a), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special item 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area reserve display, special At least a part of the common figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 of the common drawing is not hidden by the effect movable body 224. Special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, fourth symbol display area a2 of special figure 1, special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, fourth symbol display area a4 of special figure 2, common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is configured not to be hidden by the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 97 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (b), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special item 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area reserve display, special At least a part of the electric chow open display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 is made to be hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (c) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (c), the stop display of the decorative symbol in any of the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 or the special view 2 hold count display area The default display in the special effect area 803 is such that at least a portion is hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (d) shows a state in which part of the display area is hidden by the effect movable body 224 when the image shown in FIG. 99 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (d), stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 or the special view 2 hold count display area, special effect The default display in the area 803 is to at least partially hide the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (e) shows a state in which part of the display area is hidden by the effect movable body 224 when the image shown in FIG. 99 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (e), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, and the button pressing suggestion display and the button acceptance period display image , And at least a part of the effect movable body 224 is hidden.

  FIG. 101 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (f), the variation display of the decoration symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the notice image are at least partially by the effect movable body 224. To be hidden.

  FIG. 101 (g) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides a part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 99 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (g), at least a part of the super reach image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the variation display of the decorative symbols of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (h) shows a state in which part of the display area is hidden by the effect movable body 224 when the image shown in FIG. 100 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (h), at least a part of the hit display image and the big hit count display image is hidden by the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the number-of-rounds display image are not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 101 (i) shows a state in which the effect movable body 224 hides part of the display area when the image shown in FIG. 100 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (i), at least a part of the display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c and the display screen during power support are hidden by the effect movable body 224. There is.

  FIG. 101 (j) shows a state in which part of the display area is hidden by the effect movable body 224 when the image shown in FIG. 100 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (j), at least a part of the variation display of the decoration symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c and the error fill-in screen are made to be hidden by the effect movable body 224. . On the other hand, the door open error screen is not hidden by the effect movable body 224.

  FIG. 102 shows an example of effect using the effect movable body 224 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each of FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (j), as shown in FIG. 83, the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. It shows a state of being rotated counterclockwise by the maximum angle with the central portion as the center of rotation.

  In FIG. 102 (a), when the image shown in FIG. 97 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (a), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special item 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area reserve display, special At least a part of the common figure stop symbol display in the effect area 803 and the effect image g1 is made to be hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, the fourth symbol display area a2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, the fourth symbol display area a4 of the special figure 2, the common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 of the general drawing is not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Special figure 1 reservation number display area a1, fourth symbol display area a2 of special figure 1, special figure 2 reservation number display area a3, fourth symbol display area a4 of special figure 2, common drawing reserve number display area a5, The fourth symbol display area a6 in the figure is configured so as not to be hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224 regardless of the type of effect.

  In FIG. 102 (b), when the image shown in FIG. 97 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (b), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the special item 1 reserve number display area 801 or the special figure 2 reserve number display area reserve display, special At least a part of the electric chew open display in the effect area 803 and the tutorial image g2 is made to be hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  In FIG. 102 (c), when the image shown in FIG. 99 (a) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (c), the stop display of the decorative symbol in any of the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 or the special view 2 hold count display area The default display in the special effect area 803 is such that at least a portion is hidden by the base 701 or the movable object 703 of the effect movable body 224.

  In FIG. 102 (d), when the image shown in FIG. 99 (b) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (d), stop display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, hold display of the special view 1 hold count display area 801 or the special view 2 hold count display area, special effect The default display in the area 803 is to at least partially hide the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  In FIG. 102 (e), when the image shown in FIG. 99 (c) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (e), the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation icon display in the special effect area 803, and the button pressing suggestion display and the button acceptance period display image At least a part of the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703 is hidden.

  In FIG. 102 (f), when the image shown in FIG. 99 (d) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (f), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the default display in the special effect area 803, and the notice image are the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or At least a part of the movable object 703 is concealed by the movable object 703.

  FIG. 102 (g) shows a part of the display area of base part 701 of movable object 224 or movable object 703 when the image shown in FIG. 99 (f) is displayed in the display area of decorative symbol display device 208. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (g), at least a portion of the super reach image is hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. On the other hand, the variation display of the decoration symbols of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area is not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  In FIG. 102 (h), when the image shown in FIG. 100 (e) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (h), at least a part of the hit during display image and the big hit count display image is hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. On the other hand, the special jackpot image, the acquired ball number display image, and the round number display image are not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

  In FIG. 102 (i), when the image shown in FIG. 100 (f) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (i), at least one of the variation display of the decoration symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c and the display screen during power support is at least one by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. I try to hide the department.

  In FIG. 102 (j), when the image shown in FIG. 100 (h) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display area is the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. Shows the state of hiding. In the example shown in FIG. 102 (j), the variation display of the decoration symbols in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and the full screen error screen are at least partially by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703. To be hidden. On the other hand, the door opening error screen is not hidden by the base 701 of the effect movable body 224 or the movable object 703.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 102 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine 100) equipped with a plurality of rendering means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, effect movable body 224),
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first rendering means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The second rendering means is at least capable of performing a light emitting operation,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a photo sensor (for example, photo sensor 740),
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting means (for example, a light emitting element 740 c),
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving unit (for example, a light receiving element 740 d),
The photo sensor is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
At least a part of the first effect means is a light blocking means (for example, a wall portion 740b of the photo sensor 740),
The light shielding means is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
In the first state, the light shielding unit is located between the second effect unit and the light receiving unit (for example, behind the light receiving element 740d).
The first state is a state in which the position of the first effect means is the first position,
The first position is a position at which at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means is emitted toward the first effect means (for example, a position in the front plane of the display screen). ,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the light shielding means is located between the photosensor of the first effect means capable of at least the moving operation and the second effect means as the display means. There is a possibility that stable presentation can be performed without erroneous detection by the light of the second presentation means, and the interest of the game can be improved.
(2) In the above pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a third effect means (for example, movable object 703),
The first rendering means at least includes the third rendering means,
The third effect means is movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
The third effect means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The photo sensor is at least changeable to a plurality of sensor states,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means can not receive light from the light emitting means,
In the second state, the photosensor is at least changeable to one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
In the third state, the photo sensor is at least changeable to the other of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is a second position,
The third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is not the second position.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100, since the third effect means moved by the movement operation of the first effect means can further execute the movement operation, the interest of the game may be improved.
(3) In the above pachinko machine 100,
The second effect means is at least capable of performing display (for example, display of a decorative symbol, various effects, etc.),
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100, by hiding the display, the player can be made to pay attention to the movement operation of the first effect means, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.
(4) In the above pachinko machine 100,
The second effect means includes a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol, a blank symbol, a holding icon, a variation icon, a special drawing holding number display, a common drawing holding number display, a special drawing fourth symbol, a common drawing fourth symbol, At least one of the notice display, the advance notice display, etc.) can be displayed,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first rendering means is capable of covering at least a part of the first display (for example, a decorative symbol, a notice display, a prefetch notice display, etc.) from the front in a first period,
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100, by hiding the first display, the player can be made to pay attention to the movement operation of the first effect means, and in some cases, the interest of the game can be improved.
(5) In the above pachinko machine 100,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
It is characterized by

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by a movable body.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and at least a movable light shielding plate (for example, a light shielding piece 750c) is provided at a position between the light emitting means and the light receiving means. The first effect means has at least a second region in which the light reflectance is a second reflectance, and the first reflectance is a second reflection. It may be lower than the rate (it is difficult to reflect light).

  Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be different from the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward. In addition, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be opposite to the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be orthogonal to the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward. Further, the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is directed to the light receiving means may be the same as the direction in which the light from the second effect means is directed forward.

  In addition, at least a part of the photo sensor may be a light shielding unit. Also, the light shielding means may be provided in the first effect means separately from the photo sensor. Also, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear of the photo sensor. Also, the light shielding means may cover at least the rear of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may at least cover the lower side of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the upper side of the photo sensor. Further, the light shielding means may cover at least the side of the photo sensor. In addition, the light shielding unit may cover at least the rear and one or more directions of the front, rear, left, right, upper and lower of the photo sensor. Also, the light shielding means may be located at least behind and below the photo sensor. That is, when the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a photosensor, the pachinko machine can not identify the path of the light reaching the light receiving portion of the photosensor because the gaming ball that reflects light always flows down the gaming area. However, there may be cases where false detection can be prevented by covering the light from the display device and the light from the rolling gaming ball behind and below the photosensor, respectively. In addition, by not covering more than necessary (covering in only two directions of front and rear, right and left, up and down), it may be possible to measure the weight of the first rendering means and reduce power consumption and cost when moving. . In addition, the light shielding unit may be a part of a member constituting the photo sensor. The light shielding means may be part of a member provided with the light emitting means. The light shielding means may be part of a member provided with the light receiving means.

  Also, at least one of the plurality of displays may be a second display. In addition, the first rendering means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. Further, the first effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Also, the first rendering means may be capable of hiding both at least a portion of the first display and at least a portion of the second display from the front.

  Further, the third effect means may be capable of executing the moving operation to a position covering at least a part of the second effect means from the front. Further, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of the second display from the front during at least a part of the movement operation period. In addition, the third effect means may be capable of hiding at least a part of one of the first display and the second display from the front. Also, the third effect means may be capable of hiding both at least a part of the first display and at least a part of the second display from the front.

  The second effect means may be capable of simultaneously displaying the first display and the second display. Further, each of the plurality of displays may be a display indicating game information (hereinafter, referred to as “display indicating a plurality of game information”). In addition, a display or a plurality of game information indicating a plurality of game information is a decoration symbol, a blank symbol, a hold icon, a fluctuation icon, a special view hold number display, a common view hold number display, a special view fourth pattern, a common view fourth Symbol, notice display, prefetch notice display, tutorial display, special view effect display, general drawing effect display, background display, button pressing suggestion display, change display, pseudo change display, stop display, reach display, super reach display, jackpot display, Off display, big hit medium effect display, big hit round number display, count number display for each round display, obtained ball number display, big hit consecutive house number display, positive change in effect display, time display effect, launch direction suggestion display, read ahead mode display , Regular effect display performed regularly (for example, every hour), demo screen display, volume setting display, light amount setting display, effect information setting display, player information setting Shown, error display, may include at least one of. In addition, the first display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. In addition, the second display may be displayed on a part of the display area of the second effect means, or may be displayed on the whole. Further, at least one of the plurality of effect means may be a fourth effect means.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.

  For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 103, corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is a symbol when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.

(Supplementary Note 1)
It is a game console provided with a plurality of effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means,
The first rendering means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The second rendering means is at least capable of performing a light emitting operation,
At least a part of the first rendering means is a photo sensor,
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light emitting means,
At least a part of the photo sensor is a light receiving means,
The photo sensor is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
At least a part of the first effect means is a light blocking means,
The light shielding means is at least movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
The light shielding means is located between the second effect means and the light receiving means in the first state.
The first state is a state in which the position of the first effect means is the first position,
The first position is a position where at least a part of the light emitted by the second effect means is emitted toward the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a third rendering means,
The first rendering means at least includes the third rendering means,
The third effect means is movable according to the moving operation of the first effect means,
The third effect means is at least capable of performing a moving operation,
The photo sensor is at least changeable to a plurality of sensor states,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a first sensor state in which the light receiving means can receive light from the light emitting means,
At least one of the plurality of sensor states is a second sensor state in which the light receiving means can not receive light from the light emitting means,
In the second state, the photosensor is at least changeable to one of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
In the third state, the photo sensor is at least changeable to the other of the first sensor state and the second sensor state.
The second state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is a second position,
The third state is a state in which the relative position of the third effect means to the first effect means is not the second position.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console described in Appendix 1 or 2,
The second rendering means is at least executable.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 3,
The second effect means can execute at least one of a plurality of displays.
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first effect means is capable of covering at least a part of the first display from the front in a first period,
The first period is at least a part of the operation period of the movement operation of the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
It is a game console according to any one of Appendices 1 to 4,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

Embodiment D
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment D of the present invention will be described in detail. In addition, in order to avoid the duplicate description, hereinafter, only the configuration different from that of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiments A to B will be described, and the same or similar configuration is given the same reference numeral in the drawings, The description is omitted.

<Game board>
First, the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment D of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 124, and a plurality of types of accessory units 950 (see FIG. 105) are disposed around the decorative symbol display device 208. The details of the character unit 950 will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this example, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, but it is not necessary to be a liquid crystal display device as long as various effects and various game information can be displayed, for example, Other display devices including a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In addition, on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage 244 is disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. The stage 244 is capable of temporarily rolling game balls and the like out of the game area 124. Further, behind the stage 244, a wall 200a3 to be described later is erected, and the gaming ball rolling on the stage 244 falls from the stage 244 by colliding with the wall 200a3, etc. It is led to the game area 124.

  Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the game board 200, the normal symbol display apparatus 210, the 1st special symbol display apparatus 212, the 2nd special symbol display apparatus 214, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, and the 1st special symbol The hold lamp 218, the second special symbol hold lamp 220, and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  The common-diagram display device 210 (not shown) is a display device for displaying a common-diagram, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 (not shown) are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing reserve lamp 216 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating the number of common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 2) of common drawing fluctuation games To be able to hold up to The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 (not shown) are lamps for indicating the number of special drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held. It is possible to hold a predetermined number (for example, four) of the figure fluctuation game. The high probability middle lamp 222 (not shown) is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and low in which a large hit does not easily occur in the gaming state. It lights up when changing from the probability state to the high probability state, and turns off when changing from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, the game board 200, the predetermined ball entrance, for example, the general winning opening 226, the common view starting opening 228, the first special view starting opening 230, the second special view starting opening 232, the first variable A winning opening 234 and a second variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the front face of the game board 200. One is arranged on the right side of the screen. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special view starting port 230, the dispensing device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is hit and stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the dispensing device is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. , Special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker, and are arranged at the bottom right of the gaming board 200 in the present embodiment. The first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 are provided with a door member that can be opened and closed, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member is closed, and the special figure variation game is won and the special figure is selected. When the display device stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first variable winning opening 234 or the second variable winning opening 235, the payout device is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are used as prize balls. Eject into dish 126. The ball entering the first variable winning hole 234 and the second variable winning hole 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction conversion members 236 called windmills and game nails (not shown) are provided, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204 After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236 or the game nail, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, first variable winning opening 234, second) Do not win in the variable winning opening 235) or the starting opening (first special drawing starting opening 230, second special drawing starting opening 232) or winning in any winning opening or starting opening, or Only reach the out port 240 by passing through.

<Government unit>
Next, the accessory unit 950 will be described using FIG. FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the accessory unit 950. As shown in FIG.

  The accessory unit 950 of this example is configured of a drop deployment subunit 700, a lift subunit 750, a launch subunit 800, and a V formation subunit 850. Note that, in the present example, the lift feature unit 750 and the launch feature unit 800 are configured as one unit.

<Government unit / falling roll unit>
106 to 110 are exploded perspective views of the drop deployment combination unit 700. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the drop deployment combination unit 700 mainly includes a base 702 having a U-shaped front view, and a pair of left upper and lower driving units disposed on the left side and the right side of the base 702 in front view. A pair of relay substrates 710 for electrically connecting the falling / developing combination unit 700 and another substrate, and a lock release unit 708 disposed on the back side of the base 702, and a pair of relay substrates 710. And a falling and spreading part 712 (see FIG. 108) slidable in the vertical direction by the left upper and lower driving unit 704 and the right upper and lower driving unit 706.

<Affiliation unit / fall deployment combination unit / left (right) vertical drive unit>
As shown in FIG. 106, the left upper and lower drive portion 704 has a cylindrical drive base 704a fixed to the base 702 with a screw, a left drive motor 704b mounted on the upper portion of the drive base 704a, and a drive motor 704b. A drive gear 704c fixed to the drive shaft, and a plurality of gears 704d for transmitting power of the drive gear 704c are configured.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 107, the left upper and lower drive unit 704 is fitted into the base 702 and slidable in the vertical direction along the base 702, and is fixed to the slider 704e and is a drop developing character 712 The accessory support portion 704f for supporting the left rotation motor base 712e1 and the gear portion 704g fixed to the slider 704e.

  The gear portion 704g is disposed to mesh with one of the plurality of gears 704d, and operates the left drive motor 704b to rotationally drive the gear 704d, whereby the gear portion 704g, the gift support portion 704f, and the slider 704e are integrated. And is configured to slide up and down. The right upper and lower drive unit 706 has the same structure as the left upper and lower drive unit 704, as shown in FIG. 106 and FIG.

  Both ends of the drop deployment combination 712, which will be described later, are supported by the combination support unit 704f of the left and right drive unit 704 and the combination support unit 706f of the right and up and down drive unit 706, and the left drive motor 704b and the right drive are supported. By operating the motor 706b, it is possible to slide in the vertical direction. Hereinafter, the operation of sliding the falling deployment combination 712 in the vertical direction may be referred to as the “up and down movement of the falling deployment combination 712”.

<Affiliation unit / fall deployment combination / unlocking part>
The unlocking portion 708 is, as shown in FIG. 106, a solenoid 708a driven by the drive circuit 516, a shaft portion 708b longitudinally slid by the solenoid 708a, and a shaft portion engaged with the shaft portion 708b. A movable portion 708c which is vertically slid with 708b, a pivoting portion 708d which is pivoted in conjunction with the vertical movement of the movable portion 708c, and a claw which can be slid in a direction indicated by a symbol A by the pivoting portion 708d. And a portion 708e.

  The claw portion 708 e of the unlocking portion 708 is slidably disposed in and out of the through hole 702 a formed in the base 702. When the solenoid 708a is operated to bring the claw portion 708e into the through hole 702a, the base 702 is in a state in which the downward slide is blocked (locked) and the drop deployment member 712 is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 708a is operated to withdraw the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the downward slide of the base 702 is permitted (unlocked), and the drop spreading member 712 slides downward by its own weight Do. In addition to the downward slide by the operation of the left drive motor 704b and the right drive motor 706b, the above-mentioned "vertical movement of the drop deployment combination 712" is also a downward slide by its own weight of the drop deployment combination 712. included.

<Affiliation unit / fall deployment combination unit / fall deployment combination>
As shown in FIG. 108, the drop deployment product 712 has a long plate-like fourth structure 712a supported at both ends by the item support portions 704f and 706f shown in FIG. 107, and the fourth structure 712a. A long plate-shaped first structure body 712b rotatably mounted on the front side of the first and second pair of left and right third structure bodies 712c rotatably disposed on the fourth structure body 712a; And a left rotation drive unit 712e for rotationally driving the left side in a front view of the first structure 712b; It has a right rotation drive section 712f for rotationally driving the right side in a front view of the structure 712b, and a plate-like cover means 718 (see FIG. 109) disposed on the front side of the first structure 712b. Is configured.

  The left rotation drive unit 712e is for decorating the left rotation motor base 712e1 fixed to the character support 704f shown in FIG. 19, the left rotation motor 712e2 attached to the left rotation motor base 712e1, and the left motor base 712e1. And a gear 712e4 for transmitting the power of the left rotation motor 712e2, and the gear 712e4 are rotatable by the gear 712e4 and fixed to the side surface of the first structure 712b on the left side. And a rotating arm 712e5.

  The right rotation drive unit 712f has substantially the same structure as the left rotation drive unit 712e, and as shown in FIG. 108, the rotation arm 712f5 is provided with a plate-shaped detection piece 712f51, and the position of the detection piece 712f51 is A point provided with a detectable sensor 712f6 is different from the left rotation drive unit 712e. By providing the detection piece 712f51 and the sensor 712f6, the right rotation drive unit 712f can detect whether or not the first structural body 712b is positioned at the initial position (the position shown in FIG. 111 (a)). It is possible.

  In the falling development accessory 712, the left rotation motor 712e2 is operated to rotate the rotation arm 712e5 via the gear 712e4, and the left side of the first structure 712b to which the rotation arm 712e5 is fixed is a front view It is configured to rotate (tilt) to the side. Further, by operating the right rotation motor 712 f 2, the rotating arm 712 f 5 is rotated via the gear 712 f 4, and the right side of the first structure 712 b to which the rotating arm 712 f 5 is fixed rotates to the front side ) Is configured to

  Therefore, by operating the left rotation motor 712e2 and the right rotation motor 712f2 simultaneously, the first structural body 712b can be rotated (tilted) in the front side (the direction away from the fourth structural body 712a). Hereinafter, the operation of rotating (tilting) the first structure body 712b of the drop deployment combination 712 to the front side may be referred to as "rotation operation of the drop deployment combination 712".

  In addition, a base portion 712g is fixed to the back surface of the first structure body 712b, and an arm portion 712k having a gear 712h and an external gear meshing with the gear 712h is rotatably disposed on the base 712g. Be done. On the other hand, an engagement portion 712m engageable with the arm portion 712k is fixed to the fourth structure 712a.

  When the first structural body 712b returns to the initial position shown in FIG. 111 (a), the arm portion 712k on the first structural body 712b side is engaged with the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structural body 712a side. The engagement holds the first structure 712 b in the initial position. On the other hand, when the first structural body 712b starts pivoting from the initial position to the front side, the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structural body 712b side and the engaging portion 712m on the fourth structural body 712a side It is released.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the cover means 718 is fixed to a slider 721 slidable up and down with respect to the first structure 712 b. The slider 721 is engaged with the arm portion 712k on the first structure body 712b side and biased downward by a spring 722. When the first structural body 712 b starts pivoting from the initial position to the front side and the engagement of the slider 721 with the arm portion 712 k on the first structural body 712 b side is released, the slider biased by the spring 722 721 is configured to push the cover means 718 downward. Although the face of the character is given to the cover means 718 in this example, other characters, characters, identification information (for example, model name) and the like may be given.

  Referring back to FIG. 108, the magnet 712n for attracting the metal pieces 712c7 made of iron provided in the pair of third structural bodies 712c with a magnetic force is disposed in the base portion 712g, and the first structural body When 712b inclines forward by about 180 °, the pair of third structures 712c is held by the base portion 712g by the magnetic force.

  In addition, a pair of magnets 712b1 are respectively disposed at both ends of the first structural body 712b, and the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 correspond to the pair of magnets 712b1. The metal pieces 712e7 and 712f7 made of iron are disposed at the respective positions. Thereby, the first structure body 712b returned to the initial position is configured to be attracted to the left rotation motor base decoration portion 712e3 and the right rotation motor base decoration portion 712f3 by the magnetic force, and the initial position is held.

  In addition, the third structural body 712c on the left side in the front view is pivotable to the support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface on the left side in the front view of the fourth structural body 712a, and the support portion 712c1 via the support shaft 712c2. An arm 712 c 3 to be disposed, a left upper body 712 c 4 fixed to the arm 712 c 3, and a cap 712 c 5 and a school emblem 712 c 6 fixed to the left upper body 712 c 4 are configured.

  In addition, the third structural body 712c on the right side in the front view is pivotable to the support portion 712c1 fixed to the surface on the right side in the front view of the fourth structural body 712a, and the support portion 712c1 via the support shaft 712c2. An arm 712c3 to be disposed, a right upper body 712c4 fixed to the arm 712c3, and a cap 712c5 and a school emblem 712c6 fixed to the right upper body 712c4 are configured.

  Further, the second structural body 712d on the left side in the front view is pivotable to the support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the left side in the front view of the first structural body 712b and the support portion 712d1 via the support shaft 712d2. An arm 712 d 3 disposed, a lower left half 712 d 4 fixed to the arm 712 d 3, and a connecting part 712 d 5 for connecting the arm 712 d 3 and the third structural body 712 c are configured. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the second structural body 712d on the right side in the front view has a support portion 712d1 fixed to the back surface on the right side in the front view of the first structure body 712b, and the support portion 712d1 via the support shaft 712d2. An arm portion 712d3 rotatably disposed, a lower right half body portion 712b4 fixed to the arm portion 712d3, and a connecting portion 712d5 for connecting the arm portion 712d3 and the third structural body 712c It is configured to have.

  In the falling development product 712, a left upper body portion 712c4, a hat portion 712c5, and a badger portion 712c6 provided in the third structure body 712c on the left side in front view, and a right upper body part 712c4 provided in the third structure body 712c on the right side in front view , A cap portion 712c5, and a badger portion 712c6, a lower left body portion 712d4 provided in the second structure 712d on the left in front view, and a lower right body portion 712d4 in the second structure 712d on the right side in front view A character is configured to be formed.

<Affiliation unit / fall development combination unit / light emitting means of fall development combination>
FIG. 110 (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the first structure 712b, and FIG. 110 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the peripheral members of the fourth structure 712a. FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic front view showing the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structure 712 b and the light emitting substrate 714 of the fourth structure 712 a.

  A light emitting substrate 714 provided with a plurality of second light emitting means 714a (in this example, LEDs) is attached to the front side of the first structure 712b, and these plurality of second light emitting means 714a It is possible to output light to the front side of the first structure 712b through the cover means 718 arranged in front. In addition, a light emitting substrate 716 provided with a plurality of first light emitting means 716a (in this example, LEDs) is attached to the back side of the fourth structure body 712a, and the plurality of first light emitting means 716a are attached. Thus, it is possible to output light to the front side of the fourth structure 712 a through the fourth structure 712 a disposed forward.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the light emitting substrate 716 of the fourth structural body 712 a can be connected to a first harness capable of electrically connecting the fourth structural body 712 a and the first sub control unit 400. A second connector CN2 to which a connector CN1 and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structural body 712a and the light emitting substrate 714 of the first structural body 712b can be connected, and a fourth structural body 712a and the left A third connector CN3 to which a harness for electrically connecting the rotation motor 712e2 can be connected, and a harness for electrically connecting the fourth structure body 712a to the right rotation motor 712f2 and the sensor 712f6 can be connected The fourth connector CN4 is provided.

<Operation of the falling deployment feature>
Next, the operation of the drop deployment product 712 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the falling deployment accessory 712 is capable of moving up and down in the vertical direction and rotating movement in which the first structural body 712 b is rotated forward.

<Operation / up and down movement of the falling development feature>
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing only the falling expansion combination product unit 700 and showing the up and down operation of the falling expansion combination product 712. FIG. 112 is a view of falling of the falling expansion combination product unit 700 installed in the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the up-and-down operation | movement of the expansion | deployment goods 712. FIG.

  Fig. 111 (a) and Fig. 112 (a) show a front view and a sectional view in the case where the drop deployment accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up and down movement. The initial position in the up and down movement is a position where the whole of the drop deployment character 712 overlaps the center character 900 above the gaming board 200.

  In this initial position, a part of the decoration (in this example, the face of the character) applied to the front of the cover means 718 of the falling development character 712 is viewed from the front through the center character opening 900a of the center character 900. This is possible, and an integrated presentation is provided by the center character 900 and the drop deployment character 712. Also, the initial position is a position where the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 does not overlap (does not overlap) the drop developing character 712, and the decorative symbol display device from the front All of the 208 display areas are visible.

  Fig. 111 (b) and Fig. 112 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view when the drop deployment accessory 712 is located at an intermediate position in the up and down movement. When the drop deployment accessory 712 is located at the initial position in the up and down movement, when the solenoid 708a (see FIG. 106) is operated to retract the claw portion 708e out of the through hole 702a, the base 702 slides downward. Is allowed (unlocked), and the drop deployment character 712 slides downward by its own weight to reach an intermediate position.

  The intermediate position in the up and down movement is a position at which the drop deployment character 712 at the initial position is lowered and a part of the drop deployment character 712 overlaps the center character 900. In this intermediate position, a portion of the decoration applied to the front of the cover means 718 of the drop deployment feature 712 is visible through the center feature opening 900 a of the center feature 900. Further, the middle position is a position where the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (drops) on the drop developing character 712, and the decorative symbol is displayed from the front Although the top of the display area of device 208 is not visible, most of the display area is visible.

  Fig. 111 (c) and Fig. 112 (c) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the drop deployment accessory 712 is located at the maximum movement position in the vertical movement. The maximum movement position in the up and down movement is a position where the drop deployment character 712 at the intermediate position is further lowered and a part of the drop deployment character 712 does not overlap (do not overlap) the center character 900. Further, the maximum movement position is a position where the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 disposed behind the rear unit opening 200a2 overlaps (overlaps) the drop developing character 712, and the decoration is viewed from the front Most of the display area of the symbol display device 208 becomes invisible.

<Operation / rotational operation of the drop deployment feature>
FIG. 113 is a view showing only the falling expansion combination product unit 700 and showing the rotation operation of the falling expansion combination product 712. FIGS. 114 and 115 are the falling expansion combination product units installed in the game board 200. It is the figure which showed the rotational operation of the fall deployment goods 712 in 700. FIG.

  FIGS. 113 (a) and 114 (a) show front views when the first structural body 712b of the drop deployment accessory 712 is rotated 45 ° toward the near side in the rotational operation. In the process of rotating the first structural body 712b to the near side from 0 ° to 45 °, the two left and right second structural bodies 712d interlocked with the rotation of the first structural body 712b are the first structural body 712b. The left and right two third structures 712c interlocked with the rotation of the left and right two second structures 712d while being pivoted in a direction approaching each other as a fulcrum approach each other with the fourth structure 712a as a fulcrum Rotate in the direction.

  In addition, when the first structural body 712b starts pivoting from the initial position to the front side and the engagement between the arm portion 712k on the first structural body 712b side and the slider 721 (see FIG. 109) is released, the slider 721 push the cover means 718 downward. For this reason, the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount and is inclined at about 45 ° to the front, but the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is visible from the front.

  FIGS. 113 (b) and 114 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the first structure body 712b of the drop deployment accessory 712 is rotated by 90 ° to the near side in the rotational operation. In the process of rotating the first structure 712 b from the front to the 45 ° to 90 °, the two left and right second structures 712 d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712 b are the first structures 712 b. The two left and right third structures 712c interlocking with the rotation of the left and right two second structures 712d while rotating in the direction closer to the near side than the state rotated 45 ° toward the near side are the first The structure 712 b pivots in the direction closer to the near side as compared to the state rotated 45 ° toward the front side.

  In addition, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 90 ° to the front side, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 becomes invisible from the front, but the light emitting means 716a (the fourth structure 712a) In this example, the LED is visible from the front.

  In addition, since the cover means 718 slides downward by a predetermined amount in conjunction with the rotation of the first structure 712 b, the cover means 718 is inclined by about 90 ° toward the front side. Even if any, the amount of protrusion of the cover means 718 to the front side can be minimized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the thickness of the game board 200 from becoming thicker than necessary, and in some cases, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the cover means 718 comes in contact with other members.

  FIGS. 113 (c) and 115 (a) show front views when the first structural body 712b of the drop deployment accessory 712 is rotated by 135 ° to the near side in the rotational operation. In the process of rotating the first structure 712 b from the front to the side by 90 ° to 135 °, the two left and right second structures 712 d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712 b are the first structures 712 b. The two left and right third structures 712c interlocking with the rotation of the left and right two second structures 712d while rotating in the direction closer to the near side than the state rotated 90 ° toward the near side are the first The structure 712 b pivots in a direction closer to the front side than in the state rotated 90 °.

  In addition, the cover means 718 is inclined to the front by about 135 °, and the decoration applied to the cover means 718 is not visible from the front, but the light emission means 716a (the fourth structure 712a) In this example, the LED is visible from the front.

  Fig. 113 (d) and Fig. 115 (b) show a front view and a cross-sectional view in the case where the first structure body 712b of the drop deployment accessory 712 is rotated 180 ° to the near side in the rotation operation. In the process of rotating the first structure 712 b from the front to the 135 ° to 180 °, the two left and right second structures 712 d interlocking with the rotation of the first structure 712 b are the first structures 712 b. While being in contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the near side than the state rotated 135 ° to the near side, the two left and right thirds interlocking with the rotation of the two left and right second structures 712 d The structure 712 c is in contact with each other by rotating in a direction closer to the front side than the state where the first structure 712 b is rotated 90 ° toward the front side.

  In addition, the left and right two second structures 712d and the left and right two third structures 712c are in contact with each other, and a character is formed by the left and right two second structures 712d and the left and right three third structures 712c. Be done. The cover means 718 is inclined by about 180 ° toward the front, and the decoration applied to the bar means 718 is not visible from the front, and the light emitting means 716 a (the fourth structure 712 a) In the example, a part of the LED is also covered by the two left and right second structures 712 d and the two left and right third structures 712 c, so that it becomes invisible from the front.

<Various substrates>
Next, various substrates provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

<Various substrates / control substrates, drive substrates>
FIG. 116 (a) is a circuit block diagram showing main control circuits in the vicinity of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. The first sub control unit 400 of this example includes a sub control substrate 245 a and a motor drive substrate 245 b electrically connected to the sub control substrate 245 a by a board-to-board (hereinafter referred to as “B to B”) connector. , Is configured by. The connection between the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b is not limited to that by the BtoB connector, but may be by a harness or the like.

  The basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 described with reference to FIG. 42 are mounted on the sub control substrate 245a, and in this example, the basic circuit 402 and the drive circuit 516 are respectively configured by a one-chip microcomputer. , Can communicate with each other.

  Although details will be described later, an electric component for electrically connecting the sub control substrate 245a and another substrate is mounted on the motor drive substrate 245b, and the motor drive substrate 245b is mounted on the sub control substrate 245a. Inputs effect control data from the circuit 516 and outputs a drive signal (for example, a panel LED PWM signal to be described later) for operating a motor serving as a drive source of the game board movable body 444 (for example, character unit 950) It is possible.

  In this example, since the first sub control unit 400 is configured by two types of substrates, the sub control substrate 245a on which at least one microcomputer is mounted and the motor drive substrate 245b on which the microcomputer is not mounted, for example, When there is a specification change or the like of the game board side movable body (for example, the character unit 950), it may be possible to cope with the specification change or the like by replacing only one motor drive board 245b. By providing versatility, it may be possible to shorten the development period and reduce costs.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the sub control board 245a, a game stand lamp 542, a game board lamp 532, a speaker 120, and a game frame movable body 442 (for example, a glass using a front frame door (glass frame) A button, a shielding device (shutter), etc., the second auxiliary control unit 500, a motor drive board 245b, etc. are connected. Further, to the motor drive board 245b, a sub control board 246a, a harness for electrically connecting the motor drive board 245b to another board, and the like are connected.

<Various boards / connections and placement locations>
Next, the connection relation and the arrangement place of various substrates provided in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  FIG. 116 (b) is a block diagram schematically showing the connection relationship of various substrates provided in the pachinko machine 100. In this example, a panel peripheral substrate 672 on which an electric component including a switching circuit is mounted is electrically connected to a motor drive substrate 245b electrically connected to the sub control substrate 245a (FIG. 119 (a), FIG. 120). (See (a)), Connect the accessory peripheral substrate 674 on which no electrical component is mounted to this panel peripheral substrate 672 (see FIGS. 120 (a) and 121 (a)), A commodity lighting substrate 676 on which an electric component including a power LED is mounted is electrically connected to the substrate 674 (see FIG. 121 (a)).

  FIG. 117 (a) is a back view of the game board 200, and is a view for explaining the arrangement places of the sub control board 245a and the motor drive board 245b. In this example, a sub control board case 245 is provided on the back of the game board 200, and a sub control board 245a and a motor drive board 245b are accommodated in the inner space of the sub control board case 245. The substrate indicated by reference numeral 246a in FIG. 117 (a) is a liquid crystal control substrate constituting the second sub control unit 500, and the substrate indicated by reference numeral 678 in FIG. 117 (a) is supplied from the power control unit 660. It is a sub power supply substrate capable of supplying the power source to sub control units such as the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 117 (b) is a front view of a portion of the game board 200 extracted, and is a view for explaining the arrangement location of the board peripheral substrate 672. In this example, the board peripheral board 672 is disposed in the vicinity of the stage 244 of the game board 200, and electrically connected to the motor drive board 245b shown in FIG. 117 (a) via the board peripheral board connection harness 678 described later. It is done.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a view seen from the front through a part of the game board 200, and is a view for explaining the arrangement place of the commodity peripheral substrate 674. FIG. In this example, the character peripheral substrate 674 is disposed on the upper left of the game board 200 in a front view, and is electrically connected to the board peripheral substrate 672 shown in FIG. 117 (b) via a harness (not shown).

  FIG. 118 (b) is a front view showing a part of the drop deployment combination unit 700 extracted, and is a view for describing the arrangement location of the combination top illumination board 676. The character upper illumination substrate 676 in this example is a substrate that constitutes a part of the falling spread character unit 700, and is a substrate corresponding to the light emitting substrate 716 described with reference to FIG. The object upper illumination substrate 676 (light emitting substrate 716) is electrically connected to the object peripheral substrate 674 shown in FIG. 118 (a) via a harness (not shown), and the first light emission made of a power LED Means 676a (716a) are provided.

<Motor control board>
Next, the motor control board 245b will be described. FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b) are diagrams showing the connection relationship between the motor drive substrate 245b and other substrates and an example of the electrical components mounted on the motor drive substrate 245b.

  The motor drive board 245b includes a BtoB connector 245b1 connectable to the BtoB connector 245a1 of the sub control board 245b, and a connector 245b2 connectable to the connector 678a of the panel peripheral board connection harness 678 connected to the panel peripheral board 672. .

  The B to B connector 245 b 1 of the motor drive board 245 b is No. 1 to No. No. 80 of the 80 pins, of which The 31st pin is connected to the signal line of the panel LED PWM signal output from the drive circuit 516 mounted on the sub control board 245a. Further, the connector 245 b 2 of the motor drive board 245 b is no. 1 to No. No. 30 of which consists of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the board LEDPWM signal of the board peripheral wiring connector 678.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 119 (b), the No. of the BtoB connector 245b1. No. 31 of the pin and No. of the connector 245b2. Between the 26 pins, a first resistor 245 b 3, an IC 245 b 4, and a second resistor 245 b 5 are disposed in series as electrical components.

<Board around board>
Next, the board peripheral substrate 672 will be described. FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the connection between the board peripheral substrate 672 and another board, and the electrical components mounted on the board peripheral substrate 672. FIG.

  The board peripheral board 672 is connected to the motor drive board side connector 672 a connectable to the connector 678 b of the board peripheral board connecting harness 678 and to a connector of a harness not shown connected to the article peripheral board 674. And a connector 672b.

  The motor drive board side connector 672a is No. 1 to No. No. 30 of which consists of 30 pins. The 26 pins are connected to the signal line of the board LEDPWM signal of the board peripheral wiring connector 678. In addition, the symbol peripheral substrate side connector 672b is No. 1 to No. No. 30 of which consists of 30 pins. The pins 26 are connected to signal lines of a board LEDPWM signal of a harness (not shown) connected to the object peripheral substrate 674.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 121 (b), the motor drive board side connector 672a has no. No. 26 of the pin and No. of the feature peripheral substrate side connector 672b. Between the 26 pins, a first resistor 672c, a second resistor 672d, a switching circuit 672e formed of an N channel MOS FET, and a third resistor 672f are disposed as electrical components.

  The first resistor 672c is an operation stabilization resistor of the switching circuit 672e. The second resistor 672 d is a ground resistor for setting the voltage between the gate and the source of the switching circuit 672 e to 0 v when the input signal of the switching circuit 672 e is open. The third resistor 672f is a resistor for setting a current of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, a power LED) mounted on the top object lighting substrate 676.

  No. of motor drive board side connector 672a When an ON signal consisting of a predetermined voltage (a voltage which is larger than the gate threshold voltage of the switching circuit 672e and sufficient drain current flows. 5 v in this example) is applied to the 26 pins as the panel LED PWM signal. The circuit 672e is turned from OFF to ON, and the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is turned on.

  In this example, since the MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit, the switching speed of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) is set to be faster than when other switching elements are applied. In addition to speeding up, there are cases where heat dissipation can be enhanced.

  Although an N-channel MOS FET is applied as the switching circuit 672e in this example, for example, a P-channel MOS FET may be used, or another switching element such as a transistor may be used.

  In addition, although the third resistor 672f is applied as the current setting resistor of the first light emitting means 676a (in this example, the power LED) mounted on the character upper illumination board 676, as shown in FIG. 120 (c) Alternatively, two third resistors 672f and fourth resistors 672g connected in series may be applied as current setting resistors.

<Rolled peripheral board>
Next, the object peripheral substrate 674 and the object upper illumination substrate 676 will be described. FIG. 121 (a) is a diagram showing the connection relationship between the character peripheral substrate 674 and the character upper illumination substrate 676 and other substrates, and FIG. 121 (b) is mounted on the character upper illumination substrate 676. 1 shows an example of an electrical component.

  The object peripheral substrate 674 can be connected to a panel peripheral substrate side connector 674a connectable to a connector of a harness (not shown) connected to the panel peripheral substrate 672 and to a connector of a harness 680 connected to the object top illumination substrate 676 And an illumination substrate side connector 674b.

  The board peripheral board side connector 674a is No. 1 to No. No. 30 of which consists of 30 pins. Pins 26 are connected to signal lines of the board LEDPWM signal of a not-shown harness connected to the board peripheral substrate 672. In addition, the lighting substrate side connector 674b for articles is No. 1 to No. No. 22 of 22 pins are included. The 17 pins are No. 1 of the top illumination board 676. It is connected to the electrical components mounted on the on-object lighting board 676 via the 17 pins.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 121 (b), the No. 1 and No. 2 of the symbol on the illumination board side connector 674b. A first resistor 676b and a first light emitting means 676a (in this example, a power LED) are disposed as electrical components between the 17 pins and the power supply (in this example, 7v power) There is.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors (in the present embodiment, the first resistor 245b3 and the second resistor) disposed in series between the sub control substrate 245a and the first light emitting means 676a (in this embodiment, the power LED) By setting the total resistance value of 245b5 and the first resistor 676b) to 15 ohms and the current passing through the first resistor 676b to about 270 mA, the brightness of the first light emitting means 676a (power LED in this example) (Light intensity) is increased.

<Lighting board for features>
Next, the circuit configuration of the on-purpose illumination board 676 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the feature upper illumination substrate 676. As shown in FIG.

  A plurality of LEDs 1 to 14 and an LED driver IC 3 for controlling light emission of the LEDs 1 to 14 are mounted on the object upper illumination substrate 676 in this example. The LEDs 1 to 14 are full-color LEDs in which three primary color LED elements of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are incorporated.

<Point board lighting board / LED>
The three primary color LED elements of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) built in each of the LED1 to LED3 are connected in series by separate signal lines L1 to L3, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements The side is connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12 v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT2 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L1 connecting the red (R) LED elements contained in the LED1 to LED3, the first resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) between the LED driver IC3 and A resistor R6 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  As described above, in this example, the resistors for the signal lines L2 and L3 to which the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected are not disposed, while the green (G) and blue (B) LEDs are not provided. By arranging the resistor R6 only on the signal line L1 to which the red (R) LED element having a voltage drop higher than that of the element is connected, the heat generation of the LED driver IC 3 is suppressed.

  The three primary color LED elements of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) built in each of LED4 to LED6 are connected in series by separate signal lines L4 to L6, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements The side is connected to a power supply of a second voltage (12 v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to constant current output terminals XOUT3 to XOUT5 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L4 connecting the red (R) LED elements contained in the LED4 to LED6, the first resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) between the LED driver IC 3 and A resistor R7 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  The LED elements of three primary colors of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) built in the LED 7 and the LED 8 are connected in series by separate signal lines L7 to L9, and the anode side of each LED element is It connects to the power supply of 1st voltage (this example 7v), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminal XOUT6-XOUT8 of LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L7 connecting the LED 7 and the LED element of red (R) built in the LED 8, a second resistance value (270 ohms in this example) between the LED driver IC 3 and A resistor R10 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  As described above, in this example, the voltage supplied to the LEDs is different depending on the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line, so that an appropriate voltage corresponding to the number of LEDs is supplied. doing.

  In this example, the power of the second voltage (12 v) is supplied from the power supply board (not shown) to the sub control board 245a, and then passes through the motor drive board 245b, the board peripheral board 672, and the object peripheral board 674. Then, it is supplied to the feature upper illumination substrate 676. In addition, after the power supply of the first voltage (7 v) is generated in the sub control substrate 245a, it passes through the motor drive substrate 245b, the board peripheral substrate 672, and the product peripheral substrate 674 to the feature upper illumination substrate 676. Supplied. Furthermore, after the power supply of the third voltage (5 v) is generated in the sub control substrate 245 a, the top illumination substrate 676 (the motor drive substrate 245 b, the panel peripheral substrate 672, and the commodity peripheral substrate 674) LED driver IC 3 etc.).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line is made different depending on the number of red (R) LED elements connected to the signal line, and thus the red (R) LED element to be connected is The values of voltage drop by the red (R) LED elements are configured to be uniform among the different number of signal lines.

  The three primary color LED elements of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) built in each of the LEDs 9 to 11 are connected in series by separate signal lines L10 to L12, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements The side is connected to a power supply of a second voltage (12 v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to constant current output terminals XOUT9 to XOUT11 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L10 connecting the red (R) LED elements incorporated in the LEDs 9 to 11, the first resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) between the LED driver IC 3 and A resistor R8 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  The three primary color LED elements of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) built in each of the LEDs 12 to 14 are connected in series by separate signal lines L13 to L15, respectively, and the anodes of the respective LED elements The side is connected to a power supply of a second voltage (12 v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT12 to XOUT14 of the LED driver IC3. In addition, on the cathode side of the signal line L13 connecting the red (R) LED elements contained in the LEDs 12 to 14, the first resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) between the LED driver IC 3 and A resistor R9 is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  Thus, in the present example, while the signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15 connecting three full color LEDs in series are connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12 v) Then, by connecting the signal lines L7 to L9 connecting two full color LEDs in series to the first voltage (7 v), it is configured to supply an appropriate voltage according to the number of LEDs .

<Point board lighting board / LED driver>
The LED driver IC 3 is configured to have a serial clock input terminal SCLK, a serial data input terminal SDA, an external resistance connection terminal REXT for setting a constant current output, and constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23. The constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels) incorporate a 7-bit resolution (128 steps) fixed frequency PWM controller and a constant current driver in order to set the LED to a specified brightness. Also, the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels) are fixed by one resistor (in this example, a resistor R5 having a resistance value of 2.2 k ohms) connected to the external resistance connection terminal REXT for setting the constant current output. It is possible to adjust the value of current supplied to the current driver.

  The LED driver IC 3 inputs 8-bit serial data via the serial clock input terminal SCLK and the serial data input terminal SDA to individually select the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 (24 channels). The connected LEDs can be individually controlled using different light emission data, or by selecting all the channels simultaneously, the connected LEDs can be collectively controlled using the same light emission data.

  That is, the LED driver IC 3 includes a first LED (for example, LED1 to LED3) connected to a first signal line (for example, signal lines L1 to L3) and a second signal line (for example, signal lines L7 to L7). By transmitting the same light emission data to the second LED (for example, LED 7 and LED 8) connected to L9), the light of the first LED and the light of the second LED become the same light Can be controlled.

<Modified Example 1 of the illumination substrate on the role material>
Next, Modified Example 1 of the symbol on-glass illumination board 676 will be described. FIG. 123 is a circuit configuration diagram showing Modification Example 1 of the circuit configuration of the on-purpose illumination board 676. As shown in FIG.

  In the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 122, signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15, which connect three full color LEDs in series, are used as the power supply of the second voltage (12 v). While connecting, an example in which the signal lines L7 to L9 connecting two full color LEDs in series is connected to the first voltage (7 v) has been shown.

  In this example, the signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 connecting three full color LEDs in series and the signal lines L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 connecting two full color LEDs in series have a second voltage. The signal lines L7 to L9 which are connected to the power supply (12 v) and connect only one full color LED are connected to the first voltage (7 v).

  Further, among the signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 which connect three full color LEDs in series, the cathode side of the signal lines L1 and L13 to which the red (R) LED elements are connected is connected with the LED driver IC3. Between them, the resistors R6 and R9 of the first resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) are respectively connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  Also, among the signal lines L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 connecting two full color LEDs in series, the cathode side of the signal lines L4 and L10 connecting the red (R) LED elements is the LED driver IC3 Between them, resistors R7 and R8 of a third resistance value (in this example, 350 ohms) are respectively connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  In addition, of the signal lines L7 to L9 connecting only one full color LED, a fourth resistance between the LED driver IC 3 and the cathode side of the signal line L7 connecting the red (R) LED elements A resistor R10 of value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element.

  That is, in this example, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line is made different according to the voltage of the supplied power and the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line. The voltage drop values by the red (R) LED elements are configured to be uniform among signal lines in which the voltage and the number of red (R) LED elements to be connected are different.

<Modification 2 of the illumination board on the role material>
Next, a second modified example of the symbol upper illumination substrate 676 will be described. FIG. 124 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modification 2 of the circuit configuration of the on-purpose illumination board 676. As shown in FIG.

  In the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 122, signal lines L1 to L3, L4 to L6, L10 to L12, and L13 to L15, which connect three full color LEDs in series, are used as the power supply of the second voltage (12 v). While connecting, an example has been shown in which the signal lines L7 to L9 connecting two full color LEDs in series are connected to the power supply of the first voltage (7 v).

  In this example, signal lines L1 to L3 and L13 to L15 connecting three full color LEDs in series are connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12 v), and signal lines connecting two full color LEDs in series Connect L4 to L6 and L10 to L12 to the power supply of the first voltage (7v), and connect signal lines L7 to L9 connecting only one full color LED to the power supply of the third voltage (5v) ing.

  That is, in this example, the voltage of the power supply connected to the signal line is made different according to the number of LEDs connected in series to the signal line, so that an appropriate voltage according to the number of LEDs is supplied. doing.

<Modification 3 of the illumination board on the role material>
Next, a third modification of the symbol on-glass illumination board 676 will be described. FIG. 125 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a third modification of the circuit configuration of the feature upper illumination substrate 676. As shown in FIG.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. 122, while no resistor is provided in the signal line to which the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected, the green (G) and blue (B) LEDs are not provided. An example is shown in which the resistance is provided only to the signal line to which the red (R) LED element having a higher voltage drop is connected.

  In this example, in addition to the signal lines to which the red (R) LED elements are connected, the resistors are arranged also on the signal lines to which the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected. ing.

  Of the signal lines L1 to L3 connecting three full color LEDs in series, the cathode side of the signal line L1 connecting the red (R) LED elements is connected to the LED driver IC3 with the first A resistor R6 having a resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the cathode side of the signal line L2 connecting the green (G) LED element is the LED driver IC3. And a resistor R of a first resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the signal line L3 of the blue (B) LED element is connected. On the cathode side, a resistor R having a first resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the cathode side.

  In addition, of the signal lines L4 to L6 connecting two full color LEDs in series, a third of the signal lines L4 to the cathode side of the signal line L4 connecting the red (R) LED elements A resistor R7 having a resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the cathode side of the signal line L5 connecting the green (G) LED element is the LED driver IC3. And a resistor R of a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the signal line L6 connecting the blue (B) LED element On the cathode side, a resistor R having a third resistance value (in this example, 350 ohms) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the cathode side.

  In addition, of the signal lines L7 to L9 connecting only one full color LED, a fourth resistance between the LED driver IC 3 and the cathode side of the signal line L7 connecting the red (R) LED elements A resistor R10 of value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the cathode side of the signal line L8 connecting the green (G) LED element is the LED driver IC3 and In the meantime, a resistor R of a fourth resistance value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the cathode of the signal line L9 connecting the blue (B) LED element On the side, a resistor R with a fourth resistance value (140 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the side.

  That is, in this example, signal lines L1 to L3 connecting three full color LEDs in series, signal lines L4 to L6 connecting two full color LEDs in series, and a signal connecting only one full color LED In the lines L7 to L9, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected and the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the green (G) LED element is connected The resistance values of the resistors disposed on the signal lines to which the blue (B) LED elements are connected are the same.

  In addition, of the signal lines L10 to L12 connecting two full color LEDs in series, a third of the signal lines L10 to the cathode side of the signal line L10 connecting the red (R) LED elements is connected with the LED driver IC3. A resistor R8 having a resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the cathode side of the signal line L11 connecting the green (G) LED element is the LED driver IC3. And a resistor R of a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element, and the signal line L12 connecting the blue (B) LED element On the cathode side, a resistor R having a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the cathode side.

  That is, in this example, in the signal lines L10 to L12 connecting two full color LEDs in series, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected, and green (G) The resistances of the resistors disposed on the signal lines to which the blue and blue (B) LED elements are connected are different resistance values, while the resistors disposed on the signal lines to which the green (G) LED elements are coupled And the resistance value of the resistance disposed on the signal line to which the blue (B) LED element is connected are the same resistance value.

  In addition, of the signal lines L13 to L15 connecting the three full color LEDs in series, the cathode side of the signal line L13 connecting the red (R) LED elements is connected to the first LED driver IC3. A resistor R9 having a resistance value (in this example, 680 ohms) is connected in series with the red (R) LED element, and the cathode side of the signal line L14 connecting the green (G) LED element is the LED driver IC3. And a resistor R of a third resistance value (350 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the green (G) LED element and the signal line L15 connecting the blue (B) LED element On the cathode side, a resistor R having a fifth resistance value (280 ohms in this example) is connected in series with the blue (B) LED element between the LED driver IC 3 and the cathode side.

  That is, in this example, in the signal lines L13 to L15 connecting three full color LEDs in series, the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the red (R) LED element is connected, and green (G) The resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the LED element is connected is different from the resistance value of the resistor disposed on the signal line to which the blue (B) LED element is connected.

  In this example, with regard to the resistance values of the resistors disposed on the signal lines to which the red (R), green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected, (1) when all the resistance values are the same , (2) In the case where all have different resistance values, and (3) in the case where any one has different resistance values, three cases have been described, but any one of these (1) to (3) One, several or all may be applied to the game console.

<Modification 4 of the illumination board on the role material>
Next, a fourth modified example of the symbol upper illumination substrate 676 will be described. FIG. 126 is a circuit configuration diagram showing a modification 4 of the circuit configuration of the on-purpose illumination board 676. As shown in FIG.

  In the circuit configuration diagram shown in FIG. The example which arrange | positions the 1st resistance 676b and the 1st light emission means 676a (power LED) to signal wire L16 which connects 17 pins and a power supply (7v power supply) was shown.

  In this example, the first light emission is achieved by connecting the first resistor 676 b and the first light emitting means 676 a (power LED) to the signal line L 16 connecting the LED driver IC 3 and the power supply of the second voltage (7 v). The light emission of the means 676 a (power LED) is controlled by the LED driver IC 3.

  That is, in this example, the signal lines L7 to L9 connecting two full color LEDs in series, and the signal line L16 provided with one first light emitting means 676a (power LED) It is connected in parallel between the power supply of two voltages (7v).

<Another modification of the illumination board on a feature>
Next, with reference to FIG. 127, another modified example of the object upper illumination board 676 will be described.

  FIG. 127 (a) is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example in which the supply voltage is made different for each of the LED elements constituting the full color LED. In this example, among the three types of LED elements constituting the full color LED, the red (R) LED element is connected to the power supply of the first voltage (7 v), and the green (G) and blue (B) LED elements Is connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12 v).

  That is, in this example, the voltage supplied is made different according to the type of the LED element constituting the full color LED, so that an appropriate voltage according to the characteristics of the LED element is supplied.

  FIG. 127 (b) is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example in which the supply voltage and the LED driver are different for each of the LED elements constituting the full color LED. In this example, among the three types of LED elements constituting the full color LED, the red (R) LED element is connected to the power supply of the first voltage (7 v) and the first LED driver (driver 1). G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12 v) and the second LED driver (driver 2). The first LED driver (driver 1) and the second LED driver (driver 2) may be electronic components mounted on the same substrate, or electronic components mounted on different substrates different from each other. It may be.

  That is, in this example, the voltage supplied and the LED driver are different according to the type of LED element constituting the full color LED, so that an appropriate voltage according to the characteristics of the LED element etc. is supplied and appropriate light emission It is configured to perform control.

  In this example, the example in which the supply voltage and the LED driver are different for each LED element is shown, but the supply voltage and the LED driver may be different for each LED, not for each LED element. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), among the three types of LED elements constituting the first full color LED, only the red (R) LED element is connected to the power supply of the third voltage (5 v) And the other green (G) and blue (B) LED elements are connected to the power supply of the second voltage (12 v), and all of the three types of LED elements constituting the second full color LED are Of the three types of LED elements constituting the second full color LED, only the red (R) LED element may be connected to the LED driver via a resistor.

<Example of arrangement of the LEDs on the lighting substrate for features>
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, an arrangement example of the LEDs on the object upper illumination board 676 will be described. FIG. 128 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 110 described above, and is a view for explaining an arrangement example of the LEDs on the feature upper lighting substrate 676.

  In this example, the three full color LEDs 1 to LED 3 connected in series in FIG. 122 are disposed in the first substrate area AR1 at the upper left of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. The first substrate area AR1 is a substrate area closest to the first connector CN1 and the third connector CN3 in the light emitting substrate 716. Further, the three full color LEDs 4 to 6 connected in series in FIG. 122 are disposed in the second substrate area AR2 on the lower left of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. The second substrate area AR2 is a substrate area closest to the second connector CN2 in the light emitting substrate 716.

  The three full color LEDs 1 to LED 3 and LED 4 to LED 6 connected in series may have lower luminance than the two full color LEDs 7 and LED 8 connected in series, so they should be placed in the substrate area near the connector Thus, there are cases where it is possible to avoid a situation in which the connector is conspicuous due to the light emission of the LED and the appearance of the decoration is lost.

  Further, in the present example, the three full color LEDs 9 to 11 connected in series in FIG. 122 are disposed in the fourth substrate area AR4 on the upper right of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. The fourth substrate area AR4 is a substrate area closest to the fourth connector CN4 in the light emitting substrate 716.

  The three full-color LEDs 9 to 11 connected in series may have lower luminance than the two full-color LEDs 7 and LEDs 8 connected in series. In some cases, it may be possible to avoid a situation where the connector is conspicuous due to the light emission and the appearance of the decoration is lost.

  Further, in this example, two full color LEDs 7 and LEDs 8 connected in series in FIG. 122 are disposed in the third substrate area AR3 at the center of the light emitting substrate 716 in a front view. The third substrate area AR3 is a substrate area farthest from the first to fourth connectors CN1 to CN4 in the light emitting substrate 716 and is the substrate closest to the first light emitting means 676a (716a) made of a power LED. It is an area.

  With such a configuration, the synergetic effect of the two full color LEDs 7 and the LED 8 and the power LED can increase the brightness near the center than the outer edge of the decorative body, and may improve the rendering effect.

  Further, in the present example, the LED driver IC 3 in FIG. 122 is disposed between the two full color LEDs 7 and the LED 8 in the third substrate area AR 3, and the other full color LEDs in the light emitting substrate 716 are LED drivers It is equally distributed around IC3. With such a configuration, the luminance of the LEDs in the light emitting substrate 716 can be made uniform, and the rendering effect may be able to be improved.

  In addition, the arrangement position of the LEDs on the article upper illumination substrate 676 is not limited to this example, for example, two full color LEDs 7 and LEDs 8 connected in series in FIG. You may arrange | position to any of 5th board | substrate area | region AR1, AR2, AR4, and AR5. Also, in order to make the light emission of the power LED stand out, one of the two full color LEDs 7 and one of the LEDs 8 is arranged side by side on the right side of the LEDs 4 to 6 and the other LED 8 is on the left side of the LEDs 12 to 14 It may be arranged side by side.

  As described above, the game console (for example, pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes LEDs (for example, full-color LEDs 1 to 14 shown in FIG. 122) and drivers for controlling light emission of the LEDs (for example, A game console comprising an LED driver IC 3) 122 and a substrate provided with a plurality of signal lines (e.g., an object top illumination board 676 shown in FIG. 122), wherein among the plurality of signal lines One of them is a first signal line (for example, signal lines L7 to L9 shown in FIG. 122), and one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line (for example, shown in FIG. 122). The first signal lines are signal lines L1 to L3 or L4 to L6, or L10 to L12, or L13 to L15), and the first number (for example, two) of the LEDs are connected in series Signal line The second signal line is a signal line in which the LEDs in the second number (for example, three) are connected in series, and the first signal line is a signal connected to the driver The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and the first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage (for example, 7 v) is supplied. The second signal line is a signal line to which a second voltage (for example, 12 v) is supplied, and in the first number and the second number, the second number is larger (for example, The game console is characterized in that the second voltage is higher (e.g., 7 v <12 v) at 2 pieces <3 pieces and the first voltage and the second voltage.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to supply an appropriate voltage according to the number of LEDs, and it may be possible to light a plurality of LEDs efficiently. Also, depending on the location of the LED, it may be possible to have different ways of lighting, and it is possible to provide a game board having a feature on the substrate.

  In addition, the structure which performs light emission control of LED using a 3rd voltage may be sufficient. Also, the first voltage, the second voltage or the third voltage may be any of 5 v, 7 v, 12 V or any other voltage. Further, the configuration may be such that the driver is not used.

  In addition, the driver includes the LED connected to the first signal line (hereinafter referred to as “first LED”) and the LED connected to the second signal line (hereinafter referred to as “second By transmitting the same light emission data to the LED, the driver may control so that the light of the first LED and the light of the second LED become the same.

  With this configuration, even when the number of LEDs connected by the signal line is different from the voltage supplied, the same way of lighting can be obtained when the same light emission data is transmitted. In some cases, control can be simplified. In this example, it is possible to make the same way of lighting by the function of the driver (IC), but in a configuration to perform different ways of lighting (how to make the luminance differ depending on the LED) without using this function. It may be. Here, the difference in the way of lighting is applied even at a level that can not be confirmed visually.

  The substrate is a substrate on which a power LED (for example, the first light emitting means 676a shown in FIG. 122) is provided, and the power LED is a switching circuit (for example, the switching circuit 672e shown in 121 (b)) And one of the plurality of signal lines is a third signal line (for example, the signal line L16 shown in FIG. 122), and the third signal line is the LED. The LED is a signal line connected to one, the third signal line is a signal line not connected to the driver, and the third signal line is a line between the first voltage and the second voltage. It may be a signal line to which one of the voltages (for example, 7 v) is supplied.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where it is possible to control the LEDs without increasing signal lines with different voltages more than necessary. For example, as shown in FIG. 126, the third signal line may be connected to the driver. Alternatively, the light emission control similar to that of the power LED may be performed without connecting a part of the LED to the driver.

  In addition, the effect movable means (for example, the drop deployment combination 712 shown in FIG. 108) may be provided, and the substrate may be a substrate for causing the effect movable means to emit light.

  With such a configuration, light emission control of the effect movable means may be efficiently performed. The effect movable means may include not only a configuration in which the effect movable means is movable by control, but also a means movable by the operation of the player, for example, provided at a position where the player can operate. You may include the operation means for presentation etc. which were made. Further, the LED does not have to be the LED of the effect movable means. For example, the present invention is also applicable to an LED fixed to the frame of the game table, a monitor LED on the back side of the game table, etc.

  Further, the substrate according to the present invention does not have to be a substrate that moves with the movable means for effect, and for example, when the movable means for effect is moved, the positional relationship with the substrate is also applicable to a lightable state. Ru. Also, the signal line may be connected to the same driver, or may be configured to emit light from different means in the game console. For example, one is a movable means for effect, and the other is fixed in the vicinity thereof. It may be a decoration means.

  Further, the LED is a full color LED, and the full color LED is an LED composed of three primary color (for example, red (R), green (G), blue (B)) LED elements, and the three primary colors LED The element is an LED element connected to separate connection terminals of the driver, and in the first signal line and the second signal line, a resistor is provided only between the full color LED and the driver (for example, FIG. 122). The resistors R6 to R9) shown in the above may be provided.

  With such a configuration, the voltage applied to the driver may be able to be lowered by arranging the resistor with respect to the color LED element with a small voltage drop. Note that resistance may be provided on all signal lines to which three primary color LED elements are connected, or resistance may not be provided on all signal lines, and can be appropriately changed according to the performance of the driver. is there.

  Also, the first LED and the second LED may be the same type of LED. With such a configuration, the light emission control by the driver may be simplified to reduce the control load.

  In addition, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present embodiment is a game console including an LED, a driver for controlling light emission of the LED, and a substrate provided with a plurality of signal lines. One of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, and the first signal line is The first number of LEDs (hereinafter referred to as “first LEDs”) is a signal line connected in series, and the second signal line is a second number of LEDs (hereinafter, referred to as “the first number”). The “second LED” is a signal line connected in series, the first signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and the second signal line is connected to the driver. The first LED and the second LED are the same type of LED. The first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage is supplied, and the second signal line is a signal line to which the first voltage is supplied. The second number is a different number, and even when the same light emission data is transmitted to the first LED and the second LED, how to light the first LED and the second LED The game apparatus may be characterized by having different light patterns.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, it may be possible to show the difference in the way of lighting as the effect. In addition, even if the light emission data is small, the variation may be increased due to the difference in the way of lighting. In addition, the circuit configuration may be simplified by making the voltages supplied to the first and second signal lines the same.

  In addition, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present embodiment is a game console including an LED, a driver for controlling light emission of the LED, and a substrate provided with a plurality of signal lines. One of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, and the first signal line is The second signal line is a signal line to which the LED is connected, the second signal line is a signal line to which the LED is connected, and the first signal line is a signal line to which the driver is connected. The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, the first signal line is a signal line to which a first voltage is supplied, and the second signal line is a second A signal line to which a voltage is supplied, and in the first voltage and the second voltage, the second voltage is The LED connected to the first signal line (hereinafter referred to as "third LED") and the LED connected to the second signal line (hereinafter referred to as "fourth LED"). Even in the case where the same light emission data is transmitted, the game console may be characterized in that the light emission of the third LED and the light emission of the fourth LED are different.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, it may be possible to show the difference in the way of lighting as the effect. In addition, even if the light emission data is small, the variation may be increased due to the difference in the way of lighting. In addition, by making the voltages supplied to the first and second signal lines different, it may be possible to perform light emission control optimal for the LED. .

  In addition, a game console (for example, a pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present embodiment is a game console including an LED, a driver for controlling light emission of the LED, and a substrate provided with a plurality of signal lines. One of the plurality of signal lines is a first signal line, one of the plurality of signal lines is a second signal line, and the first signal line is The second signal line is a signal line to which the LED is connected, the second signal line is a signal line to which the LED is connected, and the first signal line is a signal line to which the driver is connected. The second signal line is a signal line connected to the driver, and between the LED (hereinafter referred to as the “fifth LED”) connected to the first signal line and the driver A first resistor is provided, and the LED (or the like) connected to the second signal line A second resistor is provided between the “sixth LED” and the driver, and the first resistor and the second resistor have different resistances. It is characterized in that even if the same light emission data is transmitted to the fifth LED and the sixth LED, the manner of light of the fifth LED and the manner of light of the sixth LED are different. It may be a game console.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, it may be possible to show the difference in the way of lighting as the effect. In addition, even if the light emission data is small, the variation may be increased due to the difference in the way of lighting. In addition, by making the resistance values of the resistors connected to the first and second signal lines different, it may be possible to perform light emission control optimal for the LED.

<Substrate of movable body 1>
Next, the substrate of the movable body 1 will be described. FIG. 129 is a schematic exploded perspective view showing a part of members constituting the movable body 1.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 56, the movable body 1 is a deformable movable object unit whose external shape is deformed, and includes the base portion 10, the movable portions 11, 12, and 14, and the structure 16. The movable portions 11, 12, 14 are provided displaceably with respect to the base portion 10.

  The movable portion 11 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and is formed by laminating a base portion 11a, a substrate 11c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second substrate 11c"), a lens member 11e and a cover 11f. It is formed. A plurality of light emitting elements 11 d (in this example, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 11 c in the longitudinal direction. The lens member 11e covers the substrate 11c, and the cover 11f covers the lens member 11e.

  The movable portion 12 has a shape that is symmetrical to the movable portion 11 and is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and the base portion 12a and the substrate 12c (hereinafter referred to as "third substrate 12c" And the lens member 12e and the cover body 12f are laminated. On the substrate 12c, a plurality of light emitting elements 12d (in this example, LEDs) are mounted in the longitudinal direction. The lens member 12e covers the substrate 12c, and the cover 12f covers the lens member 12e.

  The movable portion 14 is an elongated plate-like arm member as a whole, and a base portion 14a, a substrate 14e (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "first substrate 14e"), a lens member 14g, and a cover body 14h are laminated. It is formed. The substrate 14e is fixed to the back of the base portion 14a, and the lens member 14g has a configuration of two left and right members, and each member covers the substrate 14e. The cover body 14h is fixed to the front side of the base portion 14a, and covers the lower portion of the base portion 14a and the lens member 14g. A plurality of light emitting elements 14 f (in this example, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 14 e in the longitudinal direction.

  The structure 16 includes a front base 16A, a substrate 16B, a lens member 16C, and a cover 16D. A plurality of light emitting elements 16 b (in this example, LEDs) are mounted on the substrate 16 B. The plurality of light emitting elements 16 b are arranged in a plane, and the entire structure 16 can emit light. The lens member 16C covers the substrate 16B, and the cover body 16D covers the lens member 16C. The cover body 16D can have a decorative shape, a pattern, or a color, and in the present example, an eyeball-like shape is provided.

<Substrate of movable body 1 / first substrate>
Next, the first substrate 14e will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 (a) is a front view showing the surface of the first substrate 14e, and FIG. 130 (b) is a rear view showing the back surface of the first substrate 14e.

  The first substrate is a double-sided substrate constituted by the front surface (the surface on the side covered by the cover 14 h) and the back surface (the surface on the side not covered by the cover 14 h). In the surface shown in FIG. 130 (a), almost all the area is the mounting area OA on which electronic components and the like can be mounted, while the back surface shown in FIG. 130 (b) is the mounting area provided in the center It is divided into OA and non-mounting areas NOA (areas blacked out in FIG. 130 (b)) provided on the left and right sides of the mounting area OA.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), on the surface of the first substrate 14e, eight full color LEDs 1 to 8 as light emitting elements 14f are spaced substantially equally in the longitudinal direction of the first substrate 14e. And the signal lines, vias, etc. that electrically connect the eight full color LEDs 1 to 8 and the various electrical components (LED driver IC etc.) mounted on the back of the first substrate 14e. It is formed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), an LED driver for controlling light emission of full color LEDs 1 to 8 mounted on the front surface of the first substrate 14e in the mounting area OA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e. The IC 1 and various electric components (resistors, capacitors, etc.) are mounted, and the pattern of signal lines connecting the driver IC 1 and various electric components, the driver IC 1 and various electric components mounted on the surface of the first substrate 14 e A pattern such as a signal line which connects (eight full color LEDs 1 to 8 and the like), a via, and a ground region connected to the ground are formed.

  The non-mounting area NOA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is an area where a pattern, a ground, and a copper foil are not provided but only a resist is formed, and in this example, provided on both left and right sides of the mounting area OA. There is. Further, in the non-mounting area NOA, a plurality of through holes 14g used for positioning when fixing the first substrate 14e to the cover body 14h are formed.

<Circuit configuration of substrate of first movable substrate 1>
Next, the circuit configuration of the first substrate 14e will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a circuit configuration diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the first substrate 14e.

  A plurality of LEDs 1 to LED 8 and an LED driver IC 1 that controls light emission of the LEDs 1 to 8 are mounted on the first substrate 14 e of this example. The LEDs 1 to 8 are full-color LEDs in which three primary color LED elements of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) are incorporated. Although not shown, the circuit configuration of the second substrate 11c (substrate 11c of the movable portion 11) and the third substrate 12c (substrate 12c of the movable portion 12) is the same as that of the first substrate 14e. It is.

  The three primary color LED elements of red (R), green (G) and blue (B) built in each of the LED1 to LED8 are respectively connected to different signal lines L1 to L24, and the anode side of each LED element is It is connected to the power supply of one voltage (5 v in this example), and the cathode side of each LED element is individually connected to the constant current output terminals XOUT0 to XOUT23 of the LED driver IC1. In addition, although it is comprised so that resistance may not be arrange | positioned between a LED element and LED driver IC1 in this example, you may arrange resistance.

  Since the LED driver IC1 is the same LED driver as the LED driver IC3 described with reference to FIG. 122, the description thereof is omitted, but in this example, the external resistance connection terminal REXT for setting the constant current output of the LED driver IC1 is used. It is considered as unused.

<Relationship between substrate / first substrate of movable body 1 and movable parts 11 and 12>
Next, the relationship between the first substrate 14e and the movable portions 11 and 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a rear view of the movement of the movable portions 11 and 12 as viewed from the rear of the movable body 11.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows the initial position of the movable parts 11, 12 and 14, and FIG. 132 (d) shows the position (moving position) after moving the movable parts 11, 12 and 14. FIGS. 132 (b) and 132 (c) show intermediate positions 1 and 2 between the initial position and the movement position, respectively. The movable portions 11, 12 and 14 can be deformed from the initial position to the movement position through the intermediate position 1 and the intermediate position 2 and can be returned to the initial position from the movement position through the intermediate position 2 and the intermediate position 1 .

  As shown in FIGS. 132 (a) to (d), the mounting area OA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is located behind the mounting area OA when the movable parts 11 and 12 are operated. In the rear view of the substrate 14e), there is a region that does not overlap the movable portions 11 and 12 (a region that does not overlap).

  On the other hand, when the movable parts 11 and 12 are operated, the non-mounting area NOA on the back surface of the first substrate 14e is movable part 11 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in a back view of the first board 14e). , 12, an area that may overlap (an area that may overlap).

<Modification 1 of non-mounting area>
Next, a first modification of the non-mounting area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram for describing a first modification of the non-mounting area.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a first decorative body 602 fixedly disposed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a front view and a second decorative body capable of moving horizontally below the decorative symbol display device 208. And 604. In this example, the first decorative body 602 is a decorative body having a shape resembling a rabbit and a stump, and the second decorative body 604 is a decorative body having a shape resembling a turtle.

  The second decorative body 604 is configured to be at least reciprocally movable between a first position shown in FIG. 133 (a) and a second position shown in FIG. 133 (b). The first position is a position where the second decorative body 604 does not overlap the first decorative body 602, and the second position is where a portion of the second decorative body 604 is the first. It is a position which overlaps with a part of the decoration 602 (overlap).

  As shown in FIG. 133 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (area blackened in FIG. 133 (c)) is disposed on the back surface of the second decorative body 604. ing. The non-mounting area NOA of the second decorative body 604 is an area where the pattern, the ground, and the copper foil are not provided but only the resist is formed, and in this example, as shown in FIG. When the second decorative body 604 moves to the second position, it may overlap with a portion of the first decorative body 604 (in a rear view of the second decorative body 604) behind the non-mounting area NOA It is an area (an area that may overlap).

  That is, in this example, the non-mounting area NOA is provided in the second decorative body 604 which is a movable object, but the non-mounting area NOA is not provided in the first decorative body 602 which is a fixed object. . The second decorative body 604 may be formed of one substrate or a plurality of substrates. In addition, the non-mounting area NOA may be configured by a plurality of substrates.

<Modification 2 of non-mounting area>
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a second modification of the non-mounting area will be described. FIG. 134 is a diagram for describing a second modification of the non-mounting area.

  The gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a third decorative body 612 fixedly disposed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front view and a fourth decorative body capable of moving horizontally below the decorative symbol display device 208. And 614. In the present example, the third decorative body 612 is a decorative body having a shape that imitates a takotsubo, and the fourth decorative body 614 is a decorative body that has a shape that simulates an octopus.

  The fourth decorative body 614 is configured to be at least reciprocally movable between a first position shown in FIG. 134 (a) and a second position shown in FIG. 134 (b). The first position is a position where the fourth decorative body 614 does not overlap the third decorative body 612, and the second position is where a portion of the fourth decorative body 614 is a third. It is a position which overlaps with a portion of the decoration 612.

  As shown in FIG. 134 (c), a substrate having a mounting area OA and a non-mounting area NOA (area blacked out in FIG. 134 (c)) is disposed on the back surface of the fourth decorative body 614. ing. The non-mounting area NOA of the fourth decorative body 614 is an area where the pattern, the ground, and the copper foil are not provided and only the resist is formed, and in this example, as shown in FIG. When the fourth decorative body 614 moves to the second position, it may overlap with a part of the third decorative body 614 behind the non-mounting area NOA (in the back view of the fourth decorative body 614) It is an area (an area that may overlap).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 134 (c), the substrate having the mounting area OA and the non-mounting area NOA (area blackened in FIG. 134 (c)) is also arranged on the back surface of the third decorative body 612. It is set up. The non-mounting area NOA of the third decorative body 612 is an area where the pattern, the ground, and the copper foil are not provided and only the resist is formed, and in this example, as shown in FIG. When the fourth decorative body 614 moves to the second position, it may overlap with a part of the fourth decorative body 612 (in a back view of the third decorative body 612) behind the non-mounting area NOA It is an area (an area that may overlap).

  That is, in this example, the non-mounting area NOA is provided in both the fourth decoration 614 which is a movable object and the third decoration 612 which is a fixed object. The third decorative body 612 or the fourth decorative body 614 may be formed of one substrate or a plurality of substrates. In addition, each non-mounting area NOA may be configured by a plurality of substrates.

<Movable body 3>
Next, the substrate of the movable body 3 will be described. FIG. 135 is a circuit configuration diagram of a substrate of the display device 34 configuring the movable body 3, and FIG. 136 (a) is a front view of the substrate of the display device 34 configuring the movable body 3.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (a), on the surface of the substrate of the display device 34, a light emitting element L11 disposed at a position serving as the rotation center of the display device 34 and a plurality of light emitting elements disposed radially from the rotation center And columns LA1 to LA6. In this example, the number of light emitting element rows LA is six, and the light emitting element rows LA are arranged at equal pitches in the circumferential direction.

  In this example, the light emitting element L11 disposed at the center is configured of one full color LED 32 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 5. The first light emitting element row LA1 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes a total of 10 consisting of the LEDs 1 and 2 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 2 and the LEDs 9 to 16 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 3 It consists of individual full color LEDs.

  The second light emitting element row LA2 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes a total of 11 consisting of the LEDs 3 to 5 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 2 and the LEDs 17 to 24 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 4 It consists of individual full color LEDs. Further, the third light emitting element row LA3 among the plurality of light emitting element rows LA is a total of 10 consisting of the LED 25 to the LED 31 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 5 and the LED 59 to the LED 61 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 9 It consists of individual full color LEDs.

  A fourth light emitting element row LA4 among the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes a total of 11 consisting of the LEDs 33 to 40 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 6 and the LEDs 62 to 64 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 9 It consists of individual full color LEDs. The fifth light emitting element row LA5 of the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes a total of 10 consisting of the LEDs 41 to 48 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 7 and the LEDs 57 and 58 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 9 It consists of individual full color LEDs.

  The sixth light emitting element row LA6 among the plurality of light emitting element rows LA includes a total of 11 consisting of the LED 49 to the LED 56 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 8 and the LED 6 to the LED 8 whose light emission is controlled by the LED driver IC 2 It consists of individual full color LEDs.

  FIG. 136 (b) is a rear view of the substrate of the display device 34 constituting the movable body 3. As shown in FIG. 13B, LED drivers IC2 to IC9 and a latch circuit IC1 shown in FIG. 135 are disposed on the back surface of the substrate of the display device 34 at equal pitches in the circumferential direction of the display device 34. Thus, by arranging the electronic components at equal pitches in the circumferential direction, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the slip ring 620 when the display device 34 is rotated, and to extend the life of the display device 34. There is a possibility.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present embodiment is a gaming table provided with movable means (for example, movable body 1 shown in FIG. 132) capable of executing the first operation. The movable means is means provided with a first substrate (for example, the first substrate 14e shown in FIG. 132), and one surface of the first substrate is a first region (for example, the first region). Non-mounting area NOA shown in Fig. 132. It is composed of a pattern, a ground, an area where copper foil is not provided and only a resist is formed, and a second area (for example, mounting area OA shown in Fig. 132). And the first area is a means (eg, the movable portion 11 shown in FIG. 132) behind the first area in relation to the first operation performed by the movable means. , 12) overlap, and the second region is the first region. In the first area and the second area, the area of the pattern line formed in the first area is the area other than the area of the first area and the pattern line formed in the second area. Less than the area of the game console.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, even if the first substrate and a certain means come in contact with each other due to vibration or the like, the pattern of the first substrate may be prevented from being damaged. A game console characterized by the means can be provided.

  Further, the first area may be wider than the second area in the first area and the second area.

  With such a configuration, the patterns of the first substrate may be further prevented from being damaged by arranging the patterns of the first substrate intensively in the second region. Note that the second region may be wider than the first region.

  Also, the first substrate is a substrate provided with LEDs (for example, LEDs 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 130 (a)), and the LEDs are the other surface of the first substrate, The LEDs are disposed at least in a region opposite to the first region, and the LEDs are connected by pattern lines on the other surface of the first substrate via vias formed in the second region. May be

  In addition, the LED may be disposed in the other surface of the first substrate, which is an area opposite to the second area.

  With such a configuration, the emission range of light by the LED can be expanded, and there are cases in which the rendering effect can be improved. Note that the LED may be provided on the back side of the game board substrate.

  Moreover, the driver (for example, LED driver IC1 shown to FIG. 130 (b)) which controls light emission of said LED may be provided, and the said driver may be provided in said 2nd area | region.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the driver inconspicuous by providing the driver on the back side of the substrate (the side invisible to the player). Note that the driver may be provided in the first region, in which case the light emission of the LED may be affected if the movable means and the first substrate come into contact, leading to the detection of a malfunction of the movable means, etc. There is. Also, the driver may be provided on the other side, which is effective in the case where there is no space behind the movable means. In addition, there are cases where the driver can be arranged using the distance from the LED to the lens (decorative means).

  Further, the pattern line may be formed only in the first region. In addition, a part of the pattern lines may be formed in the first area, and in this case, for example, any pattern line of a plurality of LED pattern lines may be formed in the first area, and the movable means In the case where the first substrate contacts with the first substrate, it may be possible to detect a malfunction due to the light emission abnormality of the LED related to this pattern line.

  Further, the ground in the first substrate may be formed only in the first region. In addition, a part of the ground may be formed in the first region, or the first region may be entirely configured as the ground. In this case, if the area of the ground is sufficient, malfunction may occur. The impact may be small.

  The first substrate is a substrate provided with an LED, and the movable means is a means provided with a first decoration means (for example, a cover 14h shown in FIG. 129) on the front side of the LED. And at least a part of the area behind the first area may not be covered by the first decoration means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to reduce the space in the front and back direction of the movable means. The first area may be covered by the decoration means.

  The movable means is a means constituted by a plurality of movable bodies, and one of the plurality of movable bodies is a first movable body (for example, the movable portion 14 shown in FIG. 129), One of the plurality of movable bodies is a second movable body (for example, the movable portion 11 or the movable portion 12 shown in FIG. 129), and the first substrate is the first movable body. The certain means is the second movable body, and the second movable body is the first movable body in relation to the first movement of the movable means. It may be a movable body overlapping behind the movable body.

  In addition, the game area is provided with a second decorative means (for example, the first decorative body 602 shown in FIG. 133 and the third decorative body 612 shown in FIG. 134), wherein It is a decoration means, and the second decoration means may be a means that overlaps behind the first area in relation to the first operation performed by the movable means.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the pattern and the ground can be protected when interference between the first substrate and other means occurs.

  The first region may be in a state where all of the copper foil is a ground. The first substrate may be a multilayer substrate of three or more layers. In addition, the light emission control of the LED does not have to use a driver, and for example, may be configured to emit light using a switching circuit such as an FET. The driver may be serial communication or parallel communication. Also, the LEDs may be power LEDs or other LEDs in addition to full color LEDs. Alternatively, a resistor may be provided between the driver and the LED to suppress heat generation of the driver.

  Further, the movable means is applicable to movable bodies other than the movable body 1, and may be movable bodies arranged in the frame of the game table in addition to the movable bodies arranged on the game board. In addition, the "first operation" of the movable means is not limited to the rotation of the movable means, and includes other operations such as reciprocating operation, vibration, expansion and contraction, opening and closing, and attachment / detachment from the game stand.

<Board Via>
Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a via of a certain substrate provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a part of a substrate extracted.

  A plating process is applied to the outer edge portion 630a of the decoration means 630 (for example, the movable portions 11, 12, 14 and the like of the movable body 1 shown in FIG. 132) included in the game table according to the present embodiment. Here, the plating process is a process of depositing a thin metal film of gold, silver, nickel, chromium or the like on the surface of the decorative means 630, for example, electroplating such as zinc plating or copper plating, nickel plating or the like. Electroless plating, chemical conversion treatment, other surface treatment etc. correspond.

  Further, in the double-sided substrate provided in the decorative means 630, a plurality of vias 632 for electrically connecting the front surface and the back surface of the substrate are formed in the vicinity of the outer edge portion 630a of the decorative means 630. The vias 632 are connected to the ground on the front surface of the double-sided board, and are not connected to a pattern such as a signal line on the back surface of the double-sided board. The method of forming the via 632 is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known plating through hole method, a conductive paste filling method, or the like can be applied.

  Further, on the back surface of the double-sided substrate, a plurality of full color LEDs 634 are disposed at positions farther from the outer edge portion 630 a than the vias 632. In addition, the via of this example can also be applied to various illumination substrates (substrates equipped with LEDs) in a game console, and can also be applied to other types of substrates.

<Modified Example of Substrate Via>
Next, referring to FIG. 138, a modification of the via of the substrate will be described. FIG. 138 is a view showing a part of the substrate on which the via of the modified example is formed.

  The decorative means 640 shown in FIG. 138 (a) is formed of a circular member, and the outer edge portion 640a is plated over the entire circumference. Further, on the double-sided board of the decoration means 640, a plurality of vias 642 are formed at an equal pitch so as to follow the shape of the outer edge portion 640a. Also, on the double-sided board, a plurality of full color LEDs 644 are disposed at a position farther from the outer edge 640 a than the via 642.

  The decorative means 650 shown in FIG. 138 (b) is formed of a rectangular member, and a plated portion 650b to which a plating process is applied is formed on a part of the outer edge portion 650a. Further, on the double-sided board of the decoration means 650, a plurality of vias 652 are formed at equal pitches inside the plating processing part 650b. Further, on the double-sided board, a plurality of full color LEDs 654 are disposed at a position farther from the outer edge 650 a than the via 652. The via 652 in this example is formed in an L shape in plan view at one corner of the full color LED 654.

  The decorative means 660 shown in FIG. 138 (c) is made of a rectangular member, and the outer edge 660a is plated over the entire circumference. Further, in the double-sided board of the decorative means 600, a plurality of vias 662 are formed at equal pitches along the outer edge 660a inside the outer edge 660a of the two opposing sides. Further, on the double-sided board, a plurality of full color LEDs 664 are disposed at a position farther from the outer edge 660 a than the via 662.

<Other static electricity measures>
Next, another countermeasure against static electricity applied to the game console according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the movement of a certain character (decorative means) in time series.

  An accessory (decorative means) 670 according to this example includes a disk-shaped rotating body 672 rotationally driven by a drive motor (not shown), and a metal light shielding piece 674 attached to the outer edge of the rotating body 672 The photo sensor (not shown) capable of detecting the passage of the light shielding piece 674 and an illumination substrate (not shown) provided on the back of the rotating body 672 are configured.

  In this example, in order to reliably detect the passage of the metal light shielding piece 674 by the photo sensor, the distance between the light emitting element and the light receiving element constituting the photo sensor is narrowed. Therefore, static electricity is easily generated between the light shielding piece 674 and the photo sensor. However, in this example, by connecting the ground line from the illumination substrate to the light shielding piece 674, the light collecting piece 674 is accumulated. It is configured to release the static electricity to the lighting substrate side.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, a pachinko machine, slot machine) according to the present embodiment includes the decoration means (for example, movable portions 11, 12, 14 and the like of the movable body 1 shown in FIG. And the substrate (for example, the substrate 630 shown in FIG. 137), the decoration means is at least partially plated (for example, electroplating such as zinc plating or copper plating, nickel plating) Etc., the substrate is a substrate provided with an electronic component, the substrate is a substrate provided with a via which is not connected to a pattern line, and the via is A plurality of game machines are formed in a certain direction.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to absorb the static electricity accumulated in the gaming machine or the game medium (game balls, game medals, etc.) by using the via, and the gaming machine having a feature in the substrate is provided. it can.

  Further, the via may be formed at a position closer to the decoration means than the electronic component. With such a configuration, malfunction of the electronic component may be prevented by absorbing the static electricity accumulated in the decoration means by the via.

  Further, the plating may be applied to the outer edge of the decorative means. With such a configuration, it may be possible to efficiently absorb static electricity accumulated in a game stand or game medium (game ball, game medal, etc.).

  Also, the via may be formed along the outer edge of the decoration means. With such a configuration, it may be possible to efficiently absorb static electricity accumulated in a game stand or game medium (game ball, game medal, etc.).

  The vias may be formed at an equal pitch in the certain direction. With such a configuration, it may be possible to efficiently absorb static electricity accumulated in a game stand or game medium (game ball, game medal, etc.).

  In addition, the via may be formed in the vicinity of a portion where the plating is performed in the decoration means. Such a configuration may allow the via to absorb static electricity accumulated at the plated portion.

  Also, the via may be connected to ground. With such a configuration, static electricity accumulated in a game console or game medium (game ball, game medal or the like) may be released to the ground in some cases.

  The electronic component may be an LED. With such a configuration, erroneous operation of the LED may be able to be prevented by absorbing the static electricity accumulated in the game stand, game media (game balls, game medals, etc.) and the like by the vias.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that provides an electronic award, and a medalless slot machine. Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. Further, among the plurality of configurations described in each example of the embodiment, the contents described in one or more configurations are applied to another configuration or described in another example of the embodiment By combining multiple configurations, the range of games may be further expanded.

Embodiment E
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, with reference to FIG. 141, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console from which a player can earn a profit when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the outer frame 102, the main body 104, the front frame door 106, the door 108 with a ball storage tray, The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a locking function, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, the one in which the light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an unillustrated opening lever which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, you may provide the door with a ball storage plate which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage plate was opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board Ball launch handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, a presentation button 136 for changing the presentation mode of the various presentation devices 206 (see FIG. 143) by the operation of the player, and the presentation button 136 A chance button lamp 138 for causing the effect button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 141 is provided with a lower tray full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). It shoots toward and corresponds to an example of a launcher. In addition, it may be provided with a right-handed button which can maximize the emission intensity by being depressed in a state where the ball emission handle 134 is operated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. The specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown in FIG. 141, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 142 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 141 viewed from the back side.

  At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 positioned on the right side in a rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 144) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for storing a first sub substrate 160 constituting a first sub control unit 400 (see FIG. 144) which performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 Second sub substrate case 166 which houses the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 144) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls A payout substrate case 172 for housing a payout substrate 170 which is provided with an error release switch 168 which is configured as shown in FIG. Launch board case 176 which houses launch board 174 which constitutes launch control section 630 (see FIG. 144) which performs control processing regarding launch of a sphere, and power control section 660 which provides power to various electric gaming machines (see FIG. 144) The power supply housing 182 includes a power supply substrate 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. A substrate case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 143 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven segment LEDs in the present embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the mode, it is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 If the player wins a prize, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 142 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning may be called a "winning ball", and a ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as a "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special view start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 142 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper dish. While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start port 232 is disposed below the common drawing start port 228. That is, the second special view start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls due to passage or entry of game balls, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball which has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

<Rendering device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 141, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 143 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec seal 290 representing the specs of the game stand is attached at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214; A symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like) and various movable members for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 and the external terminal board 349. The gaming information (for example, gaming state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Furthermore, although the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, it is configured such that signals such as commands can not be transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. It is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 And an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137 and detection signals from these sensors to the basic circuit 402. The image data etc. stored in the ROM 406 are read out based on signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404 A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 performs payout ball information indicating that payout of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been performed and payout of a predetermined number (for example, 25) of balls It outputs to the information input circuit 350, through the external terminal board 349, rental ball information etc. indicating that. Further, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects the front frame door 106 when it is open, and outputs an open signal. When the payout control unit 600 outputs an open signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, the power control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 discharges the main control unit 300 and the second sub control unit 500. Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 (a) to (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is the ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the special drawing 1 starting opening 230, the ball is inserted into special drawing 2 starting opening 232 A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it was having a ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment "the variation display of the special figure 1" (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 change game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment, "the variation display of the special figure 2" ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special view display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 As the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of this “variable display of special view 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of special view 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of special view. The variable display of this special drawing may be performed several times continuously.

  FIG. 145 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1. In FIG. 145 (a), nine types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing I" are shown. In FIG. 145 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) jackpot symbol, and it is a 15R definite variation big hit symbol that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol There is a real 5R probability variation big hit design that can not be expected to get out balls in the remaining rounds, while "Can be expected to get out balls in 5 of 15 rounds," "Special figure C" is a 15R big hit symbol Yes, it is a 15R-rank up bonus (RUB) symbol that you can expect to get out balls in all the 15 of the 15 rounds, and the "special figure D" is the 15R big hit symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is real 8R-RUB which can not expect the acquisition of the balls in the remaining rounds while the acquisition of balls can be expected in the two rounds, and the "special figure E" is the pattern of the 15R big hit, In the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that can not expect to get out balls, while "special figure F" is a 5R normal jackpot symbol. Fig. G "is a 2R big hit symbol, and is a 2R positive variation hit symbol called a latent probability variation or hidden probability variation which can not be expected to be obtained in any round in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to identify to the player how many rounds that can be expected to be won at the start of the jackpot, and the specific round (for example, five rounds). It is a big hit which is directed in a manner of asking the player whether or not the round which can be expected to be won will continue when the eyes and the ninth round are reached.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the jackpot in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination as to whether or not the special jackpot is performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a normal big hit and a definite change big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (probably big hit) or low (usually a big hit) in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the end of the big hit game, it may shift to the time saving state (power support state). Here, the power support state is a predetermined condition in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit, etc. It means the state. The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. Thus, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/100 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), and increases to 99/100 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the power support state. Also, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special view 2 start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-power-supply state, the power-chw open period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power-supply state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the blade members 2321 open more easily than in the non-power-on state. For example, the blade member 2321 which opens only once in the non-power support state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens twice in the power support state (open for 2 seconds and close for 1 second, and also for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased due to the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is particularly likely to occur to the player if the game ball is picked up by the electric chew having a small number of balls in a big hit game, and the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is reduced. It is because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time reduction state), all of the generalization probability change, the generalization change short period, the power chew open period extension, and the increase in the number of power chew open times are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if any one of the electric cho open period extension and the electric cho open number increase is performed, the probability of entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is increased, it may be set as the electric support state (short time state). In the non-power-supporting state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view 2 start opening 232 than in the power-supporting state. As described above, the special view 2 start port 232 is changed to a winning difficult state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter and a winning easy state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. In the special figure 2 start port 232, the entrance is in the easy-to-winning state in the power-supply state over a longer period than in the non-power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (common figure high probability state until the next big hit game is started) ) Is maintained, and when the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st non-power Transition to the support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, when the jackpot ("special figure G") without power support is won, it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when “special figure A” to “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. In addition, when “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure low probability spread figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes special figure high probability general drawing low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, one kind of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol besides the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for only 0.1 seconds at the maximum per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) in the first opening, or obtain a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a hit in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 145 (a) is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing mode (number of opening and closing times and opening time) of the variable winning opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening and closing mode of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, the number of opening times and / or the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost design.

  FIG. 145 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. In FIG. 145 (b), six types of special drawings of "special drawing a" to "special drawing f" are shown, of which five kinds of special drawings are big hit symbols ("special drawing a" to "special Figure e "). "Special figure a" is a 15R big hit design, and it is a 15R probability variation big hit design that can be expected to get out balls in all of the 15 rounds, and "special figure b" is a 15R big hit design, 15 It is a 15R-RUB design that can be expected to get out balls in all rounds of the round, "Special figure c" is a 15R jackpot pattern, and it is expected to get out balls in 8 of 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB which can not expect to get out balls in the remaining rounds, and "Special figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol and can be expected to get out balls in 4 out of 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB which can not be expected to obtain the balls, and the "special figure e" is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost design.

  FIG. 145 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying 5R probability variation big hit (“Special figure B”), 5R normal big hit (“Special figure F”), 2R normal big hit (“Special figure e”), “decorate” in symbol display areas 208a to 208c A combination of three or more decorative designs of the same number other than 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "(for example," decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1 "or" Stop the display of the decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 etc.). In addition, when notifying 15R definite variation big hit ("special figure A" and "special figure a"), "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Stop display of decoration 7 ". Furthermore, when 15R-RUB, substantial 8R-RUB and substantial 4R-RUB are to be notified, the left figure display area 208a and the right figure display area 208c are the decorative figures of the same number, and the middle figure display area 208b is The combination of the decorative designs which are the decorative designs (for example, "decorative 1-majesty-decorative 1", "decorative 4-majesty-decorative 4", etc.) is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of notifying a hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or a small hit (“special figure H”) that is a big hit of 2R, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop the display of the combination of decorative symbols such as 3 ". A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decor 2-decor 3" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure f”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, display from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  FIG. 145 (d) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols of the "common figure A", which is a deviation from the "common figure A", which is a hit symbol, is displayed in a stopped state. Also in FIG. 145 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144, a special drawing random value, a special drawing round determination random value, a special drawing electricity support determination random value, and a special symbol determination random number are stored. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter which generates these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special drawings, special drawing winning random number values, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, an area for storing the number of reservations of the special view in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a storage area for the number of special drawings suspension. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a start information storage unit for special drawing divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas for which the start of the success / failure determination (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for common use is also prepared. In the start information storage unit for special drawing, as described later, a plurality of types of start information are made into one set, and the start information is stored for each area one set at a time in the winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the timer circuit 312 a numerical value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. 2 is first turned on (indicating that there has been an operation) If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter are updated. For example, when the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 147, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144 includes a timer circuit 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 4 ms in this embodiment), and the main control is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The partial timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (this process is not performed) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process error does not occur) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 144 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals representing that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in the previously-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area, respectively. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 144, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there has been a winning on these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information of the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects entry of the ball into the first special view start port 230 matches the above-described winning determination pattern information, the first special view It is determined that there has been a prize in starting opening 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium which passes through a predetermined area is detected, and the processing following the winning in first special drawing starting slot 230 is performed. If the information on the presence or absence does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 thereafter. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the value of the initial value generating random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control symbol random number value and the random number The random number counter for generating each of the special figure random numbers is updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the common pattern display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the normal symbol display device 210, the first special view display device 212, and the second special view display device 214 Special figure display symbol update timer for clocking the time to display the fluctuation / stop, various timers including timer for clocking predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined closing time, predetermined ending effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 234 and 226 and starting openings 230 and 232 have a winning, the value of the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening in RAM 308 is calculated. It is read, 1 is added, and it sets to the original prize ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning reception process, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, plural types of start information are acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an open area according to the winning order (order of suspension) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 144 are composed of 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 145 (c) and the lost symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 2321 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the blade member 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 while setting predetermined opening period (for example 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of 3211, and information indicating a closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, as will be described later, the common drawing mistake flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is acquired as a common drawing timer random number value, and the common drawing display device 210 is generally selected from among a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value. One time for fluctuating display of a figure is selected, and this fluctuating display time is stored in a common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a common drawing fluctuation display time. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special drawing prefetch process (step S224) is performed. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later. Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 5R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, off flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), for example, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure If the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the spread map probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure a, the special figure b, the special figure c, or the special figure d shown in FIG. 145 (a), the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the special probability e flag is turned off and the special probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special flag f is turned off when the lost flag is turned on. The 7 segment LED is turned on / off and drive control is performed, and in the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), lost symbol ( The finalized display of any one symbol of the special figure f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 is driven to open and close (a part of various solenoids 332) until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls. Is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 Set the information indicating the closing period to. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds, 5 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, Storage area for a production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set a standby period for displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended. The information which shows the presentation waiting period to is set to. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time-saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the general drawing low probability state (electric Chu open spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 2321 opens more easily than in the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting opening The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) having a high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) having a low degree of advantage. For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a departure (decision determination) is performed using the qualification table stored in the table. Next, main control unit 300 uses the special drawing determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special drawing 2 random number value in the acquired special drawing 2 start information, the determined success or failure determination result, etc. Determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of special figure 2 variation game with high degree of advantage and special figure 1 variation game with low degree of preference, special figure change game pertaining to the suspension of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 start starting prize winning It may be starting opening winning combination order fluctuation which starts in order. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the pending limit.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or one display may be configured to display a lottery result of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure which has stopped the variation first may affect the lottery result of the special figure which stops the variation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data contains various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special pattern probability change flags, timers selected in the special drawing related lottery process In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the number etc., and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, values of special view probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a prize effect start command and end In the case of the effect start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 Including presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, information such as the type of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Including.

  In the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, special figure 1 related lottery process and special figures stored in the command data in the RAM 308 [2] Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. being held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 146 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. And then go into the HALT state.

  FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 149 (a) to (c)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 2 is increasing (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) prior to the determination process Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information Prior determination processing prior to the success or failure determination processing in the processing (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support state), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Also, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 148, prefetching is always performed for the startup information of the special figure 2 that has increased, and prefetching is always performed for the startup information of the special figure 1 that has increased, except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result.

  FIG. 149 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 149 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 pre-reading result information is stored in the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 149 (a), the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 149 (a), "special figure I" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and "special figure I as stop symbol information in the storage area" hold 2 ". Is stored, and "special map A" (15R probability variation big hit) is stored in storage area "hold 3" as stop symbol information, and "special figure I as stop symbol information in storage area" hold 4 ". "" Is stored.

  FIG. 149 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 149 (b), the special view 2 pre-fetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the reserve number of the special view 2 variation game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 149 (b), “special figure f” (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” Information is not stored. In FIG. 149 (b), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 149 (c) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit in power support. As shown in FIG. 149 (c), in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the propriety determination result, the fluctuation timer number (variation time), the timer group to be described later are determined in advance, and such information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result It can be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the table for determination of acceptance used in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 150 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability table for acceptance determination, and FIG. 150 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability table for acceptance determination. In the case of performing the success or failure judgment of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure high probability state, referring to the high probability table for success or failure judgment shown in FIG. Referring to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 150 (b). And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 change game, the big hit, the small hit or the release is selected as the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Similarly, in the special view high probability state, the special view low probability state shown in FIG. 150 (a) is referred to when the special view high probability state of special view 2 is determined. In the case, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 150 (b) is referred to. And based on the numerical value range which the table for the propriety determination referred to and the acquired random number value, the propriety determination result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 2 change game, a jackpot or an omission is selected as a result of the pass / fail judgment.

  FIG. 150 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hitting determination table. When the jackpot judgment result of the big hit is lost, the small hit judgment table shown in FIG. 150 (c) is referred to, and the referred small hit judgment table indicates the numerical range indicated and the acquired random number value. , Select the success or failure judgment result of the special figure small hit lottery. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure judgment result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 1, the small hit is selected with the probability of 2000/65536 as the success or failure judgment result, and the loss is lost with the probability of 63536/65536. Although it is selected, in the case where the determination result (lottery result) of the lottery per special drawing is special drawing 2, no small hit is selected.

  Next, a stop is performed based on the result of determination of success or failure determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A special drawing determination table used for symbol determination will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 151 (a) is a view showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 151 (b) is a view showing an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 (a), the special figure is based on the result of the special figure 1 and the numerical value range of the random number. Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 1 is a big hit, any one of the special view A to the special view G is selected, and when the success or failure determination result of the special view 1 is a small hit, When the special view H is selected and the success or failure result of the special view 1 is lost, the special view I is selected.

  In addition, when deciding the stop design of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 design table for the special figure 2 which is shown in figure 151 (b), on the basis of the decision result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of random value, We draw the stop symbol of the special figure 2. In the present embodiment, when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a big hit, any one of the special views a to e is selected, and when the success or failure result of the special view 2 is a loss, the special view f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special view display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 152 (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 152 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when the depression of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data according to the depression of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 152 (b) is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 152 (c) is a flowchart of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 152 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated in the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. If not (step S703: No), the process waits for the input of the transfer end interrupt signal.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes). The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 153A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 153 (a), various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S801, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 807 following step S 805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S809 following step S807, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S 807, processing such as reading out effect data (effect data by effect movable body 224 or effect data by lamp) corresponding to this command is performed from ROM 506, and the effect data is updated. If it is necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 153B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 153C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered when the timer interrupt is triggered. Execute in the cycle of In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S 803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 154 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 154, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special view 1 holding lamp 218, a special view 2 holding lamp 220, and a drawing The hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is hidden, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode, etc.) may be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol display area 284 is provided in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether or not the symbol is changing (or while the symbol is stopped), and from the top, the notification area during symbol fluctuation of the common figure, the notification region during symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 , It becomes a notification area during symbol change of the special figure 2. While a figure of a square is lit and displayed while the symbol of the common figure is stopped, the figure of the square is blinked or extinguished while the symbol of the common figure changes. While the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, a round figure is lit and displayed, but while the special figure 1 symbol is fluctuating, the round figure is blinked or turned off. While the special figure 2 symbol is stopped, a triangular figure is lit and displayed, while the special figure 2 symbol is changed, the triangular figure is blinked or extinguished. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position, but also in display mode (shape in this case), so that the determination can be made only when the player looks at first glance. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 280 is provided at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 154 is the non-power-supporting state (non-shorting state). In the decorative symbol display device 208 in this non-electric support state, a reserved icon display area 281 of Special Figure 1 is provided on the left side of the variation icon display area 280. In addition, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  A reserve icon representing the reserve of special figure 1 is displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and a reserve icon representing reserve of the special figure 2 is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 . The number of reservations for Special Figure 1 is also represented by the number of suspension icons for Special Figure 1 in addition to the number of lights for Special Figure 1 suspension lamp 218, and the number of reservations for Special Figure 2 is the number of illuminations for Special Figure 2 Hold lamp 220 In addition, it is also represented by the number of pending icons in Special Figure 2. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the reserve icon on the right side becoming the hold icon with older prize winnings, and in the reserve icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the reserve icons are displayed vertically The lower the pending icon, the older the winning icon will be.

  In FIG. 154 (a), two reserve icons h11 and h12 for the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 for the special figure 1, and both reserve icons h11 and h12 for the two special figures 1 are displayed. , And the default display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Special Figure 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 154 (a), in order to make it easy to understand that four suspension icons are displayed in the suspension icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the suspension icons which are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special view 2. This is because, as described above, the control state (playing state) shown in FIG. 154 is in the non-power support state (non-short time state), so it is difficult for the power chute to open and the special figure 2 start opening 232 has difficulty in winning This is because In addition, although the line which defines an area | region is not actually displayed, the line which demarcates an area | region is specifically displayed in the pending | holding icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, ie, the pending | holding icon display area provided in the right end Are shown in dotted lines for clarity. It should be noted that a line defining the area may be provided, or a line defining the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Moreover, in order to make it clear that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons which are not actually displayed are also shown by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (playing state), the reserved icon display area of the special figure in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 which is easy to win is the left side of the variation icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the reserved icon display area of the other special view is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non power saving state, as shown in FIG. 154 (a), the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of the special view 2 An area 282 is displayed at the right end. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d, and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the reserved icon of the special view 2 is a rectangular non-patterned and white display mode, and the display position of the special icon 1 is different from that of the reserved icon. Here, the shape is also different, and the determination can be made at a glance of the player. In addition, the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 1 and the default display mode of the reserve icon of the special view 2 may be the same.

  In this embodiment, the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure is a row in the order of the variation start in the special figure display device → the blinking start or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → the movement animation start or deletion of the hold icon → the variation start of the decoration symbol Although this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 154 (b), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and the turn off of the fourth symbol is further performed. There has been no change in the design yet.

  In FIG. 154 (c), the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 is started. The movement animation here starts the movement of the hold icon (target hold icon of the current symbol variation) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 toward the variation icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1. At this stage, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not started.

  In FIG. 154 (d), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 154 (e), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. The hold icon, which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of fluctuation, reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11, but still at this stage, The variable display of the decorative pattern has not been started. In addition, when symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, the hold icon which has been the first hold icon h11 may be regarded as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon so far The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 154 (f).

  As shown in FIG. 154 (g), an operation promotion notification image 136P prompting the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. Although the variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special figure is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position not overlapping with the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 154 (h), the effective period is reduced, and in FIG. 154 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 154 (j), a reach state rush notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state rush notice image 2071, a character display “chance” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 154 (k), the reach state rush notice image 2071 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes visible, and then the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 154 (l). Although the reach state rush notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but it may always be entered.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect serving as a trigger for an advance notice regarding the symbol variation display currently performed.

  In FIG. 154 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variation icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner and displayed in a reduced size. , Has developed into a super reach (Swordsman reach). The image of the swordmaster of the enemy character is displayed large on the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (n), and the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (o) continues the battle between the hero of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character. The animation of the scene is displayed.

  It should be noted that the reach state rush notice image 2071 may be not only a notice of rushing into the reach state but also a notice of development to super reach.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 154 step by step.

  In FIG. 155 (p) continued from FIG. 154 (o), animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 155 (s). In FIG. 155 (s), the main character of the hero wins over the swordsman of the enemy character, and in FIG. 155 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a background image different from before. Soon, as shown to the figure (u), the fluctuation | variation fluctuation | variation of the combination of the decoration pattern of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is displayed. The background here may be hidden or may be a different background image. Further, the display of the variation icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols of the 15R probability variation big hit confirmation of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Further, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 155 (v) is on. Although the background is hidden in FIG. 155 (v), a background image different from the default is actually displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 155 (w), as a jackpot game start effect, the character display of “probably variable jackpot” is performed together with a background image (omitted here) for celebrating the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is in the reach state with different decorative designs in FIG. 154 (l) symbol combinations that are substantially 5R probability variation big hit, 5R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), another figure continuing from FIG. 155 (t) In 155 (u '), the fluctuation variation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is displayed, and in Fig. 155 (v') following Fig. 155 (u '), "decoration 6-decoration The combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit of 6-decoration 6 "is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 155 (w ') following FIG. 155 (v'), a character display of "big hit" is made together with a background image (omitted here) for celebrating the big hit as a big hit game start effect.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram gradually showing an example of effects in another case following FIG. 155 (q).

  In FIG. 156 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 154 (o) continues, and this animation continues to FIG. 156 (b). In FIG. 156 (b), the character of the main character is lost to the swordsman of the enemy character, and in FIG. 156 (c), as in FIG. 155 (t), all is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Soon, in FIG. 156 (d), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" starts. Here, the display of the variation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the special view 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (e), the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special figure 1 lights up, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" stops It is displayed. Next, during the finalized display period of the special view 1, in the variable icon display area 280, the deletion animation of the variable icon h0 is executed. In the figure (f), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 is started, and in the figure (g), the deletion animation continues, and the fluctuation icon h0 disappears completely in the figure (h). In addition, before the finalized display of the special view 1 is performed, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon h0 may be executed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. Here, FIG. 157 (a) is a view for explaining a display example of the notice icon, and FIG. 157 (b) is a view for explaining the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a view for explaining an example of the digest timing of the advance notice icon, and FIG. 7D is a view for explaining an example of the increase timing of the advance notice icon. FIG. 158 (a) is a view for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 158 (b) is a view for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas, and from the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, the notice icon fourth display The area YA4, the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of pending icons that can be displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is four (or the number of available pending icons when the additional icon display area of the special view 2 is further displayed) Is a total of eight), so it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 differs from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the number of preview icons that can be displayed and the number of pending icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the advance notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one, or may be set to any number of two or more. Also, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  In the notice icon display area 285, one notice icon may be displayed for one area. For example, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), a notice icon I6 of a hat consisting of a symbol of a hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a notice icon second display area YA2 has a box of one thousand boxes. A notice icon I9 of a box consisting of symbols is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of a fan consisting of a fan icon is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. A notice icon fourth display area YA4 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. The notice icon I7 of the shuriken consisting of the design of the shuriken is displayed, and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon consisting of the ribbon design is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, and the notice icon sixth display area YA6 is It is blank. As to which notice icon is to be displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285, based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 157 (b). It is determined. In this embodiment, one notice icon is displayed for one area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed for one area.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is digested at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (c), for example. To be controlled. The control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 in accordance with the progress of the game, and read and executed as appropriate. That is, eight seconds after the start of the variation display (the variation) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 157 (a), the notice icon I8 of the ribbon is digested, and then it is displayed as the notice icon I8 of the digested ribbon. A corresponding effect may be performed. Thereafter, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and when the change display of the decorative symbol (symbol change corresponding to the hold 1) is started, When 12 seconds have passed after the start of the symbol variation, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 of the digested shuriken may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is ended, the hold icon h11 of special drawing 1 (in FIG. 157 (a), the hold icon h12 moved to the hold icon h11) moves toward the fluctuation icon display area 280 When the variation display of the decorative symbol (symbol variation corresponding to hold 2) is started and 4 seconds have passed since the symbol variation was started, the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, and An effect corresponding to the digested hat advance notice icon I6 may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed after the SP reach is started, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the notice icon I9 of the one thousand boxes digested may be executed. Thereafter, when 2 seconds have passed after all the decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped, the fan announcement icon I10 may be digested, and then the effect corresponding to the digested fan announcement icon I10 may be executed. . As described above, it can be said that the digesting of the advance notice icon is to notify the player in advance that the advance notice and the effect are to be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 157 (a), each notice icon displayed in each area (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 has, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by The control information is stored, for example, in the RAM 408 of the sub control unit 400 in accordance with the progress of the game, and read and executed as appropriate. That is, four seconds after the start of the change display (the change) of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 157 (a), the ton symbol appears on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the tousame effect to increase the notice icon is executed. Be done. In this hall effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I8 of the ribbon, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is started, DJ effects appear on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice icon is increased. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I9 of the one-man box in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. After that, the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished, and after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed from the start of the second pseudo-sequence effect, the hall effect is executed and the fan An effect of increasing and displaying the notice icon I10 of the second notice icon 10 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Here, the pseudo-series effect is a variation display mode of the decoration symbol which executes the variation start and temporary stop display of the decoration symbol a plurality of times in the variation display of one special figure.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol change display that is a departure. For example, it is possible to set the number of notice icons to be increased up to one in symbol fluctuation display to be out, and to increase the number of notice icons to increase in symbol fluctuation display to be a big hit.

  Next, the contents of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As the advance notice icon, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), there are an icon whose content of the corresponding effect is not clear and an icon whose corresponding content of the effect is clear as shown in FIG. 158 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the notice icon (the notice icon before change) in which the content of the corresponding presentation is not clear includes the first notice icon I1 of the first lord and the second notice icon I2 of the second lord. , And the third icon for the notice icon I3 and the first button notification icon I4. The first hallmark's notice icon I1 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the hall in white, and the jackpot has a low degree of reliability. In addition, the second icon of condolence announcement icon I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the statue of honor in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. In addition, the third hallmark's notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the hall in red, and the jackpot has a high degree of reliability. Further, the first button preview icon I4 is a preview icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the jackpot is either weak or strong. The first hallmark notice icon I1, the second hallmark notice icon I2, and the third hallmark notice icon I3 are displayed at predetermined change display timings (for example, timing of the increase display of the notice icons). It changes to any of the changed notice icons shown in 158 (b). Also, the first button preview icon I4 changes to any of the preview icons after the change shown in FIG. 158 (b) at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button preview icon I4 may be changed to any of the pre-change preview icons at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first tonome preview icon I1, the second tonosho notice icon I2, the third tonosho preview icon I3 and the first button preview icon I4 start to change symbol patterns to be read ahead. May be displayed before the event, and may function as a pre-reading notice. Also, in the present embodiment, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, there may be a case where a character indication is displayed accompanying the notice icon, which will be described later. When the notice icon I2 of Tonosama 2 and the notice icon I3 of the third donkey are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), for example, a notice icon (a notice icon after change) of a notice icon I6 for a hat, a notice icon I7 for a shuriken, and a ribbon There are a notice icon I8, a notice box I9 of one thousand boxes, a notice icon I10 of a fan, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notification icon I6 is a notification icon that imitates a hat worn by the character of the captain, and the jackpot has a high degree or a low degree of reliability. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be performed only once. Here, there are a strong pattern, a weak pattern and a cassette pattern in the pseudo-series effect. For example, as described later, when a pseudo-sequence effect starts, a character of a bancho appears, but the display mode of the character of the bancho is different from the normal (for example, a bancho is an aura). By displaying the wrapped display mode, it is notified that the reliability is a strong degree. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-series effect, it may be notified that it is the third pseudo-series effect to indicate that the reliability is high. Further, the pseudo-series effect of the weak pattern informs that the reliability is about the weak degree by displaying the appearing leader character in the normal display mode. Further, as described later, the pseudo-series effect of the cassette pattern is an effect of performing the off-set display while making it appear that the pseudo-series effect is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter display is displayed accompanying the notice icon I6 of the hat, if the degree of reliability is a high degree, “continuation” is displayed as red pattern or black character as A pattern. May be Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Also, if the degree of reliability is weak, it may be displayed as “continuation” with “continuation” or “question mark” in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-series effect may be always performed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I7 of the shuriken is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the gardener (ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I7 of one shuriken is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a high degree, the case where the notice effect under execution switches to a highly reliable strong notice effect via freeze effect may be executed. Yes (Freeze Notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbols of the decorative symbol are notified in advance. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, “freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern if the degree of reliability is high. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is low, "A-ch" may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested, either one of the freeze notice and the stop symbol notice may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I8 of the ribbon is a notice icon imitating the ribbon worn by the character of Princess Chibi, and the jackpot has a high degree or a low degree of reliability. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a high degree, an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the pre-reading mode or the change notice mode may be executed (stage change Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, an effect may be executed to change the displayed background to any one of a plurality of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (weak stage change) Production). Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter display is displayed accompanying the notice icon I 8 of the ribbon, “Steachen” is displayed in red or black as “A” pattern if the degree of reliability is high. May be Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. Also, if the degree of reliability is weak, black letters “Stéchen” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I8 on the ribbon is digested, either one of the stage change strong presentation and the stage change weak presentation may be performed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The notice icon I9 of the one thousand box is a notice icon imitating a thousand box thrown by the character of the lady towards the peasant, and the reliability of the big hit is determined to be a big hit, strong or weak. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if the reliability of the big hit is a strong degree, the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach production, and the reach transition production is performed. After that, an instruction to shift (promotion) to strong reach effect with high reliability is performed (reach transition effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is low, the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notice, and then the highly-reliable strong cut-in notice is executed (notice promotion Production). In addition, if it is a big hit decision, either reach transition production or advance promotion production is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed in addition to the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes, in the case of the big hit confirmation, “Ball behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is high, "promotion" may be displayed in red or black as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. In addition, if the degree of reliability is weak, black letters “promotion” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and then it may be changed to the additional display of the A pattern. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, one of the finalization effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance promotion effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the additional display of the A pattern may not be changed.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the jackpot reliability is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice notifying in advance that the big hit has been decided, or a premier reach where the big hit is decided (premium effect). Alternatively, the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested after reach is displayed, and a resurrection effect that is a big hit is performed (resurrection effect). Further, in the present embodiment, when the letter notation is displayed accompanying to the notice icon I10 of the fan, "blessing" may be displayed. In addition, when the advance notice icon I10 of the fan is digested, either one of the premiere effect and the revival effect may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the contents to be produced are different depending on the timing at which the fan advance icon I10 is digested, but the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button preview icon I11 is a preview icon imitating the effect button 136, and the jackpot reliability is either the weakest or the jackpot finalized. When one second button preview icon I11 is digested, a button effect for urging the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, when the operation reception period is started and the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest display of the second button preview icon I11 is the hat forecast icon I6, the Shuriken forecast icon I7, and the ribbon The corresponding presentation may be performed by changing to any one of the preliminary display icon I 8, the preliminary display icon I 8 of the two-tiered box, and the preliminary display icon I 10 of the fan. Alternatively, it may be erased and displayed without changing to any of the notice icons.

  In the present embodiment, when the notice icon before the change changes to the notice icon after the change, the change display of the notice icon is performed. However, the change icon of the notice icon before the change is displayed It is also possible to perform display for deleting the advance notice icon (notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 158 (b): elimination effect). In this effect, it is informed that the change is out. That is, it is a preliminary notice indicating that it is an outset confirmation pattern. Naturally, reliability is the weakest. In addition, even if the elimination effect is executed, it may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 159 is a view showing in stages an example of effects based on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 159, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general drawing display device 210, the first special view holding lamp 218, the second special view holding lamp 220, A graphic reserve lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the fourth symbol display device 284a is a display device having a function similar to the display of the fourth symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 154, and displays the display result of the fourth symbol according to the light emission mode of the LED, for example. It is possible to The fourth symbol display device 284a may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284a is provided, for example, at a predetermined position of the game board 200, and is driven and controlled by the first sub control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a notification region during symbol variation of the general drawing, a notification region during symbol variation of the special drawing 1, and a notification region during symbol variation of the special drawing 2. While the symbol of the common figure is stopped, the LED of the area where the rectangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or turned off during the symbol fluctuation of the common figure. While the special figure 1 symbol is stopped, the LED of the area where the round figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or extinguished while the special figure 1 symbol is fluctuating. While the special figure 2 symbol is stopped, the LED of the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit and displayed, but is blinked or extinguished while the special figure 2 symbol is changing. As described above, the fourth symbol not only differs in display position, but also in display mode (shape in this case), so that the determination can be made only when the player looks at first glance. The preview notice may be made by changing the display mode, the lighting mode or the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. In addition, the fourth symbol may be lighted and displayed during symbol fluctuation, and may be extinguished and displayed while symbol stopping.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (1), the above-mentioned notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 159 (1), the notice icon is not displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. Also, as shown in FIG. 159 (1), symbol variation display is performed in the first special view display device 212, and in response to this, variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol display device 208. In addition, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special view 1 is performed. The advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed or may not be displayed as needed.

  Further, in FIG. 159 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the hold icons h11 and h12 of two special views 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 The two reserved icons h11 and h12 and the variation icon h0 are displayed in the default display mode (round no-pattern and white display mode). Although the display of the reserved icon display area 282 of the special view 2 is omitted in this effect example, the second reserved icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (2), when the gaming ball is won in the first special view starting opening 230, the number of lights in the first special view holding lamp 218 is increased by one and becomes three. It is shown that the number is three. In addition, a third reserved icon h13 of the special view 1 is also displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1. The third hold is a pre-read target hold, which is a trigger that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon as described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is hatched and shown, but it is actually the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figure 1 It is a display mode (round non-pattern and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7", and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  And in FIG. 159 (4), the symbol variation in the 1st special figure display 212 is started, and also until the light extinction of the 4th symbol is performed, the change is not yet made to the reservation icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 159 (5), the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 of the special figure 1 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variation icon display area 280 And the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is the special view It becomes one second holding icon h12. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 159 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the crown pattern effect is started. This is an effect to be executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  Then, after the main character YM is moved and displayed to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (7), the notice icon I6 of the hat held by the hat is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display for throwing toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the character of the lord YM succeeds in displaying the advance notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notification icon I6 will be executed in the future. That is, by displaying the notice icon I6 of the hat in the notice icon display area 285, it can be said that it is indicated that the pseudo-series effect will be performed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 159 (11) to (12), display is performed in which the character YM of the crown pattern is framed out below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of off is decided. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 step by step.

  In Fig. 160 (14) continued from Fig. 159 (13), the symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and further until the fourth symbol is turned off, the change to the reserved icon or the decorative symbol is It has not happened yet.

  In FIG. 160 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special view 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes It becomes the icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of the special figure 1. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 160 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character YM of the crown pattern appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a crown pattern effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the advance notice icon based on the result of the pre-reading of the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, the character of the lord YM is in possession of a notice icon I6 of a hat, a notice icon I9 of a box, and a notice icon I10 of a fan.

  Then, after the tomoku character YM is moved to the predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (17) and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display is performed in which the icon I9 and the fan advance notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the one-man box is the notice icon third display area The notice icon I10 of the fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Thereafter, the same effect display as shown in FIG. 159 (10) to FIG. 159 (12) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (20), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of off is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also erased.

  Then, in FIG. 160 (21), symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and further, the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 160 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and changes to the fluctuation icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, when, for example, 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 160 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the notice icon digesting effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this manner. As shown in FIG. 160 (23), when two or more same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, two notice icons I6 of hats are displayed, for example, on the left side Although it is preset to preferentially digest the displayed preview icons, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the preview icons. Further, which notice icon to use may be determined randomly, or may be set to preferentially consume the notice icon displayed on the right. That is, the order of digesting the advance notice icons can be set appropriately as limited to those described above.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "CONTINUE" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo-series effect will be performed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good. Further, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and displayed, for example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display mode of the display of the fluctuation icon h0 to the display mode of the advance notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE" at the timing of FIG. 160 (26), and then as shown in FIG. The left symbol and the right symbol are displayed stopped. At this time, "decoration 1" is displayed on the left pattern, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the right pattern. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 160 step by step.

  In FIG. 161 (28) continued from FIG. 160 (27), in response to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed right The effect display is performed to push up the symbol, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo-series effect may be started. In the present embodiment, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again after the bancho character BC lifts the right symbol, but for example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ As a decoration 1 ′ ′), a reach state may be formed, and reach effect may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (29), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol and the right symbol are continuously stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, the pseudo-series symbol in which the character is represented is The display moving at a low speed is performed from the upper side to the lower side.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display of is performed. In this embodiment, in this way, the pseudo run symbol is stopped and displayed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. In addition, when the pseudo run pattern is frame-displayed downward without being stopped and displayed, the pseudo run is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols of the off state is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the notice icon I6 of the hat is not digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (32), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo x 2” is displayed, which indicates that the second variable display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-series effect has been started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "decoration 1" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c respectively, and the reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not been started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (34), the display in which the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is moved from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I6 of the hat moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (35), and then enlarged as shown in FIG. Below the notice icon I6 of the hat, a character display of "CONTINUE" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo-series effect will be performed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased along with the character display of "CONTINUE" at the timing of FIG. 161 (37), and thereafter, the hat in FIG. In response to the finalization of the notice icon I6, the character BC of the bancho appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display is performed to push up the right symbol being stopped and displayed, and the second pseudo-sequence effect is performed. Is notified to the player that there is a possibility that

  After that, as shown in FIG. 161 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character BC of the bancho has pushed up the right symbol, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is “decoration 1” The decoration is changed to “2”, and a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208 b, a display in which the pseudo-connected symbol moves at low speed from the upper side to the lower side is performed. At this time, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" is deleted, but the display may be continued. Moreover, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be displayed in another area. Moreover, while the pseudo run symbol is displayed, the display mode of the character information of "pseudo x 2" may be changed. In this example of production, after the character BC of the Bancho has pushed up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-connected symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 161 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display including the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo run is to be performed. In this embodiment, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit as the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested in one time of symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one notice icon I6 of the hat is digested and the pseudo-sequence effect is performed only once, and in the case where the two notice icons I6 of the hat are digested and the pseudo-sequence effect is performed twice, the hat It is easy to become a big hit if the two previous notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the two hat announcement icons I6 are digested, and the three hat announcement icons I6 are digested. It can be said that it is easy to become a big hit if three preliminary announcement icons I6 of the hat are digested, in the case where the pseudo-sequence effect is performed three times.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (42), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. At this time, in the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “pseudo x 3” is displayed, which indicates that the third variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo continuous effect has been started.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 161 step by step.

  In FIG. 162 (43) continued from FIG. 161 (42), the decorative symbols of “decoration 1” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. Here, reach effect is to be started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (44), it develops into the above-mentioned super reach. In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed so far in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and reduced. Is displayed. The image of the swordsman of the enemy character is displayed large in the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (44), and in the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (45), the battle between the hero of the main character and the swordsman of the enemy character Animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (46), the display in which the notice icons I9 of the one and two box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one-hand box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the notice icon I9 of the one-man box moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the enlarged icon is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (47) and above the notice icon I9 of the one-man box displayed. The word "promotion" is displayed as a reminder to shift to a highly reliable presentation. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the one-two box advance notice icon I9 is displayed enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the notice icon I9 of the one-and-two-box with the character display of "promotion" at the timing of FIG. 162 (48). At the timing of 162 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 162 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display being executed becomes slightly darker, and the character of the lord appears in the cut-in display, A display is made to turn off the reach effect display in progress, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG. 162 (50).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 162 (51), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display “is it too hot” is displayed on the dark background, FIG. 162 (52) At the timing shown in, the character display "NO" is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (53), the character display of "one blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 is possible, to the player The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (55), as shown in FIG. 162 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased. It is shown that the button reach production has failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 162 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2”.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 162 step by step.

  In FIG. 163 (58) continued from FIG. 162 (57), all including the advance notice icon display area 285 are temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 163 (59), the swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” starts. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the temporary symbol stop display, display at which the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the fourth notice area YA4 of the notice icon is digested is started at the timing shown in FIG. . That is, display is performed such that the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan advance notice icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (61). At this time, for example, below the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in an enlarged manner, a letter display of "blessing" may be added to notify that the big hit is determined. In addition, in the case of appending the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after being enlarged.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the notice icon I10 of the fan at the timing of FIG. 163 (62), and the notice icon display area 285 is framed upward. To be displayed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (63), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols that were fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed and re-variation effect is started . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely framed out. The notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 163 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in reduced size. Ru.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 163 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown in FIG. 163 (66), the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit decision of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special view display device 212, the "special view A", which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern display device 284a, the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special view 1 Is on. Thereafter, although not shown, a big hit game is started after the above-mentioned big hit game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the re-variation effect is executed and becomes a big hit by digesting the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in the notice icon display area 285, but the notice icon I10 of the fan is the notice icon display area When the display is not displayed at 285, the display result of the removal may be derived without performing the re-variation effect. That is, when the reach transition effect performed by digesting the one-two box notice icon I9 is performed and becomes a departure, this reach transfer effect can be said to be a false advance effect. That is, when one notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is digested, if reach transition effect as a false notice of a type corresponding to the last notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is executed, the result of the symbol variation display It can be said that the The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 for the hat, the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I7 for the shuriken, and the notice effect corresponding to the notice icon I8 for the ribbon.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the notice effect can be performed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the advance notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the advance notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, although the preview icon is digested only during execution of the symbol variation display which is the target of the preview preview, and the effect corresponding to the digested preview icon is executed, it is the target of the preview preview. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested to execute the effect corresponding to the notice icon. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched notice and the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display to be executed prior to the symbol variation display to be prefetched notice are made different. It may be the same or may be the same.

  Next, another example of the effect of the above-described notice icon increase effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 164 to 166 are diagrams showing in stages the other effect examples of the increase effect of the advance notice icon. In FIGS. 164 to 166, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 164 (8a) to (10a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 164 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9a-1), the thrown first preview icon I1 of the first crown is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (9a-2), the display shown in FIG. 164 (10a) is performed after the display in which the first condolences' notice icon I1 displayed in the advance icon display area 285 explodes. Then, the notice icon I1 of the first tonome who has exploded is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and an effect display is performed in which the tonome character YM is happy to be displayed increasing the notice icon. Also according to this presentation example, the player expects that the presentation corresponding to the hat notification icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 164 (8 b) to (9 b) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 164 (8 b), effect display is performed in which the first button preview icon I 4 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285 instead of the hat preview icon I 6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9 b), the thrown first button preview icon I 4 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA 1 of the preview icon display area 285. If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button preview icon I4 is displayed in the preview icon display area 285 and before the first button preview icon I4 is digested, the first hallmark's It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the second notice icon I2 of the second hall, and the notice icon I3 of the third hall. As described above, in this example of the effect, since the reliability of the big hit indicated by the advance notice icon is difficult to recognize until the effect button 136 is operated, the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the reliability of the big hit There are cases where it is possible to improve the stage effect. Note that the period from when the first button preview icon I4 is displayed in the preview icon display area 285 until it is digested may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button advance notice icon I4 is displayed across a plurality of times of symbol variation display, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period, or the symbol Even during the stop display period, the operation of the effect button 136 may be enabled. In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, a notice icon that is to be displayed when the effect button 136 is operated at the time of finishing the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button preview icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136, The effect display corresponding to the notice icon scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. In addition, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136 The effect display corresponding to may be performed. In addition, when the button effect is performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, the first button preview icon may not be changed to another preview icon even if the effect button 136 is operated until the first button preview icon I4 is digested.

  FIGS. 164 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 164 (8c), as in the case of FIG. 159 (8), an effect display is performed in which the hat advance icon I6 is thrown toward the advance icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 164 (9 c), it is shown that the hat advance notice icon I 6 does not reach the advance notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the case increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. In addition, a garbled increase presentation may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, as the notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability, the caster increase presentation may be less likely to be performed.

  FIGS. 164 (7d) to (9d) show other effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 164 (7d), as in FIG. 159 (7), it is shown that the character YM of the lady with the hat advance icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position. Thereafter, in FIG. 164 (8 d), an effect display is performed in which not only one hat notification icon I 6 but also three hat notification icons I 6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notification icon display area 285. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9 d), the three hat forecast icons I 6 are displayed in the first notice area YA 1, second notice area YA 2 and second notice area of the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of the plurality of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of presentation may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (9 d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I 6) is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 by a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. It is also possible to give notice that the jackpot will be decided because it is guaranteed that the effect will be executed three times. Also, a highly reliable notice icon is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (hard to be stocked), and a notice icon with low reliability is easily displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (easily stocked). Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 164 (9d ′), a part or all of the three notice icons I6 of the thrown three hats do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and from the left of the display area It is also possible to execute a partial increase increase effect or a full increase increase effect which causes a frame out.

  FIGS. 164 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 164 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 159 (7), the character YM of the lady like having a notice icon I9 of one box and a notice icon I10 of a fan in addition to the notice icon I6 of one hat. Is shown moved to a predetermined throwing position. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest degree of reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest degree of reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon randomly selected may be displayed. You may make it display only. Thereafter, in FIG. 164 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially. Further, as described above, the three notice icons do not have to be different from each other. For example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (9e), the three notice icons thrown in the notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon third display area YA3 of notice icon display area 285. Each will be displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of a plurality of types of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, the expectation for the increase in the number of times of execution of the notice can be improved by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, and the sense of expectation for the execution of a plurality of kinds of notice can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Also in this case, as shown in FIG. 164 (9e '), a part or all of the three notice icons thrown does not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is also possible to execute a partial increase increase effect or a full increase increase effect which causes a frame out from the left of the area.

  FIGS. 164 (12f-1) to (12f-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 159 (12). That is, in FIG. 164 (12f-1), as in the case of FIG. 159 (12), the variation display of the decorative symbol in the state in which the hat forecast icon I6 is displayed in the forecast icon first display area YA1 of the forecast icon display area 285. Has been done. After that, as shown in FIG. 164 (12f-2), the decoration symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. Ru. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be performed even in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 165 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (8). That is, in FIG. 165 (8 g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode (the display mode by the character of Sabohani) of the advance notice, the character YM of the ladylike hat has the notice icon I6 of the hat the notice icon display area 285 There is an effect display that throws in towards the. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the increase presentation of the notice icon even during the execution of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase presentation of the advance notice icon and the advance notice by the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 165 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (8). That is, in FIG. 165 (8 h), the decoration icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 are not displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the presentation holding lamp 286 is set to a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208) to display the number of reservations. The effect holding lamp 286 is provided with, for example, a full color LED, and is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting according to the default light emission mode (for example, lighting in white) It is possible to perform drive control in an aspect (for example, lighting while switching 7 colors). In FIG. 165 (8h), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the target of pre-reading is hatched and shown, but in fact, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similar to the hold lamp of, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 165 (8 i) and (9 i-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) and (9). That is, in FIG. 165 (8i), as in the case of FIG. 159 (8), the effect display is performed in which the hat advance icon I6 is thrown toward the advance icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 165 (9i-1), it is shown that the notice icon I6 of the hat does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (9i-2), the hat advance notice icon I6 acts on the reserve icon h11 of the special view 1 displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special view 1 to display the pre-reading advance notice. The effect display (hold change effect) changing to is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the hat advance notice icon I6 may not be displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the advance notice by the hold icon. Note that the on-hold change presentation may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat advance notice icon I6. For example, the on-hold change presentation may be less likely to be performed as the notice icon having a higher jackpot reliability.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 166 (9i-2 '), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 are not displayed, and are stored using the presentation hold lamp 286. In the case of displaying the number, the light emission mode of the hold lamp of the first special drawing 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the preview advance notice after the notice icon I6 of the hat falls below the display area.

  FIGS. 165 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 159 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 165 (8j), unlike FIG. 159 (8). It is shown that the character BY of the DJ having the notice icon, not the character YM of the lord, appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area (DJ effect). In the example shown in FIG. 165 (8j), the DJ character appears with the hat announcement icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 165 (9j), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I6 of the hat it holds is the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The effect display will be performed. The number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the increase effect of the advance notice icon by one DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the advance notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and a second advance icon increase effect by the character BY of the DJ). By configuring, there are cases where it is possible to diversify the effects and enhance the effects.

  FIGS. 165 (8 k) to (9 k) show other effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 159 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 165 (8 k) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 165 (8k), the DJ character appears with a box of notice icons I9. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (9 k), the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM of the lady is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character is While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icons I 9 of the one thousand boxes are placed in the notice icon second display area YA 2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 165 (9k '), the DJ character passes the back side of the notice icon by arranging it on a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as it is. In addition, as shown in FIG. 165 (9k ′ ′), the character BY of the DJ is a thousand-piece box so that it is superimposed on the notice icon I6 of the hat thrown by the character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, the overwrite effect of the advance notice icon may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect.

  FIG. 165 (12 l) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 159 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 165 (12 l), the letter notations respectively corresponding to the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed together. For example, the letter of "continuation" is additionally displayed on the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon I9 of the two-piece box displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. The word “promotion” is displayed as a note on the screen, and the word “blessing” is shown as a note on the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed on the notice icon third display area YA3. In the notice icon I7 of the Shuriken displayed in the area YA4, the letter "Chan eyes" is additionally displayed, and in the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5, "Steachen" is displayed. In the notice icon I6 of the hat that the text is displayed as a note and displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, the question The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect for which the execution is predicted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 165 (12l ') and the same figure (12l' '), part or all of the characters additionally displayed on the notice icon are set as "question marks" to clarify the corresponding notice effects. It may not be displayed on the screen. This makes it possible to give expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is to be executed, which may improve interest.

  Further, it may be possible to give notice that the effect display in which the big hit is decided is executed by the combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of the notice icons displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in (12l ′ ′ ′), when three hat notification icons I6 with the word “continuation” attached are displayed in the three notification icon display area 285, four times of the simulation in which the big hit is determined It may be notified that effect display including a series of effects will be performed. If the letter added to the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, if the letter “promotion” is added to the notice icon I6 of the hat), the notice icon I6 of the hat The result of the symbol variation display at the time of being digested may be a premier notice display that gives notice that the result is a big hit (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the example of presentation described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of the character BY of the character YM or DJ of the lord, but in the example of presentation shown in FIG. 166, the effect of increasing the notice icon by the display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It is something to do.

  In FIG. 166 (A1), the decoration symbols of "decoration 6" are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. This reach effect is, for example, a normal reach.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (A2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 166 (A2), the notice icon icon of the hat imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat is stopped and displayed. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon symbol of this hat, the wording of "stock" is appended, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the notice icon is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285. doing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (A3), a display for changing the notice icon icon of the hat to the notice icon I6 of the hat and moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that it is a display result of detachment. In this embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this manner.

  In FIG. 166 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 166 (A1), the decoration symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a and the right symbol display region 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed. , Production of normal reach is started.

  After the reach effect is started, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first notice icon pattern simulating the first thank you icon I1 is stopped and displayed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 166 (B2), the letter notation of "stock" is added to the first notice icon pattern of the first lady, and the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed. In 285, it is notified that the notice icon is displayed in an increased number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166 (B3), the display for changing the notice icon icon of the first hallmark to the notice icon I1 of the first hall and moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 Is performed, and as shown in FIG. 166 (B4), the decoration symbol of "decoration 5" arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the display result is "off". At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lady has changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. It goes without saying that the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 of the hat, but may be another kind of notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period during which the symbol variation display is being executed, for example, the notice icon may change during the execution of the symbol variation display after the next time, or the notice You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In this embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon may be performed in this manner.

  Next, another example of effect of the above-described advance notice icon digesting effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 167 to FIG. 170 are diagrams showing in stages the other presentation examples of the advance notice icon digested presentation. In FIGS. 167 to 170, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 167 (38m) to (40m-3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (38) to (40). 167 (38 m) to the same figure (39 m) perform the same effect as FIG. 161 (38) to the same figure (39), but in FIG. 167 (40 m-1), it is slow at the middle symbol display area 208 b. The variable display appears and the pseudo run symbol appears, but then, as shown in FIG. 167 (40 m-2), the variable display becomes high-speed just before the pseudo run symbol becomes the stop display position of the decoration symbol, and the pseudo run symbol Is scrolled out below the display area, and as shown in FIG. 167 (40 m-3), the display of temporary stop is displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 2" and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed. The stop display is notified that the result is out. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 167 (23n) to (24n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 160 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (23 n), the display in which the hat notification icon I6 is digested is started, but as shown in FIG. 167 (24 n), the digested hat notification icon I 6 is enlarged and displayed. Alternatively, a display may be performed that is erased as it is, and it may be notified that the digested effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 167 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 160 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (23o), the display in which the hat notification icon I6 is digested is started, and the hat notification icon I6 is enlarged at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (24o-1). As shown in FIG. 167 (24o-2), the combination of the decorative symbols of the outset (FIG. 167 (24o-2) shows that “decoration 1—decoration 2” as shown in FIG. 167 (24o-2). -Display of temporary stop display by the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 2" and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then stop display and it is informed that it is the result of out. As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, there may be a case where the pseudo-series effect is not performed.

  FIGS. 167 (22p) to (23p) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 160 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the leftmost side (notice icon in FIG. 167 (23p) An effect may be performed in which the notice icon other than the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the first display area YA1) is digested. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 167 (23p), an effect is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the one-man box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested. Thus, in the present embodiment, there may be cases where the advance notice icon is not digested in order from the left. Further, in the present embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the stocked order), but the notice icons stored later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when the notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to be a big hit, or conversely, it may be hard to be a big hit. In addition, regardless of the order of stock, the digest order of the notice icons may be determined. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may not be affected, and the digest order of the notice icons changes depending on the digest order of the notice icons. You may do it. Further, it may be possible to give notice that the big hit will be decided by digesting a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in a specific order, for example, a notice icon I6 of a hat, a shuriken A rule may be set in which the big hit is determined when the notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, the shuriken notice icon I7, the hat notice icon I6, and the shuriken notice icon I7 are digested in this order. As a result, an incentive for the player to find the rule of the digest order of the notice icon to be a big hit works, and the player's motivation may be improved.

  FIGS. 167 (24q-1) to (24q-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 160 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 167 (24q-1), the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the notice icon first display area YA1 is displayed. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 167 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are respectively moved to the left side You may At this time, for example, a moving animation may be performed to move the display position of the advance notice icon to the left, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing at which the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is changed may be simultaneous with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. It may be after the digest presentation of the advance notice icon is started, or after the finish production of the advance notice icon is ended.

  FIG. 168 (Aa) to FIG. 168 (Ae) show an example of effect when the increase effect of the advance notice icon is performed after the advance effect of the advance notice icon is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (Aa), after the notice icon I7 of the shuriken displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing indicated by 168 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 4—decoration 2”, and it is informed that it is the display result of the off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 168 (Ac), the suspension is digested and the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and then, as shown in FIG. 168 (Ad), the increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is increased. When the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 168 (Ae), the notice icon No. 3 becomes blank because the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is digested. A notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes thrown into the display area YA3 is displayed. As described above, a notice icon may be displayed to be displayed in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested.

  FIG. 168 (B) shows an example of effect in the case where the notice icon is increased after a plurality of blank spaces are generated in the notice icon display area in association with the plurality of notice icons being digested. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icon displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested, the character YM When the notice icon I6 of the hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Among them, it is displayed in order from the left side. In this way, display may be performed to increase the notice icon. In the case where there are a plurality of blank spaces in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icons is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. It may be preset in 400. Moreover, in this example of presentation, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, the reliability of the big hit and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed, but depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of displayed advance notice icons are different. For example, when the notice icon increasing in the notice icon sixth display area YA6 on the right side among the display areas which are blank in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, at least six notice icons are notice icons. It may indicate that it is displayed in the display area 285, and may also indicate that the jackpot reliability is the highest.

  FIG. 168 (C) shows an example of effect in the case where the digestion effect of the advance notice icon and the increase effect of the advance notice icon are executed during one execution of the symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (C), while the effect of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase is produced for the notice icon by the character YM, and it is displayed that the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the box, and the notice icon I10 of the fan are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Here, the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display is performed. In this manner, the staging effect of the advance notice icon and the increase effect of the advance notice icon may be performed during the execution of one pattern variation display. At this time, there may be a case in which the period in which the preliminary effect icon is performed and the period in which the preliminary effect icon is performed overlap with each other. In addition, the increase effect of the notice icon may be started after the end effect of the notice icon is started, or the end effect of the notice icon may be started after the increase effect of the notice icon is started, or the notice icon The staging effect and the increasing effect of the advance notice icon may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area which is blank at the start of the symbol change display, or after the symbol change display is started, the increase effect of the notice icon is displayed. It may be an area scheduled to be blank before being started.

  FIG. 168 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 163 (59). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (59r), the effect of asking whether or not the notice icon is digested is performed before the digesting effect of the notice icon is started. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether the notice icon that is the target of digestion starts to fluctuate or not, and whether the notice icon is digested or not I am trying to scold me. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (60), the fan advance notice icon I10 may be digested, and the fan advance notice icon I10 may not be digested. If not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the display of the notice icon may be maintained and the digest of the notice icon may be suspended. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (59r), when the notice icon I10 of the fan is erased without being digested, the stop display is then performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of the off, and the display result of the off is displayed. You may alert that.

  FIGS. 168 (59 s) to (60 s) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 168 (59s), in the notice icon display area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a box of notice icons I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed. Of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 after the swing fluctuation starts with the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1". When I10 is digested, it will be a notice of a big hit, and as shown in Figure 168 (60s), if another notice icon (for example, a hat notice icon I6) is digested, it will be left as it is. It may be notified that it will be stopped and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of.

  FIGS. 168 (23t) to (32t) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 160 (23) to 161 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (23 t), in this example of presentation, in the notice icon display area 285, an in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added. As shown in FIG. 168 (23t) to FIG. (25t), when the staging effect of the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digest notification icon display area YA0. The notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is continuously displayed after being digested as shown in FIG. 168 (28 t) to FIG. It will continue to be displayed until the end of). The timing at which the display of the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is started may be after the start of the preparation of the notice icon, or even before the start of the preparation of the notice icon. It may be simultaneous with the start of the digest presentation of the advance notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the digest notice icon display area YA0 may be deleted may be after the end of the end effect of the notice icon, or even before the end of the end effect of the notice icon. It may be good, it may be simultaneous with the end of the digestion production of a notice icon, may be after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon started, or after the production corresponding to the digested notice icon finished It may be, may be simultaneous with the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, may be before the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is started, or may be It may be simultaneous with the end of the corresponding effect, or it may be deleted at the end of symbol variation where the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special figure) or during digestion When the notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 162 (44), or only the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 is erased Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one pattern change display, the notice icon a in the notice icon display area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A which is first digested is a digest of the notice icon A. It may be erased after the end of the rendering or with the end, and there may be no preview icon displayed in the digest preview icon display area YA0, or the digest rendering of the preview icon B to be digested next is started It may be erased after being displayed simultaneously or when it is displayed, or it may be erased after it is displayed simultaneously with or when it is displayed. For example, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, super reach effect or big hit effect, simultaneous effect on islands, etc.) is performed, only the notice icon display area 285 is deleted, and a notice is given during digestion The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the in-digestion notice icon display area YA0 may be erased and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the area 285 and the during-digestion advance notice icon display area YA0 may be erased.

  FIGS. 169 (Aa) to (Ae) show examples of effects in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are simultaneously digested. That is, in FIG. 169 (Aa), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. The ribbon preview icon I8 is displayed, and the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in the fourth preview area YA4. Then, among these notice icons, the notice icons of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are respectively digested The production is started. Here, the start timings of the digest and presentation of each advance notice icon may be simultaneous or different. In this case, the digest order of the advance notice icons may be set to correspond to the execution order of the effects.

After that, when the notice icon I6 of the hat and the notice icon I8 of the ribbon move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. . Specifically, the character display of "CONTINUED" is additionally displayed near the lower part of the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat, and the character display of "STECHEN" is added near the lower part of the notification icon I8 of the enlarged ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, stage change presentation is started in response to the consumption of the notice icon I8 on the ribbon. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ac), after the closing of the shoji character and the character CH of Princess Chibi appears on the front side, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ad), the shoji opens and the moon The display of the background (moon surface background) showing how the space is viewed from the surface is started. In addition, during the execution of stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 Move to and zoom out.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ae), the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display area, and then the character BC of the bancho corresponding to the digestion of the notice icon I6 of the hat Appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and effects are displayed to push up the stopped right symbol, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the pseudo connected effect will be executed thereafter. .

  In this example of presentation, a plurality of effects corresponding to the digested advance notice icon are different in start timing, but may be simultaneously started.

  FIGS. 169 (66u-1) to (66u-3) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 163 (66). That is, in FIG. 169 (66u-1), the stop display is performed with the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and it is notified that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. It has been shown that there is a warning icon that has been and yet has not been digested. After that, as shown in FIG. 169 (66 u-2), after the jackpot start staging is performed, as shown in FIG. 169 (66 u-3), even after the round game of the big hit is started, undigested continues The notice icon is displayed. In the example of the effect, the advance notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area during execution of the big hit game, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this example, the undivided notice icon may be used for, for example, a promotion effect (for example, an effect for notifying that it is a probability change big hit determination) during a big hit, for example, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in -3), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during execution of the big hit game, a notification that it is a definite variation big hit decision is given, and the notice icon I10 of the fan is digested May be notified that it is a 15R big hit decision. In addition, when other advance notice icons are digested, for example, it may be made to have a meaning indicating that there is a possibility of promotion. As described above, even if the same advance notice icon is digested during the execution of the big hit game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the big hit game may be different from the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display. That is, you may prepare a notice icon specific to a big hit. Also, the notice icon displayed during the big hit game may be the same as the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display, or only some notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 169 (Ba) to FIG. 169 (Bc) show display examples before and after stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 169 (Ba), in the decorative symbol display device 208, stop display is performed with the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2", and then the retention is digested and symbol fluctuation When the display is started, stage change presentation is started as shown in FIG. 169 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, when the stage change effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 169 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, although the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, all notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be erased when the stage change is performed. It should be noted that after the stage change is performed, the notice icon may be deleted without fail, only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or even if it is not deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 169 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 160 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 169 (22 v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 169 (22 v-2), the character YM2 with the placard appears and is digested The type of notice icon is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (23 v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started, in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is digested. In addition, even if advance notification of the type of notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, and a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested. It may be done. If a notice icon of a type different from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may indicate that the jackpot is highly reliable.

  FIG. 169 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 160 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 169 (22 w), after the symbol variation display is started, the notice icon which may be digested is highlighted to make the player pay attention to the digestion of the notice icon. It is also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, by digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat, the character Banccho BC appears and the pseudo-series effect is executed, and the other effect is not executed. The effect corresponding to is performed, and other effects are not performed, for example, the character BC of the leader does not appear although the preliminary icon I6 of the hat is digested, and the character of the princess appears The jackpot may be determined in such a manner that the jackpot is determined when the effect not corresponding to the digested advance notice icon is executed (so-called, the rule collapse) such that the jackpot is settled by the jackpot.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and can not be selected by the player, but for example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. It may be selectable.

  Also, if a big hit occurs while the previous notice icon is displayed in the previous notice icon display area 285, it is erased when the big hit game is started, and the previous notice icon is carried over when transitioning to a definite change state or time saving state. It may be configured not to be. Also, when a big hit occurs while the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, once the big hit game is started, it is temporarily not displayed, and is displayed again after the definite change state or the time saving state is finished. It may be configured as follows. In addition, it may be configured not to carry over even after the definite change state or the short time state ends.

  Next, a rendering example will be described in which the content of reach rendering to be shifted thereafter is previewed according to the type of preview icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ab-1), when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, then, as shown in FIG. It appears, and then it shifts to the reach of the leader corresponding to the character that appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ab-2), when the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ac-2), the enlarged display of the character YM3 of the lord. It appears, and then, it shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. Also, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ab-3), when the fan's notice icon I10 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 170 (Ac-3), the enlarged princess character HM is displayed. It appears and then transitions to Princess Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. In addition, in this production example, it corresponds to the reliability of the big hit that the notice icon means, and the reliability of the big hit of these reach production is constituted in order of princess reach> toll you reach> bancho reach There is. It should be noted that if a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a so-called character of enlarged display appears after the notice icon I6 of the hat has been digested) (a so-called law break has occurred) May be configured to determine a big hit. In addition, a plurality of preview icons may be combined and digested, and a plurality of characters may be displayed corresponding to the plurality of preview icons to be executed. In addition, a unique effect (digestion-specific effect) for digesting a plurality of preview icons may be executed, and it is a big hit if the plurality of preview icons are digested rather than the single preview icon is digested. May be configured to be highly reliable.

  Next, a button effect to be executed after the second button preview icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (Ba), the second button advance notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. 170. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display in which the second button preview icon I11 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the second button preview icon I11 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 is moved from the preview icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button preview icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter as shown in FIG. 170 (Bc). It informs that it is possible to accept the operation, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another rendering example of the button rendering performed after the second button preview icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (Ca), the second button preview icon I11 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-described button reach effect is performed, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button acceptance time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 170 (Cb), display in which the second button preview icon I11 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the second button preview icon I11 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 is moved from the preview icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button preview icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is shown in FIG. 170 (Cc). As a result, the effect button 136 changes to a protruding button image 136b that is displayed in a protruding manner. That is, it is shown that the jackpot has been promoted to a higher button reach effect.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 171 is a view showing stepwise an example of the effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 172 shows a stage following the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 173 is a view showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 172 in a step-by-step manner, and FIG. 174 is a drawing showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 175 is a figure showing in sequence the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG.

  In addition, in FIGS. 171 (1) to 172 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon was changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lady like the notice icon I6 of the hat. Since this embodiment is the same as FIGS. 159 (1) to 160 (14) except for the points, the description here is omitted. Also, with regard to the effects performed between FIG. 172 (14) and FIG. 172 (20), all of the notice icons used in the increase effect of the notice icon have been changed to the notice icon I 1 of the first tonome Except for FIG. 160 (15) to FIG. 160 (19).

  In FIG. 172 (20), the display is stopped by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the detachment is definitively displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Then, in FIG. 172 (21), symbol variation in the first special view display device 212 is started, and furthermore, the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has occurred in the reserved icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 172 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and changes to the fluctuation icon h0. Become. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 172 (23), in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display in which the first icon of the first president's announcement is digested is started. That is, display is performed such that the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, as shown in FIG. 172 (23), for example, when a plurality of the same notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, for example, four first notice icons I1 are displayed. Although it is preset to preferentially digest the notice icons displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icons. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be randomly determined, or the notice icon displayed on the right may be preferentially digested. That is, the order of digesting the advance notice icon is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (24) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 172 (25), below the notice icon I 6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of “continuation” is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed. In addition, this character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the character display of "CONTINUED" attached to the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (26) and the notice icon of the hat After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be redisplayed at the original position. Note that when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, it may be displayed so as to be recognizable, for example, the display area in which the digested notice icon is displayed. It may be grayed out, or text information "Done" may be added. Alternatively, after the digested notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it may be deleted.

  Thereafter, as for the effect contents shown in FIG. 172 (27) to FIG. 173 (33), the digested hat announcement icon I 6 is displayed in the announcement icon first display area YA 1, and the announcement icon second display area YA 2-announcement icon Because it is the same as FIGS. 160 (27) to 161 (33) except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the first notice icon I1 of the first lady, it is here Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (34), the display in which the first grandfather notice icon I1 displayed in the first notice icon second display area YA2 is digested is started. That is, display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is moved from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (35) and is enlarged and displayed. As shown at 173 (36), below the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in an enlarged manner, a character display of "CONTINUED" is displayed as a notice of anticipation that the pseudo continuous effect is to be performed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the character display of "CONTINUED" attached to the notice icon I6 of the hat is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (37) and the notice icon of the hat After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, as for the effect contents shown in FIG. 173 (38) to FIG. (45), the notice icon I 6 of the hat having been digested is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 and the notice icon second display area YA 2 respectively. 161 (38) to 162 (except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the first hallmark notice icon I1. This is the same as 45), so the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (46), the display in which the first grandfather notice icon I1 displayed in the third notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. That is, display is performed such that the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is moved from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the one-by-two box notice icon I9 and is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Above the displayed notice icons I9 of the two-tiered box, a letter display of "promotion" is displayed as a notice of anticipating the transition to the rendering with a higher degree of reliability. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the one-two box advance notice icon I9 is displayed enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or is performed after the enlarged display. It is also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display of "promotion" attached to the notice icon I9 of the one and two boxes is erased, and after the notice icon I9 of one and the two boxes is reduced, as shown in FIG. Then, the display is performed to move to the original display position, that is, to the notice icon third display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (49), the above-described reach transition effect is started. In the present rendering example, when the reach transition rendering is started, as shown in FIG. 174 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the rendering display such that a power failure has occurred is performed, the strong reach with high reliability is obtained. The production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach effect in this effect example is started, as shown in FIG. 173 (50-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the character display "is a chance" on the darkened background At the timing shown in FIG. 174 (50-2), the character display "NO" is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (51), after the character display of “Is it too hot?” Is performed, character display of “No” is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (53), the character display of "one blow" is performed to notify that the button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (54), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 is possible, to the player The operation of the effect button 136 is promoted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (55), as shown in FIG. 174 (56), the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the button image 136a, as shown in FIG. It is shown that the button reach production has failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 174 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2”.

  In FIG. 174 (58), everything including the advance notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Soon, in FIG. 174 (59), the swing fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  After that, for example, when 2 seconds have passed since the temporary symbol stop display, the display shown in FIG. 174 (60) is a display in which the first notice icon I1 displayed in the fourth notice area YA4 of the notice icon is digested. It is started. That is, display is performed in which the first hallmark notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first hallmark notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a fan notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (61) and is enlarged. At this time, for example, below the notice icon I10 of the fan displayed in an enlarged manner, a letter display of "blessing" may be added to notify that the big hit is determined. In addition, in the case of appending the character display, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the notice icon I10 of the fan is enlarged, or may be performed before the enlarged display. , May be performed after being enlarged.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the notice icon I10 of the fan is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 175 (62), the original display position, ie, the notice icon fourth display area of the notice icon display area 285. A display for moving to YA4 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (63), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols that were fluctuating in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed and re-variation effect is started . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 175 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed in reduced size. Ru.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 175 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is displayed.

  And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 shown in FIG. 175 (66), the combination of the decoration pattern of the big hit decision of "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special view display device 212, the "special view A", which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth pattern display device 284a, the fourth pattern (round figure) of the special view 1 Is on. Thereafter, although not shown, a big hit game is started after the above-mentioned big hit game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the effect of the above-described increase in the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178. Here, FIG. 176 to FIG. 178 are diagrams showing gradually another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. In FIGS. 176 to 178, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the common view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the common view hold The illustration of the lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  FIGS. 176 (8 a) to (9 a) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 176 (8a), an effect display is performed in which the third hallmark notice icon I3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first hallmark notice icon I1. In addition, it can carry out similarly about the preliminary announcement icon I2 of a 2nd lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 175 (9a), the thrown third grandchild's preview icon I3 is displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 of the preview icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 176 (8 b) to (9 b) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 176 (8 b), as in FIG. 171 (8), the effect display is performed in which the first condolence's preview icon I 1 is thrown toward the preview icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 176 (9b), it is shown that the first hallmark's notice icon I1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is framed out from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to carry out the case increase effect using the notice icon of the lord.

  FIGS. 176 (8 c) to (9 c) show other effects of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 176 (8 c), there is an effect display in which not only one notice icon I 1 of the first hallmark but also the three first hallmark notice icons I 1 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 simultaneously. ing. In addition, it may not be simultaneous but it may be an effect display in which one by one is thrown sequentially.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (9c), the three first hallmark notice icons I1 thrown are the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon They are respectively displayed in the third display area YA3. As described above, in this effect example, it is possible to execute the increase of the plurality of advance notice icons in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at one time, the sense of expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notice may be improved, and the effect of presentation may be enhanced. In addition, a highly reliable advance notice icon (for example, the notice icon I3 of the third hallmark) is hard to be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (it is difficult to be stocked), and a notice icon of low reliability (for example, first hallmark manner The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (is likely to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285 or vice versa. In this example of presentation, the same notice icon (the first notice icon I1 of the first temple) is increased by three, but a plurality of notice icons with different degrees of reliability may be simultaneously increased, for example, Alternatively, the first toll notice icon I1 and the third toll notice icon I3 may be simultaneously increased.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 176 (9c ′), a part or all of the three first hallmark notice icons I1 that have been thrown do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is also possible to execute the partial gasse increase effect or the entire gasse increase effect in which the frame is out from the left of the display area of the display device 208.

  FIG. 176 (8 e) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 171 (8). That is, in FIG. 176 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode (the display mode by the character of Sabohani) of the pre-reading notice, the character YM of the lady liker notices the first notice icon I1 of the first lord. An effect display for throwing toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the increase presentation of the notice icon even during the execution of the advance notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase presentation of the advance notice icon and the advance notice by the hold icon may not be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 176 (8 f) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 171 (8). That is, in FIG. 176 (8 f), the decoration symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 of the special view 1 and the number of reservations is displayed by the effect reserve lamp 286. In FIG. 176 (8f), for the convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 which is the target of the pre-reading is hatched and shown, but in fact, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similar to the hold lamp of, the hold lamp of the second special figure 1 is turned on by the default light emission mode.

  FIGS. 176 (8 g) to (9 g-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 176 (8 g), as in FIG. 171 (8), the effect display is performed in which the first hallmark's notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285.

  However, in the case of FIG. 176 (9g-1), it is shown that the first notice icon I1 of the first lady does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 176 (9g-2), the first hallmark notice icon I1 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special view 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1 to give a preliminary notice. The effect display (hold change effect) is changed to the display mode of. That is, in the present embodiment, the first hallmark notice icon I1 may not be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 as a notice icon, and may appear as a trigger for starting a prefetch notice by the hold icon. It should be noted that the on-hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the first tonosama's notice icon I1. Good.

  FIGS. 176 (12h-1) to (12h-2) show other examples of the effects shown in FIG. 171 (12). That is, in FIG. 176 (12 h-1), as in the case of FIG. 171 (12), the decorative symbol is displayed in a state where the first hallmark notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The variable display of is done. After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (12h-2), the decoration symbols of “decoration 6” are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed, and reach effect is started. Ru. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be performed even in the state where the advance notice icon is displayed. In addition, as a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the end of the big hit.

  FIGS. 177 (8 i) to (9 i) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 177 (8i), unlike FIG. 171 (8). It is shown that the character BY of the DJ having the notice icon, not the character YM of the lord, appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the flying carpet. In the example shown in FIG. 177 (8i), the character BY of DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 177 (9i), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first hallmark notice icon I1 held by the first hallmark icon in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. An effect display to be placed in the display area YA1 is performed. The number of notice icons that the DJ character BY places in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. In addition, a plurality of types of advance notice icons may be placed in the advance notice icon display area 285 in the increase effect of the advance notice icon by one DJ character BY. In this manner, a plurality of types of increase effects of the advance notice icon may be prepared (for example, a first advance notice icon increase effect by the character YM of the lord and a second advance icon increase effect by the character BY of the DJ). By configuring, there are cases where it is possible to diversify the effects and enhance the effects.

  FIGS. 177 (8 j) to (9 j) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 177 (8j) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 177 (8j), the character BY of DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9j), the first condolence notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 and While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the effect display is performed in which the first hallmark icon I1 held by the character BY is placed in the second notice area YA2 of the second notice icon display area 285. The DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed as if it passes through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 177 (9j '), the rear side of the notice icon is displayed by arranging the DJ character BY in a layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. You may display as passing.

  FIGS. 177 (8 k) to (9 k) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 177 (8 k) It is shown that the character BY appears on the flying carpet and emerges from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 177 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third hallmark notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (9 k), after the first condolences notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon of the foremost icon displayed on the announcement icon first display area YA1 being thrown by the foreword's character YM while having the third icon of foretelling icon I3 possessed by the character BY The effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the preview icon I3 of the third lord in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to overlap the preview icon I1. That is, an effect of promoting the game may be performed by overwriting the low-reliability notice icon of the big hit on the high-reliability notice icon of the big hit. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect. In addition, this promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by the symbol variation display of multiple times. Further, the promotion effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed.

  FIG. 177 (12 l) shows another example of the effects shown in FIG. 171 (12). That is, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 177 (12 l), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the letter notation of “question mark” attached thereto. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first hallmark is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second hallmark is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area The first hallmark notice icon I1 is displayed on YA3, the second hallmark notice icon I2 is displayed on the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and the third hallmark icon is displayed on the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 is displayed, and the notice icon I1 of the first temple is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and the letter notation of "question mark" is added thereto. According to this presentation example, it may be possible to give a feeling of expectation to the notice icon after change.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 177 (12 l ′), the type of the notice icon after change may be notified by a letter notation for the notice icon before the change. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first statue displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second statue displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth The second hallmark notice icon I2 displayed in the display area YA4 has the text of “question mark” appended and can not recognize the notice icon after change, but the notice icon third display area The notice of “Chan eyes” is added to the notice icon I1 of the first tonome displayed on YA3 to be notified that it changes to the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and displayed on the notice icon fifth display area YA5 In the notice icon I3 of the third tonnage being held, the wording “continuation” is appended and it is notified that it will be changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat. The notice of the first condolence icon I1 displayed in the icon sixth display area YA6 is appended with the text of “question mark” together with “continuation” and it is notified that it changes to the notice icon I6 of the hat There is. These letter notations may be notified at once for all or part of the notice icons, or may be notified gradually over time.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 177 (12 l ′ ′), all or part of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to notice icons after change, and the notice icons after change are displayed. The corresponding letter notation may be added only for things.

  FIGS. 178 (8m-1) to (9m) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 171 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 178 (8 m-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 178 (8m-1), the DJ character BY appears with the notice icon I9 of one thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (8 m−2), after the first condolence notice icon I1 thrown by the domino character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 178 (9 m), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the one thousand boxes possessed is thrown by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area An effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the notice icon I9 of the one-man box in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1 of the first statue displayed on YA1. According to this presentation example, the notice icon before the change may be overwritten on the notice icon after the change. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect. In addition, this overwrite production may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by multiple times of symbol variation display. Also, the overwrite effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed.

  FIGS. 178 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 171 (8), the character YM of the lord appeared and threw the notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 178 (8n-1), the notice icon is further held. It is shown that the DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 178 (8n-1), the character BY of the DJ appears with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (8n-2), the notice icon I9 of the box of one thousand boxes thrown by the character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. As shown in 9n), while the DJ character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first icon of the first hallmark icon I1 possessed is thrown by the character YM of the hallmark and the first icon area of the notice icon An effect display is performed in which the character BY of the DJ places the first condolence's preview icon I1 in the preview icon first display area YA1 in such a manner as to overlap the preview icon I9 of the one thousand box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notice icon after the change may be overwritten on the notice icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the additional effects of the plurality of types of advance notice icons may overlap with each other, which may enhance the effect. In addition, this overwrite production may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, and may be performed by multiple times of symbol variation display. Also, the overwrite effect may be performed each time the pseudo-series effect is performed. Also, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the notice icon I1 of the first lady) is digested, the notice icon after the change is the notice icon before overwriting (for example, the notice icon I9 of the first and second boxes) May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured that the reliability of the jackpot may be higher if digesting the notification icon after overwriting rather than the warning icon before overwriting is digested, or the reliability of the jackpot is configured to be lower. It may be configured such that the jackpot reliability does not change.

  Next, an example of effects in which the advance notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the effect example in which the notice icon changes in stages. In FIG. 179, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220, the general view hold lamp 216 and the fourth The illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Note that these two hold icons are both in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of pre-reading and hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold The aspect is the same. In addition, the first icon of the first on the notice icon I1 is displayed in the first notice area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and in the second notice area of the notice icon YA2, the third notice icon I3 of the third onus. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (A), the character YM2 of the statuette who held the placard appears during the change display of the decorative symbol. In this placard, the wording "change" is attached, and it is predicted that the display mode of either the notice icon or the hold icon changes.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after a predetermined effect is displayed, as shown in FIG. 179 (B1), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The notice icon I3 of the third lord changes to a notice icon I9 of a box of 1,000. Note that the display mode of the first hallmark's preview icon I1 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both of the preview icons may be changed. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 179 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is the display mode of the prefetch notice. Change to Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, or any display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0 May change. As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect being performed, the hold is not performed. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, although the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, it is displayed in a reduced size at the lower right. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Note that these two hold icons are both in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold that is a target of pre-reading and hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold The aspect is the same. In addition, the first icon of the first on the notice icon I1 is displayed in the first notice area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and in the second notice area of the notice icon YA2, the third notice icon I3 of the third onus. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 179 (C), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a Chibi princess chance effect is performed. Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-described spread map fluctuating game is executed. Chibi Princess Chance production is a production imitating Amida lottery, and the character of Chibi princess chooses one from five starting points, moves along the route of Amida from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point It is to predict that an effect corresponding to the indicated icon is to be executed. For example, when the character of Princess Chibi reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, it predicts that the wing member 2321 of the second special view starting opening 232 will be long open, and the "super hot" If it reaches the goal point where the character notation is shown, it indicates that the result of the symbol variation display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and if it reaches the goal point where the cross icon is shown In advance, it is predicted that the fluctuation display result of the common drawing is out.

  Furthermore, in the present rendering example, when reaching the goal point where the grandchild's preview icon is shown, as shown in FIG. 179 (D1), of the preview icons before the change displayed in the preview icon display area 285. At least one of the changes to the notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (D1), the notice icon I3 of the third lady who has been displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the one-man box. Note that the display mode of the first hallmark's preview icon I1 displayed in the preview icon first display area YA1 may be changed, or both of the preview icons may be changed.

  In addition, when the character of Sabohani reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 179 (D2), at least one of the default icons in the default display mode in the pending icon display area 281 of the special view 1 is displayed. One changes to the display mode of the advance notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 179 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the default display mode, is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, or any display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, and the display mode of the change icon h0 May change.

  As described above, in the present effect example, as a result of performing a certain effect, the notice icon may be changed without changing the hold icon, and as a result of the certain effect being performed, the hold is not performed. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the advance notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example in the case of power failure / power recovery while the advance notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 180 is a view showing in stages the display example in the case of power failure / power recovery while the advance notice icon is being displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (A), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. Then, two pending icons (pending icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1) are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and it is shown that the start of two symbol variations is pending ing. Of the two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a default display. It is an aspect. In addition, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3 has a box of 1,000 boxes. The notice icon I9 is displayed, and a notice icon I10 of a fan is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 180 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 180 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the instantaneous power recovery. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (C), the character display "Recovery, please wait for a while" is displayed. At this time, the first special view display device 212 resumes the variable display, and the second special view display device 214, the general view display device 210, the first special view hold lamp 218, the second special view hold lamp 220 and the general view hold The lamp 216 has returned to the state before the power failure. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), the symbol variation display ends, and the first special view display device 212 stops and displays “special view I” which is the display result of the removal. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the display is stopped and displayed at "decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 7" which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment. Then, when power failure / power recovery is performed, any notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is erased. Further, when power failure / power recovery is performed, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold, which is the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, also becomes the default display mode. In this embodiment, when power failure / power recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “not determined” information. It may be configured to be Here, when there is at least one pending message including "not determined" information in the sub-command including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit, "not determined" information is included. It is possible not to give the advance notice including the end effect and the increase effect of the advance notice icon until all the pending items are consumed. Also, no pre-reading advance notice is given for a newly increased pending after power-off / power recovery (the pre-reading result is saved), and pre-reading advance notice is given after all the pendings containing “not determined” information are digested However, with regard to a newly increased suspension after power failure / power recovery, it may be possible to make a prefetching notice before the suspension including the “not determined” information is digested.

  Next, modifications of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182. FIG. Here, FIG. 181 is a view showing gradually an example of an effect that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 182 is a view explaining a lottery table related to notice items. It is.

  In FIG. 181, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special view display device 212, a second special view display device 214, a first special view hold lamp 218 and a second special view hold lamp 220 are shown. The common drawing display device 210, the common drawing reservation lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (a), the reserved icon display area 281A of the special figure 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of the special figure 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you would like. In FIG. 181 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both of FIG. 1 and FIG. And in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is stopped and displayed by "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" which is a combination of the decoration symbols corresponding to exfoliation. A notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the reserved icon display area 282A of the special view 2, and a notice icon Ih of a princess is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, although the notice icon is displayed in the left-aligned state, the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the advance notice icon display area 285 may be always displayed, or may be displayed as needed.

  In FIG. 181 (b), it is shown that two gaming balls have won a prize in the first special view starting opening 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of the special view 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side on the left. Each of these hold icons h11 and h12 is in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (c). In the hold icon display area 281A of the special view 1, since the first hold is digested, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left and becomes a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. Further, at this time, since the gaming ball has won in the second special view starting opening 232, in the pending icon display area 282A of the special view 2, the pending icon h21 corresponding to the first pending is displayed left-justified. The hold icon h21 is a default display mode.

  Then, when the timing shown in FIG. 181 (d) comes, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold of the special view 1 is the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display mode in which "heat" is displayed Change to).

  After the display mode of the hold icon h11 changes, when the timing shown in FIG. 181 (e) comes, the notice icon It of the lady and the notice icon Ih of the princess are added and displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. Ru. That is, the display in which the advance notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess increased after the notice icons Ih of the two princess is digested. And the character HI of the princess accompanied by a balloon with the letters "Atari" and "question mark" appears. The timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (g), after "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, which is a result of off Is notified.

  In this embodiment, since the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed prior to the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (h). Ru. In this embodiment, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the notice icon is displayed when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 becomes a loss. There is no digestion of the icon and no increase in the notice icon. Therefore, while the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is being performed, the advance notice icon may not be displayed, or the advance notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 concerned becomes a big hit, it is possible not to do neither the digestion of the notice icon nor the increase indication, when the digestion and the increase indication of the notice icon are performed There may be. On the other hand, the pending icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed continuously, or any of the pending icon display areas 281A and 282A may not be displayed. Only the area 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the advance notice icon display area 285A may be hidden, and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (i), the display is stopped by the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", and it is informed that the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is disapproval .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (j), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being held is started, and the notice icon It of the lady is digested and “atari” and “question mark” are displayed. A character of the lord YI accompanied by a balloon of letter writing appears. In addition, the timing of appearance of the marshal character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. Further, in FIG. 181 (j), a warning icon Id of a bad agent is additionally displayed in the warning icon display area 285A. That is, the display in which the advance notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing when the warning icon Id of the bad official is additionally displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the warning icon It of the lady, or may be after the same time. It may be

  After that, as shown in FIG. 181 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the notice icon Ih of the princess and the notice icon of the bad officer Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil officer character DI appear. The timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. In addition, the timing of appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the timing of appearance of the character of the bad officer.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , It is informed that it has been a big hit.

  Subsequently, the configuration of the lottery table of the notice icon relationship for determining whether or not to execute the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this effect example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of the hold of the special figure 1, 4 Execute increase display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of / 50, execute increase display of notice icon of the princess with probability of 3/50, execute increase display of the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 2/50 . Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the forerunner notice icon with the probability of 40/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with the probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer with the probability of 25/50 Execute the digestion display of In addition, since the execution lottery of these increase display and digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is performed simultaneously for two or more notice icons, or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  Moreover, when the result of the big hit determination performed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a loss, as a result of the pre-reading of suspension of FIG. 1, the symbol variation display which becomes a big hit is suspended In addition, execute the increase display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of 3/50, execute the increase display of notice icon of the princess with probability of 2/50, increase the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the lord with probability of 1/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with probability of 10/50, and the notice icon of the evil officer with probability of 15/50 Execute the digestion display of

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the reserve of the special figure 1 Execute the increase display of the notice icon of the lord with the probability of 25/50, execute the increase display of the notice icon of the princess with the probability of 20/50, and the increase display of the notice icon of the evil officer with the probability of 7/50 Run. Also, on the other hand, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the lord with a probability of 20/50, execute the digest display of the notice icon of the princess with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of a bad officer with a probability of 5/50 Execute the digestion display of In addition, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine which is not supposed to win a prize in the second special view starting port 232 in the normal gaming state (non-power support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, it will It is also possible not to increase display on the notice icon of, and not to display digest on any notice icon.

  In addition, when the big hit decision result which is executed with the start of design fluctuation indication of special figure 2 is off, regardless of the result of the pre-reading of reservation of special figure 1, increase indication is indicated concerning any notice icon It does not take place, and does not perform the digestion display about any notice icon.

  In addition, for example, when the power support state ends and one or a plurality of reservations remain for the symbol variation display of the special view 2, the preliminary display icon of the preliminary view regarding the suspension of the special illustration 2 is not displayed Alternatively, in accordance with the big hit determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2, the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon may be performed.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]"
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
Notice means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of notices [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the speaker 120, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand frame lamp 542 and the like] ,
A game console equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a pending display [eg, a pending icon etc.],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice icons.
The hold display is a display displayed in the hold display area [for example, the hold icon display area 281 of the special view 1, the hold icon display area of the special view 2, the variation icon display area 280, etc.] in the image display means.
The said pending | holding display is a display according to the number (Hereafter, it is called "the number of pending | holding.") For which the operation | movement of the said symbol variation display is suspended. A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, a notice icon display area 285 etc.] in the image display means,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons [for example, the notice icon display area 285 is formed of a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6 , Each area is configured to be able to display the notice icon],
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-sequence effect may be executed, and if the one-two box notice icon I9 is digested, the reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a first notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6 or the like] of the plurality of kinds of notice icons is a first number [for example, two, etc. When the second number [for example, three etc] which is larger than the first number is digested, it is configured to be more likely to be a big hit than when it is digested.
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of an effect may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display within the hold. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from missing the notice corresponding to the notice icon.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and the consumption of the advance notice icon.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than the symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol fluctuation display, or may not execute symbol fluctuation display.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of notices, or may be capable of being executed other than the plurality of types of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of types of notices, or may not execute a plurality of types of notices.

  In addition, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display, or may be capable of display other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in addition to the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be, for example, characters, numbers, or symbols.

  In addition, the hold display may display only the hold number, or may display other than the hold number.

  In addition, the symbol variation display may be started only when the holding is digested, or may be started other than when the holding is digested. The symbol variation display may be started whenever the retention is digested, or may not be initiated when the retention is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the image display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the image display means. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may display one or more notice icons or may not display one or more notice icons.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the type of notice corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed [eg, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is A notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to expect the number of times to execute the notice displayed from the change displayed as the notice icon to the digested change, it is possible to play the game so that the player does not miss the notice display. There are cases where you can

  Here, the notice icon may display only the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or a number other than the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. Further, the notice icon may always display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed, or does not display the number according to the number of times the notice may be executed. There may be.

In addition, "the above-mentioned notice means is a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the above-mentioned notice [for example, a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect etc. to be a big hit] [eg a pseudo-series effect or reach transition effect etc. to be dropped] A viable means,
The notice means is a type of notice icon which is digested when one notice icon [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a box of notice icons I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. A means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a false consecutive notice or a reach transition presentation, etc., which is to be lost],
After the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be disjointed,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to feel tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the false notice of the same aspect as the aspect of the notice, or may be other than the false notice of the same aspect as the aspect of the notice. May be In addition, the notice means may always carry out a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the notice, or may not carry out a false notice of the same mode as the mode of the notice.

  Further, even if the notice means is capable of executing only the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be executable. . In addition, the notice means may execute a false notice of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In the case where one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, there may be a case where a false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon is not executed.

  In addition, after the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation indication may be configured to be always disjoint, or after the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation indication may be a big hit. It may be.

  In addition, there may be a case where a notice with a high probability that a big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means may be executed after a false notice is executed.

In addition, during the period during which the one symbol variation display is being performed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is greater than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [eg, three etc.] larger than the number of three is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the number at which the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display.

In addition, it is equipped with “hold display means capable of executing display according to the hold number [for example, first special view hold lamp 218, second special view hold lamp 220, effect hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display of the hold display and the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the holding display means may be capable of executing only the display according to the number of holdings, or may be capable of executing other than the display according to the number of holdings. Further, the hold display means may always execute display according to the hold number, or may not execute display according to the hold number.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  According to this game console, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

  Here, the holding display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include other than the light emitting means (for example, the image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package may include a plurality of LEDs such as a full color LED. Moreover, it may be configured by a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the emission operation notification means for notifying the operation of the emission operation means may be realized by the light emission means.

In addition, "prediction notice means capable of executing pre-notice notice [for example, decoration symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the notice icon, there may be a case where the expectation to the big hit can be enhanced.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than pre-reading notice. In addition, the pre-reading notice means may always carry out the pre-reading notice or may not carry out the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by any means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. It may be possible to execute pre-reading notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter,“ the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold being the prefetching target shown in FIG. 159 (2), etc.] The notice icon may be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc.] during the period in which the
The symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-read objects shown in FIG. 159 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is being held while the first symbol change display is being performed [eg, in FIG. 159 (4) During a period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead shown is being executed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead is It is displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the number of digests of the notice icons differs between the case of symbol variation display to be read ahead and the case of symbol variation display executed before the symbol change display to be read ahead. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to make the symbol variation display to be noticed by the player easy to understand.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Moreover, in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed The preview icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

  In addition, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed The advance notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  In addition, the suspension display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol fluctuation display is being executed, or the first In the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the suspension display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol fluctuation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol fluctuation display is being executed, or the first symbol may be displayed. It may not be notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is being performed.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as" fourth symbol change display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 168 (C), the digestion display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display where the notice icon is digested, the player may be expected to have an expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be always started to be displayed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon is The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start being displayed only during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be started during a period other than the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested.

In addition, during the period in which the “symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ third symbol variation display ”) to be executed before the“ fourth symbol variation display ”is executed, the fourth The notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed increasing during execution of the symbol variation display which is executed earlier than etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to be started to be displayed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon to be digested may be started to be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In addition, during the period when the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be configured to be always started to be displayed, or In a period in which three symbol variation displays are being performed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may not start to be displayed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to start display of the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

Also, “the pending display area is an area where the pending display can be displayed up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the number of possible displays of the hold display and the number of possible display of the notice icons are different, the display of the notice icons may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the advance notice icon display area may display advance notice icons up to the eighth number or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of the hold display and the maximum displayable number of the advance notice icons may be the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the hold display of the special view 1 or may be the same or at least the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the hold display of the special view 2, or may be at least the same or the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of the notice icons may be larger than the sum of the displayable maximum numbers of the special display 1 and the special display 2 and may be at least the same or the same.

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand lamp 542 Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notices is the first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 162 (49) to FIG. (50) or FIG. 174 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of notices is a second notice [eg, stage change effect shown in FIG. 169 (Ac) or FIG. (Bb)],
The first notice is a different notice from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIG. 162 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 174 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to know in advance the content of the effect to be executed, so it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be notices other than the first notice and the second notice. The notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering and the second rendering, or may be capable of executing the rendering other than the first rendering and the second rendering. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the first effect are executed. . In addition, the first advance notice may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is performed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is performed. . In addition, the second advance notice may always notify that the second effect is performed, or may not notify that the second effect is performed.

Also, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested [eg, for example, FIG. 159 (1) to FIG. 163 (66) or FIG. 171 (1) to As shown in FIG. 175 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the display of the notice icon is always executed, the player's sense of expectation may be able to be improved.

In addition, “the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

Also, in the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [eg, first special view display device 212, second special view display device 214, etc.]”
A second display means [for example, a combination of the decoration symbol display device 208, the decoration symbol display device 208 and the first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 or the effect holding lamp 286];
A game console equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons.
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice displays [eg pseudo-series effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variation effect, etc.] And
The second display means holds a display according to the number of times the operation of the symbol variation display is suspended (hereinafter referred to as the “number of reservations”). Display means capable of displaying on the reserved icon display area of the special figure 2, the variation icon display area 280, the reserved display area of the reserve lamp 286 for effect, etc.] [for example, in the reserved icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 A number of pending icons are displayed for which the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is pending, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that is started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 etc.] of the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of reservations by the number displayed.
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons [for example, the notice icon display area 285 is formed of a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6 , Each area is configured to be able to display the notice icon],
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested It is a means [for example, when the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested, the pseudo-series effect may be executed, and when the notice icon I9 of the one and two box is digested, the reach transition effect is executed There is a case etc],
A second number [eg, three, etc.] digested that is larger than the first number during the period when one symbol variation display is being executed, rather than the first number if the advance notice icon is digested. It is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if it is
A game stand characterized by "
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of an effect may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game console, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a possibility that the notice icon may be digested, so the player pays attention to the display within the hold. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the user from missing the notice corresponding to the notice icon.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and the consumption of the advance notice icon.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may have a display capable of displaying in addition to the plurality of types of notice icons. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of advance notices, or may be capable of displaying other than the plurality of types of advance notices. Further, the second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice displays, or may not display a plurality of types of notice displays.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of reservations only in the suspension display area, or may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of reservations other than the suspension display area It may be. Furthermore, the second display means may display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area without fail, and may not display the display according to the number of holdings in the holding display area .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be startable except when the hold is digested. Also, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the retention is digested, or may not be initiated even if the retention is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area of the second display means, or may be displayed other than the notice icon display area of the second display means. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area of the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or more notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than one or more notice icons. In addition, the notice icon display area may display one or more notice icons or may not display one or more notice icons.

  Further, the second display means can display only the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested can be displayed. It is also good. Further, the second display means always displays, when one of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, there may be a case where the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon is not displayed.

Also, the notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 Notice display corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since it is possible to expect the number of times to display the notice display displayed from the change at which the notice icon is displayed to the change which is digested, the game is performed so that the player does not miss the notice display. You may be able to

  Here, the notice icon may display only the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or the number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed Other items may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed, or displays a number according to the number of times the notice display may be displayed. May not do.

Also, "the second display means is a fake notice display of the same form as the form of the advance notice display [for example, a pseudo-sequence effect or reach transition effect that will be a big hit, etc.] Display means capable of displaying transition effects etc.,
The second display means is a display that has been digested when one of the notice icons [for example, the notice icon I6 for hat, the notice icon I 9 for a box, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means capable of displaying the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of the icon [for example, pseudo-run notice or reach transition effect etc. to be lost],
After the false advance notice display is displayed, the result of the symbol change display is configured to be uncovered.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the player may be tense until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or other than the false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. May also be displayable. In addition, the second display means may display a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode, or may not display a false notice display in the same manner as the notice display mode. It may be.

  Also, the second display means can display only the type of false notice display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It may be displayed, and when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it is possible to display other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon It may be Further, the second display means always displays a false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. If there is one warning icon displayed in the notice icon display area, it may not be displayed a false notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the warning icon that has been digested. .

  In addition, the result of the symbol variation display may be configured to be always disjointed after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after a false advance notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display having a high possibility of displaying a big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

In addition, during the period during which the one symbol variation display is being performed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is greater than the third number [eg, one, etc.] The fourth number [eg, three etc.] larger than the number of three is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to pay attention to the number at which the notice icon is displayed in the symbol change display.

"The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means, and
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
One display means of the plurality of display means is a reserve display means [for example, the first special view reserve lamp 218, the second special view reserve lamp 220, the effect reserve lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the hold number in the hold display area [for example, the hold lamp of the number according to the hold number, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the display of the hold display and the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display unit may be configured by two display units, or may be configured by three or more display units.

  Further, the second display means may be configured only by the image display means and the hold display means, or may be configured to include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be one in which the image display means and the hold display means are necessarily configured, or may not constitute at least one of the image display means and the hold display means.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. The hold display means may be configured to include the hold display area without fail, or may not include the hold display area.

  Also, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying a display according to the number of hold other than the hold display area It is also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the hold number in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. Further, the image display means may always display the variation display of the decorative symbol or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game console, the hold display may be clearly recognized.

  Here, the holding display means may be configured by only the light emitting means, or may be configured to include other than the light emitting means (for example, the image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. In addition, the light emitting means may be configured by LEDs of a plurality of colors, and for example, a single package may include a plurality of LEDs such as a full color LED. Moreover, it may be configured by a single color LED.

  In addition to the hold display means, the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the emission operation notification means for notifying the operation of the emission operation means may be realized by the light emission means.

Also, "the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]"
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the hold number.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, since the variation display of the decorative symbol and the holding icon are displayed on the same image display means, it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holdings while visually recognizing the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the variable display of the decorative symbol, or may be capable of displaying other than the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the image display means may always display the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may not display the variation display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, "prediction notice means capable of executing pre-notice notice [for example, decoration symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, by displaying the notice icon, there may be a case where the expectation to the big hit can be enhanced.

  Here, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing only pre-reading notice, or may be capable of executing other than pre-reading notice. In addition, the pre-reading notice means may always carry out the pre-reading notice or may not carry out the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the pre-reading notice means may be capable of executing pre-reading notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by any means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. It may be possible to execute pre-reading notice. Further, the pre-reading notice means may always execute pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the pre-reading notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

In addition, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter,“ the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold being the prefetching target shown in FIG. 159 (2), etc.] The notice icon may be digested a fifth number [eg, three etc.] during the period in which the
The symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-read objects shown in FIG. 159 (2) are executed before the second symbol variation display is executed. In the period when the symbol variation display etc. based on the suspension suspended before the eye suspension is executed)), the above-mentioned notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, one etc.] Yes,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The display according to the number of reservations is a display for informing that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed [eg, FIG. 159 It corresponds to the second hold that is the target of read-ahead during the period when the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of the read-ahead indicated in (4) is being executed Hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, the number of digests of the notice icons differs between the case of symbol variation display to be read ahead and the case of symbol variation display executed before the symbol change display to be read ahead. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to make the symbol variation display to be noticed by the player easy to understand.

  Here, during the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed In, the notice icon may be digested in a number different from the fifth number. Moreover, in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the fifth number, or in the period when the second symbol variation display is being performed The preview icon may not be digested by the fifth number.

  In addition, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. In addition, during the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be configured to be necessarily digested by the sixth number, or in the period when the first symbol variation display is being performed The advance notice icon may not be digested by the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of reservations may be able to notify only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the display according to the number of reservations may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period when the first symbol variation display is being executed, In the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed, there may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended.

In addition, "the notice icon may be started to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as" fourth symbol change display ") in which the notice icon is digested is being performed [eg, As shown in FIG. 168 (C), the digestion display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the increase display of the notice icon I6 of the hat, the notice icon I9 of the 1000 box and the notice icon I10 of the fan are lines in one symbol variation display. Being etc],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display where the notice icon is digested, the player may be expected to have an expectation until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon may be always started to be displayed, or during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon is The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start being displayed only during the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be started during a period other than the period during which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  The notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested.

In addition, during the period in which the “symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ third symbol variation display ”) to be executed before the“ fourth symbol variation display ”is executed, the fourth The notice icon to be digested may be started to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is being performed [for example, the notice icon I6 of the hat to be digested at the timing shown in FIG. It is displayed increasing during execution of the symbol variation display which is executed earlier than etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  Here, only when the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon to be digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to be started to be displayed, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notification icon to be digested may be started to be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. In addition, during the period when the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is digested during the period when the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be configured to be always started to be displayed, or In a period in which three symbol variation displays are being performed, there may be a case where the notice icon that is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may not start to be displayed.

  In addition, it is not necessary to start display of the notice icon to be digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

“The hold display area is an area capable of displaying a display according to the hold number up to a seventh number (eg, four or eight, etc.),
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number [eg, six, etc.],
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of the display according to the number of reservations and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may always display the display according to the hold number up to the seventh number, or even if the display according to the hold number may not be displayed up to the seventh number Good.

  In addition, the advance notice icon display area may display advance notice icons up to the eighth number or may not display the notice icons up to the eighth number.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of displays according to the number of reservations may be the same as the displayable maximum number of notice icons.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the display according to the number of reservations of the special view 1, or may be at least the same or the same.

  In addition, the displayable maximum number of notice icons may be larger than the displayable maximum number of the display according to the number of reservations of the special view 2, or at least it may be the same.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable maximum number of notice icons may be greater than the sum of the maximum number of displayable numbers of displays according to the number of reservations of Special Drawing 1 and Special Drawing 2, or at least the same. Good.

In addition, “reproduction means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, the decoration symbol display device 208, the speaker 210, the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, the game board lamp 532, the game stand lamp 542 Etc.],
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [eg, reach transition effect shown in FIG. 162 (49) to FIG. (50) or FIG. 174 (49)],
One of the plurality of types of preview displays is a second preview display [for example, stage change effect shown in FIG. 169 (Ac) or FIG. (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, strong reach shown in FIG. 162 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 174 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.],
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the background of the moon surface, etc.],
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second preliminary display is a preliminary display for notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this game stand, it is possible to know in advance the content of the effect to be executed, so it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  Here, the rendering means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of rendering, or may be capable of executing other than the plurality of types of rendering. Further, the rendering means may always execute a plurality of types of rendering, or may not execute a plurality of types of rendering.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays notices other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may display the first notice display and the second notice display without fail, and may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. It is also good.

  Also, the rendering means may be capable of executing only the first rendering and the second rendering, or may be capable of executing the rendering other than the first rendering and the second rendering. . In addition, the effect means may always execute the first effect and the second effect or may not execute the first effect and the second effect.

  In addition, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the first effect are executed. Good. In addition, the first advance notice display may always notify that the first effect is performed, or may not notify that the first effect is performed.

  In addition, the second advance notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that effects other than the second effect are executed. Good. In addition, the second advance notice may always notify that the second effect is to be performed, or may not notify that the second effect is to be performed.

Also, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested [eg, for example, FIG. 159 (1) to FIG. 163 (66) or FIG. 171 (1) to As shown in FIG. 175 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.],
A game stand characterized by "
I also explained about

  According to this gaming machine, since the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the display of the notice icon is always executed, the player's sense of expectation may be able to be improved.

In addition, “the game console is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a pre-reading notice, but may be separately displayable from the pre-reading notice. Alternatively, the display of the advance notice icon may be different from that displayed in the pre-reading mode. For example, the notice icon may be increased or digested even in the normal background display, and the notice icon may be increased or digested even while executing a special background mode for prefetching. It is also good.

  Also, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, and when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or c is displayed and the notice icon C is displayed. When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice display a is digested when the notice c is displayed. It is a display that is displayed in the case where it is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, “pattern for displaying notice display b, notice display c or notice display d The jackpot symbol may be more easily determined and displayed when "the symbol variation display in which the advance notice a is displayed" is performed than when the "variation display" is performed. The notice display b is a display displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is a display, and it is easier for a big hit symbol to be displayed more clearly when "the symbol variation display with the advance notice display b displayed" is executed than "the symbol variation display with the notice display c displayed" is executed. May be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if the other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested, and the notice icon C is Once digested, any one of the notice display b, notice display c or notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is finalized and displayed when "the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested" is executed rather than the "figure change display in which the notice icon C is digested" is executed. It may be configured to be easy. In addition, rather than the “pattern change display in which the advance notice display d is displayed” is executed, the one that “indication change in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed is the big hit symbol It may be configured to be easily determined and displayed.

  The following is a supplementary note including the matters described so far.

(Supplementary Note 1)
An image display means,
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
Means of notification that can execute multiple types of notifications,
A game console equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of advance notice icons.
The said hold display is a display displayed on the hold display area in the said image display means,
The said pending | holding display is a display according to the number (henceforth "the pending | holding number") by which the action | operation of the said symbol fluctuation display is suspended,
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the notice icon display area of the image display unit,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying one or more notice icons.
The notice means is a means capable of executing the notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested.
The first preview icon among the plurality of types of preview icons is larger than the first number during the period during which one of the symbol variation display is being executed. It is configured to be more likely to be a big hit if two numbers are digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 2)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number according to the number of times the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing false notice in the same manner as the notice mode,
The notice means is means capable of executing the false notice of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false announcement is executed, the result of the symbol variation display is configured to be disjointed,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number, wherein the number of preview icons to be displayed in the preview icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one symbol variation display is executed. Is configured to be more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A hold display unit capable of executing display according to the number of holdings;
The hold display unit is a display unit different from the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 6)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 5,
The hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Equipped with a pre-reading notice that can carry out pre-reading notice,
The pre-reading advance notice means is a means capable of executing the pre-reading advance notice by displaying the pre-notification icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 7,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") to be pre-read is executed, the notice icon may be digested a fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) to be executed before the second symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon is the sixth The number may be digested,
The sixth number is a number different from the fifth number,
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol change display is being held in a period during which the first symbol change display is being performed,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix 9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "fourth symbol variation display") in which the notice icon is digested is being executed, the notice icon may be started to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 10)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix 9,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) to be executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed, the fourth symbol variation is performed The notice icon may be started to be displayed during the display period.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10, wherein
The hold display area is an area capable of displaying the hold display up to a seventh number,
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icons can be displayed up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is a number different from the eighth number,
It is characterized by

(Supplementary Note 12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
It has a production means that can execute multiple types of effects,
One of the multiple types of announcements is the first announcement,
One of the multiple types of announcements is a second announcement,
The first notice is a different notice from the second notice,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice notifying that the first effect is performed,
The second notice is a notice notifying that the second effect is to be performed.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is always digested.
A game stand characterized by

(Supplementary Note 14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example, for example, the game ball is enclosed in the pachinko machine main frame, and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine main body and used The present invention can also be applied to the expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be performed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of embodiment, a modification, and an appendix described above, the component may be applied to other embodiments, a modification, and an appendix.

Claims (11)

It is a game console provided with an operable movable body,
The movable body is a movable body having a first light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a second light emitting means,
The movable body is a movable body having a first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body having drive means,
The first light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in the first state,
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable portion in the second state,
The second light emitting means does not overlap the first movable portion in the first state, and
The second light emitting means is a means that does not overlap the first movable portion in the second state,
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the first movable portion in a third state,
The substrate on which the first light emitting means is mounted is a substrate on which the second light emitting means is also mounted,
The posture of the substrate changes during operation of the first movable portion,
The movable body is a movable body that may operate when the operation means is operated,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting to the second state from the third state through at least the first state by driving of the one driving means.
The first movable portion is a movable portion having a light emitting substrate,
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in the second state.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with the structure.
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The third state is an initial state,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 3 , wherein
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the light emitting substrate in an initial state.
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 4 , wherein
The first movable portion is a movable portion having a cover,
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover in an initial state.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 5 , wherein
The first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the cover in the second state.
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , wherein
The first state is a state at a certain timing during operation of the first movable portion,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7 , which is:
The second state is a state in which the first movable portion is not in operation.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8 , wherein
Equipped with a gaming board with gaming nails,
The movable body is a movable body operable behind the gaming board.
A game stand characterized by It is a game board according to any one of claims 1 to 9 ,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8 , wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by